Category: General

  • Meaning of Sublimation, Process, and Examples in Everyday Life

    Meaning of Sublimation, Process, and Examples in Everyday Life

    Reader, do you know what sublimation is ? In our daily life there are many things with various forms and shapes. Starting from liquid, solid or gas. The form of this thing can change into another form. For example, a solid can turn into a liquid or vice versa.

    As we know, there are many kinds of events that change the existence of things. There is freezing, melting, evaporating, condensing, sublimating. Well, this article will discuss more about sublimation.

    What is sublimation? and what are examples of events that happen everyday? Before we discuss about sublimation, we need to know the explanation about solid, liquid and gas.

    Solids, Liquids and Gases

    Solids are things that have a fixed nature, shape and volume. Examples of solid objects are lilies, tables, mattresses, chairs, stones and others.

    A liquid is a thing whose properties and shape change according to its container, the volume is constant and flows from a higher place to a lower place. Examples of liquids are water and oil

    Gases are things whose nature, shape and volume are always changing. Gases also occupy space. Examples of gaseous substances are air, gas, and wind.

    Meaning of Sublimation

    Sublimation is a form of change in the form of a solid substance into a gaseous substance without going through the liquid process. In the process of sublimation requires heat energy or heat. According to Kamus Besar Bahasa Indonesia (KBBI) , sublimate comes from the word sublime which has the meaning of changing a solid substance into vapor.

    Sublimation is one form of physical change, because in the process of sublimation it is not accompanied by the formation of new substances. In addition, this sublimation process can be seen or observed with the direct eye or the naked eye from just its physical appearance or external appearance.

    Sublimation Process

    As explained earlier about the meaning of sublimation, sublimation is a change in the form or existence of a substance from a solid to a gas. The process of sublimation is to make molecules that are close to each other become distant and irregular.

    The process of sublimation is the result of the vapor pressure and temperature relationship. Just take an example of camphor, camphor or solid room fragrance. The camphor changes its form from a solid to a gaseous form whose molecules are distant from each other and irregular. Therefore, those things can emit a fragrance that makes the room fragrant.

    Solids are things that have close molecular distances with strong attraction. Meanwhile, gases have a shape like air where the molecular distance is far apart and irregular, the attraction of gases tends to be weak. Gas can be said to be a fairly light substance and its properties are almost the same as air.

    Examples of the Sublimation Process in Everyday Life

    There are many examples of sublimating events in our daily lives. Among them are camphor, dry ice to ice cubes that are kept at room temperature. Solid things that can sublimate include arsenic, water, iodine and solid carbon dioxide (dry ice). To know an example of the sublimation process, the following is a complete explanation.

    1. Kapur Barus or Camphor

    Lime that is placed around the house is usually useful to get rid of odors or even insects. Lime or camphor that if left in the wardrobe that we use will surely shrink and wear out over time.

    This is because camphor or camphor receives heat from the cabinet environment. In addition, because camphor is made from a chemical substance called naphthalene. Naphthalene is a substance that sublimates easily because it is bound by a relatively weak van der waals force.

    2. Dry Ice or Dry Ice

    Dry ice or dry ice if left in the open air will undergo a process of sublimation. The carbon dioxide or CO2 content in dry ice does not melt when heated, but instead directly changes into a gas. Dry ice sublimes at a temperature of -78 degrees Celsius under normal atmospheric pressure of 1 atm.

    3. Iodine

    Solid iodine when heated will sublimate and become gaseous iodine. Iodine gas can turn back into solid iodine after going through the cooling process.

    4. Melting Snow

    Snow is formed from complex crystals with large surface areas. The larger the surface area of ​​the snow exposed to air, the more molecules can sublimate.

    5. Ice Cubes Fresh Out of the Fridge

    Ice cubes are synonymous with the change of existence from a solid to a liquid or called melting. However, not only that, when ice cubes that have just been taken out of the fridge and placed in room temperature will emit a lot of smoke. This can happen because the ice not only melts but experiences a sublimation event.

    6. Sublimation Printer

    Nowadays, inkjet printers have been replaced by sublimation printers. Printing on the print uses heat to unite the ink and fabric into one. The advantage of the print from this printer is that it can be used immediately because the print can dry quickly.

    In addition, the use of printers with sublimation techniques is also used in the process of printing synthetic fabrics such as polyester, making T-shirts, flags and banners. By using this printing machine, the advantage is that the color is more brilliant because the coloring material is bound with synthetic fibers.

    An example of sublimation is when the process is done through this printer that uses a special film, when heated, the pigments in the film will sublimate and be captured again on paper.

    Once the pigment solidifies, it will create an image on paper. Because of the sublimation process, this printer is much more comfortable and less messy to use when compared to other types of printers.

    7. Freeze-drying

    Sublimation techniques are also often used in the culinary world or the food industry, namely freeze drying. This technique can maintain the quality of food because it uses a very low temperature.

    The drying of frozen food involves the sublimation of water from the food in a frozen state when a high-pressure vacuum is applied. In addition, this technique is also often used to preserve food brought by astronauts into outer space in order to maintain the quality of the food.

    8. Room freshener

    Room fresheners not only have a liquid form that is sprayed but there are also room fresheners that have a solid form. Air freshener is a solid that is placed at room temperature, which over time will undergo a sublimation process or turn into a gas alias into a fragrant aroma while its size will shrink or shrink.

    9. Arsenic Solids

    Arsenic solids if heated can go through the process of sublimation. this heating process will directly change from the solid phase to the gas phase, without melting or experiencing the melting phase.

    Arsenic solids can sublimate at a temperature of 616 degrees Celsius. Arsenic does not melt and directly sublimates because it has a melting point that is at 817 degrees Celsius. Which means arsenic can sublimate first without having time to melt.

    10. Glass On Scouring Tools

    For women, it’s definitely quite often to use this one hairdressing tool, the catok tool has a material made of glass which is a heat transfer material which will erode over time due to heat from electricity and become hot gas.

    11. Coal

    Coal is a black solid used for combustion. Burning coal will become carbon dioxide gas or smoke.

    12. Fireworks

    Fireworks are very identical and many are bought at the turn of the year. Fireworks have materials in the form of solids inside which when burned will produce beautiful shapes and colors. Fireworks that are lit will then explode and become carbon dioxide gas.

    13. Wick on the Candle

    The wick on a candle that burns over time will get shorter and turn into gas as the length of the candle burns.

    The Process of Changing the Form of Other Things

    Not only sublimation, there is a change in the form of other things that you must know, Reader. The following is the process of changing the form of things other than sublimation:

    1. Crystallize

    Crystallization is a change in the form of matter from a gas to a solid. The process that causes crystallization is the release of heat energy from an object.

    For example, the process of crystallization turns water vapor in the air into snow. There is also the change of air in the refrigerator into ice flowers.

    2. Freezing

    Freezing is the process of changing from a liquid to a solid. The process that is done to allow the freezing process to occur is to change the form of a liquid object by cooling it to the freezing point and then it will change into a solid object.

    An example of a change in the form of an object by means of freezing is when water is put in the freezer and it will become ice cubes or freeze.

    3. Melting

    Melting is the process of changing from a solid to a liquid. The action or action done to change things into liquid is to heat or raise the temperature of the solid thing.

    For example, when the ice in the freezer is placed in an open area or under the hot sun for a long time, then the ice cubes will turn into liquid. Ice that was initially a solid thing then turned into a liquid thing.

    4. Yawning

    Evaporation is the process of changing the state of matter from liquid to gas. The process that causes evaporation is by heating or raising the temperature of the liquid.

    For example, water that is heated over time will boil and then evaporate into smoke or gas. That already indicates that there is a change in existence from a liquid to a solid. Another example can also be seen when evaporation in the sea or river during the day will produce clouds.

    5. Condensing

    Condensation is the process of changing from a gas to a liquid. This is due to the display of heat energy experienced by the object.

    An example is when you put ice cubes and water on a glass, then the outside of the glass will become wet. In addition, the grass that is in the field in the morning, becomes wet even though there is no rain in the afternoon.

    Causes of Changes in the Form of Things

    The change that occurs in an object is certainly not without reason, that is why in the change of substance it can be recognized directly as well as using aids. Changes in the form of things can occur due to physical, chemical, and biological changes in the properties of the substances of those things.

    The following is an explanation of the causes of physical changes in solid, liquid, and gas:

    1. Physical Changes

    Physical change is a form of change in substance in an object that can be seen or observed directly with the eyes or with its physical appearance only and its external appearance. Physical changes do not change the chemical composition of a substance.

    This change does not change the material or form a new substance in an object. The special nature of this change is that the change can be observed from the outside or physically and can return to its original state as before the substance changed.

    An example of a chemical change is when iron is heated, then its size will get longer, this is called expansion. Then another example is ice that melts, the change in its form can return to its original state, which is to become a solid object by cooling it.

    2. Chemical Changes

    Chemical change is a form of change in the form of an object that occurs in the shape and size of a substance and produces a new, different substance. This change in form will produce different or new material types and properties from the original substance.

    A chemical reaction will create a substance or composition that changes into a new chemical formula. This change in chemical form is caused by the material reduction of the substance when it changes. Chemical changes can occur from the factors of combustion, cooling, heating, and decomposition.

    An example of this chemical change is wood that is burned then it will produce charcoal and gas or smoke. This change to charcoal and gas cannot be changed back to its original form, which is wood, because the change is chemical.

    3. Biological Changes

    Biological changes are changes that occur due to the influence of the activity of other living beings or decomposing microorganisms such as fungi, bacteria and other trace elements. Similar to chemical changes, biological changes also cause changes in things that cannot return to their original form before they change.

    Examples of biological changes that you can find in everyday life are like wood becoming weathered and disintegrating over time, fruits that start to rot. The time required in this weathering process is very long.

    The World According to Physics

    Closing

    As explained above, the change in the form of things is not only sublimation, but there are several others, such as evaporation, freezing, melting, crystallizing, and condensing. Every change in existence will definitely be around us. For example, water that freezes, until it becomes ice cubes.

     

  • Meaning of Condensation, Types, Until the Process Occurs

    Meaning of Condensation, Types, Until the Process Occurs

    Definition of Condensation – The nature of changes in the form of things is divided into two types, namely temporary changes and permanent changes. Temporary changes are said to be physical changes, while permanent changes are called chemical changes. Transient changes are usually shown through the process of freezing, melting, evaporating, condensing, sublimating and dissolving. If an object undergoes one of these processes, its existence will return to its original state.

    Meanwhile, changes in existence still occur if things undergo changes that cannot return to their original form. Permanent changes are usually shown by burning and decaying processes.

    On this occasion, we will discuss more about dew or condensation. Usually, when the night air is very cold, then in the morning dew will appear on the leaves. In fact, not a few people will play with the dew on the leaves. Dew itself is one of the nature of changes in existence.

    Condensation itself has another name, namely condensation. However, not many people know the condensation process. To find out, you can read this article, Reader.

    Meaning of Condensation or Condensation

    Condensation is a process of changing the form of matter into a more dense form, such as gas (or steam) into liquid, a change of substance that releases heat. Condensation is the opposite of evaporation which releases heat.

    In addition, this condensation occurs when the water vapor in the air passes through a surface that is colder than the dew point of the water vapor, then this water vapor will condense into water droplets or dew.

    According to the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), the meaning of the word condense is to become dew. Another meaning of condense is to become water droplets (about steam). As explained before, dew usually appears at night. This is the same as the definition of dew according to KBBI, which is water droplets that fall from the air (especially at night).

    Meaning of Condensation According to Experts

    In addition to the meaning of condensing or condensation according to KBBI, some experts also expressed the meaning of condensing or condensation. Some experts also say that condensing or condensation is difficult to separate from what is called precipitation. Here is the meaning of condensation according to experts, among others.

    1. Wibowo et al (2016)

    The definition of precipitation according to Wibowo is an event of water falling from the atmosphere to the earth’s surface. The form of the falling liquid can be snow, rain, fog and dew.

    2. Triatmodjo (2008)

    The definition of precipitation according to Triatmodjo is the descent of water from the atmosphere to the earth’s surface which can consist of dew, snow, hail, and rain. Precipitation for tropical regions, rain provides a large role or function. This is seen where it is usually not what is considered precipitation.

    3. Karnaningroem (1990)

    Karnaningroem said that the condensation process is a process of changing the form of gas into a liquid form due to the difference in temperature. The condensation temperature changes in accordance with the vapor pressure that occurs.

    4. According to Research

    According to researchers, the definition of precipitation is any product from the condensation of water in the atmosphere. It occurs when the atmosphere becomes saturated and the water then condenses and comes out of the solution (precipitated).

    5. Quoted in the Natural Science Textbook of Business and Management Expertise

    Condensation is the change of substance from gas to liquid. During the condensation process, the gas releases heat (heat energy), so it turns into a liquid.

    Type of Dew or Condensation

    It turns out that the dew itself has a type. As for the type of condensation which is divided into two types, namely exterior condensation and interior condensation:

    1. Exterior Condensation

    Exterior condensation is a condensation that occurs when moist air touches a cold surface such as glass.

    2. Interior Condensation

    Interior condensation is a condensation that occurs when there is too much air humidity in a closed room, so that when directly compared to the amount of warm air in the room it will cause warm air.

    Process of Condensation

    The process of condensation or condensation occurs when water vapor in the air passes through a surface that is much colder than a water vapor dew point, then this water vapor condenses into water droplets or dew. The process of cloud formation is the result of condensation.

    The rise of water vapor is due to sunlight condensing in the air. This is because the air above the earth’s surface is much lower than a water vapor dew point.

    The process of condensation that occurs is what causes clouds to form. Normally, for condensation to take place, the atmosphere needs to be completely saturated. In other words, a vapor pressure must reach a maximum. In addition to saturated clouds, the nature of water must have a surface on which water can condense.

    Meanwhile, in the atmosphere, condensation often occurs around dusty particles or other particles such as smoke or even microscopic bacteria.

    Impact of Condensation

    In general, condensation is one of the biggest causes of short circuits, because with condensation, it will create water dew inside the unit board which can cause bad contact on a device or worse cause a short circuit.

    For this reason, the recommended temperature for the temperature of the room where the medical equipment is located is 17°C-20°C, even for the control panel room on a large unit such as CT Scan or MRI of course requires special temperature monitoring even if it is equipped with room exhaust or cooler packets in units.

    A temperature change that is too drastic, for example from a very cold temperature of 16°C to a much warmer room temperature such as 23°C, will likely cause condensation. If this is allowed to continue, not only can it cause a short circuit, but it can cause the equipment to be easily damaged.

    Examples of Condensation in Everyday Life

    Here are some examples of condensation in everyday life.

    1. Condensation in the Morning

    Condensation in the morning when we see wet leaves or grass when at night there is no rain or dew drops that appear on the wall of the glass if the glass is filled with cold water. Condensation in the tent occurs due to the presence of water in the form of steam as a result of the breathing process.

    The tighter the conditions of the tent, the more severe the possibility of condensation will occur due to respiratory vapors trapped in the tent walls. The formation of water droplets through condensation from water vapor in the clouds. These water droplets will then fall in the form of rain.

    2. Drop in Temperature at Night

    At night and in the morning, the temperature tends to cool down. Earth’s air contains water vapor in it. The more water vapor content, the more humid the air. This causes water vapor that is trapped in the air to condense or condense, producing dew drops.

    3. Cloud and Rain Formation Process

    According to the US Geological Survey , clouds form in the atmosphere because air containing water vapor rises and cools. Water vapor in the form of gas rises to the atmosphere due to evaporation. Height in the atmosphere causes less pressure, indirectly lowering air temperature.

    As a result, the temperature of the air at the top of the atmosphere is colder than the temperature of the earth’s surface. When the water vapor reaches the top of the atmosphere, the water vapor then cools, turns into water droplets and forms clouds.

    4. Water Drops on Cold Drinks

    Cold drinks have a lower temperature than room temperature. When placed at room temperature, the water vapor in the air around the cold drink will condense and condense. Condensed water vapor turns into liquid water.

    This is the reason why canned drinks or cold drinks in glasses always drip water. Not because the packaging of the cold drink leaked, but because the water vapor around it condensed.

    5. Fog on Glasses

    Misty glasses are the use of glasses when eating warm food and drinks. This is because hot water vapor from food and drink rises towards the face and meets the colder air. So, the water vapor condenses, forming small droplets of water vapor. The water vapor drops then stick to the glasses and make them foggy.

    6. Fog on the Car Window

    A foggy car window is an example of an everyday occurrence that shows condensation. According to Sciencing, the air inside the car is warmer and contains a lot of water vapor from the breath of its passengers.

    While the car glass temperature is colder because it is affected by the open air. The water vapor that is close to the car glass then condenses, becoming a fog that covers the car glass.

    7. Heated Sugarcane Drip Liquid

    8. Dew on Foliage

    Drops of water (dew) on the leaves in the morning. Although there was no rain the night before, in the morning there were water drops on the plants outside. The occurrence of dew in the morning helps the process of distillation (distillation) of certain substances.

    9. Gases that Become Dew

    The vaporized gas is flowed into a cold container, so that the gas turns into dew which then becomes alcohol water.

    10. Drops of Water on the Pot

    There are water droplets on the lid of the pot because the pot is hot.

    11. Dew on Bathroom Glass

    Bathroom glass will be watery if exposed to hot water vapor.

    Changes in Appearance Other than Condensation

    Basically, the changes that happen around us are not only condensation, but there is still much more. For more details, it will be explained in the discussion below.

    Melting

    In addition to condensation, there is also a change in the form of other objects, including melting. Melting is a change in the state of a solid to a liquid due to a hot temperature. Some events around you can show this event (melting). One of them is ice that melts when left at room temperature or warm temperature

    Here is an example of melting namely:

    1. Heated ice cubes or ice cream that is left continuously in an open space will melt over time.
    2. A candle that is lit will eventually melt because it is heated.

    Yawning

    The next change in the form of matter is the change in the form of evaporation. Evaporation is the change of form of a liquid into a gas. This event is easy to find when there is cooking activity. When the water is heated on the stove in a few seconds, the water will boil.

    The boiling event is an example of the occurrence of evaporation or change from a liquid to a gas at the same time, there is a reduction in the volume of water.

    Here are examples of yawning among others

    1. Evaporation on clothes that have been dried in the sun.
    2. Gasoline that is left open will eventually run out because it turns into gas.

    Sublime

    Sublimation is a change in the state of a gas to a solid. The “disappearance” of Barus camphor placed in the cupboard is often used as an example of sublimation. An example of this event occurs when it is cooled to a certain temperature.

    Here is an example of sublimation:

    1. Camphor that is placed in the wardrobe for a long time will run out.
    2. Air fresheners that last for a long time run out of air.

    Freezing

    The change from solid to liquid is called freezing. In this case, the liquid object is cooled to its freezing point, then it will change into a solid object. In this event, the substance releases heat energy.

    Here is an example of freezing:

    1. Water that is put in the refrigerator, over time will turn into ice.
    2. Gelatin powder that is dissolved in hot water will harden over time if left to cool.

    Crystallize

    Crystallization is a change in form from a gas to a solid. In this event, the substance releases heat energy.

    Here is an example of crystallisation:

    1. The vapor in the air turns into snow.
    2. Ice flowers attached to the wall of the freezer.

    Snow Formation. An example of crystallization events in everyday life is the formation of snow and ice directly from water vapor in saturated clouds without having to turn into liquid water first.

    That is, solid snow is formed directly from water vapor which is a gas. The process of snow formation by crystallization occurs at low temperatures, which is around minus 12 to minus 15°C.

    Frost, during the winter, is often seen ice formed on the roof of the house and plant leaves. The ice is frost formed through a crystallization event. Where the ambient temperature is very cold, so water vapor (gas phase) immediately crystallizes and turns into ice (solid phase) on the surface of things. Water vapor freezes without melting first.

    Black soot on vehicle exhaust. An example of the next crystallizing event is the presence of black soot on the muffler. Not only on exhausts, black soot is also often seen in fireplaces or machines that use fossil fuels such as petroleum, coal and natural gas.

    Black soot is black carbon. According to the Climate and Clean Air Coalition, black carbon or black soot is the result of incomplete combustion of fossil fuels and biomass. Black carbon is formed as a result of combustion gas that crystallizes and turns into black particles and forms soot in the exhaust of motor vehicles.

    Dry ice is often used as a cooling agent, making various foods, also making fog and smoke effects in a show. The formation of dry ice is an example of a crystallization or deposition event. According to Encyclopedia Britannica, dry ice is made from carbon dioxide gas that is compressed and turns solid at a temperature of around minus 57 degrees Celsius.

    Conclusion

    When we see dew, we will certainly be very happy, especially since dew is believed to have many benefits, especially for eye health. Because of this, not a few people have dew in their eyes in the morning, are you one of them? Dew itself has several types, namely interior and exterior condensation.

     

  • The Meaning of Plant Grafting together with the Ways and Benefits

    The Meaning of Plant Grafting together with the Ways and Benefits

    In the process of obtaining quality fruit, it is necessary to do some efforts that we are familiar with by grafting plants. Plant grafting is a method of artificial vegetative propagation. The breeding method aims to obtain results that are more or less the same as the parent, or even better.

    Meaning of Plant Grafting

    The process of grafting plants is a fairly simple and easy breeding process. The process of grafting plants can even be done by people who don’t understand much about plantations, but on the condition that the person understands the steps involved in grafting.

    Grafting is one of the fastest solutions to grow roots on plant stems. Therefore, most of the grafting process uses twigs that are not too large. Grafting has the main purpose of producing fruit more quickly with the growth of the plant not being too large.

    F. Rahardi in his book entitled In order for plants to bear fruit quickly revealed that grafting can only be applied to dicotyledonous or dicotyledonous types of seed plants. In order to get high-quality results, the branches or twigs that will be used in grafting must not be too old or too young.

    Steps to Plant Grafting

    Well, before doing the grafting process, there are some things that are done and observed.

    1. Choose the parent plant to be grafted.

    This selection is the most important step. The good and bad result of grafting is determined from the selection of the parent plant. Therefore, before grafting it is expected to ensure that the parent plant that will be used in grafting has good quality.

    2. Choose twigs or plant stems that are straight.

    There are several conditions that need to be observed before choosing a stem for grafting, namely that the stem is not too old or too young. In addition, the selected plant stems should be straight and get enough sunlight. The selection of the plant stem here has the purpose so that the photosynthesis process in the plant can run well and can accelerate root growth on the grafted plant stem.

    3. Peel the skin on the plant stem

    The first step to be done in this stage is to peel the bark 5 cm long. The trunk or twig or branch to be used must be peeled off the skin. Make sure the stem of the plant is clean of the attached bark.

    4. Clean the cambium on the plant stem

    The cambium on the stem or twig or branch of the plant should be cleaned around it with a knife first. The easiest technique to clean the cambium content on the plant stem is to feel the part of the plant stem. If the plant stem feels rough, then it can be confirmed that the plant stem is clean from the cambium.

    5. Leave the plant stem for 1 day.

    This step needs to be done so that the stems of the plants that have been peeled can dry and be resistant to diseases and fungi. At this stage, what needs to be ensured is the cambium content on the plant stem, hopefully the plant stem is clean and there is no cambium attached. This step will be beneficial so that the grafting results can grow well in producing high-quality and high-quality seeds.

    6. Covering the plant stem

    The next step is to wrap the plant stem with plastic or use coconut coir. Packaging can be done by first tying the bottom of the plant stem that has been peeled off. After making a rope at the bottom of the plant stem, the next thing is to fill the plant stem with soil. Land use is expected to be fertile land. Finally, wrap the top with plastic or coconut coir until it resembles a capsule.

    7. Watering plants routinely and regularly.

    The process of transplanting plants requires patience and diligence. Things that can be done so that the grafting process can be faster and the graft can immediately produce roots, which is to do routine and regular watering. It is not allowed to let the soil in it experience dryness due to lack of water intake. Besides. The thing that can be done to make the soil more fertile is adding fertilizer.

    8. Wait until the roots grow.

    Well, the signs that the grafting process has been successful is that the plant stem produces brown roots growing out of the wrapper. Once the roots have come out, it can be confirmed that the stem of the grafted plant can be cut and then sown.

    Benefits of grafting plants

    As mentioned above, the process of grafting plants is a quick way to produce beautiful fruits and flowers. Plus, combining two plants into one will make the plant stronger and resistant to various diseases and fungi. But, behind the superiority of grafting plants, grafting also has disadvantages that need to be noted.

    Here are some advantages and disadvantages of the grafting process.

    Advantages:

    Proportionate height

    The grafted plant will have a lower height than its parent. Plants that are tall but can already bear fruit or flower make plants easier to treat and not messy.

    Fruiting or flowering fresh and lush

    Grafted plants will be faster to bear fruit or flower. In addition, because the grafting process comes from a quality parent, the fruit or flower produced will also be better when compared to the parent.

    Quality like parent

    The process of grafting plants will not reduce the quality of the parent, in fact the grafted plant will have the same or even better quality than the parent.

    Disadvantages:

    The parent is broken.

    The grafting process will not actually reduce the quality of the parent, but what needs to be noted is excessive peeling on the stem of the parent plant. As a result of being peeled more than used, it can make the parent damaged and even die.

    Prone to death.

    After the graft takes out the roots and is ready to cut and sow. The thing to pay attention to is maintenance. Grafted plants must be given special care and cannot be neglected. Newly sown grafted plants are not as strong as plants sown from seeds, therefore, special and diligent care must be taken so that the plants can grow optimally.

    Well, knowledge about the advantages and disadvantages of grafting plants is very necessary, considering that there are many things that need to be observed so that plants can grow lushly and develop well. It’s like taking care of a child, plants that are still small and just growing need special attention, which is certainly different from plants that have grown. Therefore, the key to successful grafting is the perseverance of the owner.

    The difference between layering and grafting

    In fact, there are many and varied ways of grafting. The naming of grafting is also different, from layering, grafting, to transplantation.

    Here are the differences in the ways of grafting plants.

    1. Layering

    Layering is a way of grafting plants by planting plant branches that are still connected to the parent plant to be used as roots and grow new plants. After the graft takes root, the stem of the plant is then cut to be sown.

    2. Grafting

    Grafting is a method of grafting that combines two different types of plants into one. Many people do Grafting to produce fruit or flowers that are fresher and more lush.

    3. Transplantation

    Transplantation is a method of grafting by moving plants from one place to another. In the process of transplanting, you will usually need new soil and pots.

    Once again, thoroughness in performing the method of grafting and treating grafted plants is the key to successful grafting. Therefore, the correct knowledge of the basic techniques of grafting is the best step before starting to graft plants

    Artificial Vegetative Reproduction

    Reproduction basically means making again. In the field of plants, reproduction can usually be interpreted as breeding or in other words extending the lineage, It should be noted that reproduction in plants can take place in two ways, namely Sexually (Generative) and Asexually (vegetative).

    • Sexual (Generative): This means that new plants that grow are the result of the Fertilization process. Fertilization itself can be interpreted as the fusion of male gamete cells and female gamete cells. Simply put, this process is common and common as a marriage process.
    • Vegetative means, new plants that are produced without going through the fertilization process. Vegetative itself can be divided into two types, namely natural vegetative and artificial vegetative.

    Natural vegetative can be done with special means or tools. Natural vegetative growth usually occurs in meristem cells. The natural way of vegetative reproduction is by: rhizome rooting, stolons, stem tubers, layered tubers, root tubers, buds and adventitious buds.

    While Artificial Vegetative is a breeding process that is successful due to getting help from outside parties, or humans. Artificial vegetation can also occur due to human engineering. Artificial vegetative reproduction has a specific purpose, such as to obtain superior seeds as desired.

    Interestingly, artificial vegetative reproduction is not only grafting. Here are five methods of artificial vegetative reproduction, namely grafting, sticking (oculation), connecting, cuttings, and bending down.

    The following are the methods of artificial vegetative reproduction:

    1. Grafting

    As discussed above, grafting is one of the fastest processes to multiply plants in artificial vegetative propagation. The end result of grafting is making the trunk or branch of a tree produce roots. Briefly, the grafting step is to peel off a little bark of the tree and then wrap it with coconut coir or plastic and sprinkle it with soil.

    Plants that can be grafted are only dicot plants or dicots. The most commonly grafted plants are oranges, guava, mango, rambutan, or durian.

    2. Steak

    Cuttings are one of the artificial vegetative propagation. Steps to cut the plant can be done by cutting on one part of the plant. Further, the cuttings of the plant can be directly planted on the plant stem that has been opened with a knife.

    Cuttings are one of the fastest and most common ways to propagate plants. Plants that are cut are usually ornamental plants and fruit plants, such as grapes, passion fruit, apples or peppers.

    3. Oculation

    Oculation is one of the methods often used to multiply plant seeds. Oculation can be done by sticking a piece of tree bark that has buds from the upper trunk on a slice of another tree bark. Usually, tree bark is taken from the lower trunk. This is meant for the plant to unite and become a new plant.

    Some people usually use inoculation as one of the techniques to improve plant quality in an artificial vegetative way. Just like other methods, artificial vegetative propagation by means of occulation aims to obtain superior quality plant seeds.

    4. Connecting

    Connecting plants is one way to multiply plants. This process itself can be done by combining the upper stem and lower stem of two similar plants. The purpose of the self-fertilization process is to combine the superior properties of two plants. It is hoped to obtain a plant that has superior properties.

    The joining technique is usually used for vegetable crops such as tomatoes and eggplants. In addition, it is also widely used for fruit crops such as coffee, cassava, or mango.

    5. Bend down

    Bending over is also one of the techniques used to multiply plants. The bending process uses a technique by bending the stem or branch into the ground to be piled with soil. However, the tip of the plant is still removed to the soil surface. In this breeding process, the tree trunks used must be old or mature trunks.

    The process of prostrate reproduction is usually applied to plants that have long and flexible stems or branches. The plants that are commonly used for breeding are bent over, namely betel nut. The way of bending down to make cambium on the plant stem does not need to be removed, because it has been removed by the soil naturally.

  • Understanding Memos: Purpose, Types, Features, Sections, and Writing Tips

    Understanding Memos: Purpose, Types, Features, Sections, and Writing Tips

    Meaning of Memo – Surely Reader is no stranger to what a memo is. If Reader thinks that a memo is usually written on a small note paper or sticky note and then pasted on a book or an item as an important note to be read, that thought is not wrong.

    Broadly speaking, a memo is indeed a reminder or a brief note about a problem that is being discussed. But it turns out, the memo is not just a simple note because the memo has two functions, which are official and unofficial.

    Then, what is the meaning of the memo? What about the official and unofficial functions of a memo?

    Well, for Reader to understand that, let’s read the following review!

    Meaning of Memo

    According to Keraf (1980), the memo stands for memorandum and has various meanings, namely (1) memorandum means an informal note or reminder letter, (2) memorandum means a statement of diplomatic relations, and (3) memorandum means a form of communication aimed at to advice, instructions, or explanations.

    Meanwhile, based on KBBI (Kamus Besar Bahasa Indonesia), this memo or memorandum is a form of communication that contains suggestions, instructions, or explanations in the form of notes. In addition, memos can also be used as a statement in diplomatic relations.

    Not only that, a memo or memorandum can also be used by the leadership of an organization or company in an effort to deliver a short message in the form of a notification or request in an organization or company.

    Well, based on some of the definitions that have been explained, it can be concluded that a memo is a form of communication through short messages that are usually in the form of suggestions, notifications, requests, and written in a note.

    In practice, it is very rare for employees to give a memo to their superiors, especially in an organization or business enterprise.

    Meanwhile, in the legal realm, a memorandum report usually has one to three pages only. If there is more than one page, efforts should be made to summarize it so that the reader does not have to read the entire information.

    Purpose of Memo Writing

    The purpose of writing a memo is to request or provide information to someone to be addressed. For example, Ana wants to write a memo to her father that she is going to college, so the purpose of writing the memo is to notify her father that she is going to college.

    Types of Memos

    Previously, it was explained that the memo was official and unofficial. Official memos are usually written by companies with important contexts or matters. While on informal memos, written personally. Well, here is the description.

    1. Official Memo

    As the name suggests, in an official memo the context is definitely an important matter. Usually this type of memo is used as a statement as an official link between the leader and his subordinates, in a company, institution or agency.

    2. Informal Memo/ Personal Memo

    Next is an unofficial memo or it can also be called a personal memo. It is called so because usually the contents of the notification are unofficial matters, and are addressed to friends, relatives, family, even the closest people.

    Characteristics of a Memo

    Memos are fundamentally different from notice boards. Well the following are the characteristics of a memo.

    • Contains suggestions, instructions, or explanations about something
    • The information presented is clear and relevant
    • In an official memorandum, it has parts like a letter, but simpler
    • In an unofficial memorandum, the identity of the office is not included (name of the office, telephone number, office address)
    • Delivered horizontally (parties with equivalent positions), as well as vertically (from superiors to subordinates, or vice versa)
    • The language used is shorter, more concise, and simpler

    Sections of the Memo

    Previously, it was explained that a memo is a short message. Despite this, memos still have certain parts, especially in official memos. Well here is the description.

    • Head part

    Just like humans, a memo also has a head that is located on top. The head of this memo consists of the memo header, the name of the sender, and the name of the recipient of the memo.

    • Content section

    The next part is the body of the memo which consists of the information to be conveyed by the sender to the recipient.

    • Closing Section

    The last part is the closing part or the foot of the memo. The footer of this memo consists of the date the memo was written, the signature, and the clear name of the memo maker.

    Signing is very necessary, especially on official memos, because it shows that the information contained in the memo is important information in an official context.

    General Structure In A Memorandum

    When talking about the memorandum, the context must be official. Although memos and memorandums are actually the same thing, many people think that memos are related to informal contexts, while memorandums are related to official contexts.

    1. Memo letterhead

    This section later contains a brief explanation related to from and for whom the memo was made. The header of the memo usually contains the name of the maker, the purpose of the memo, the subject of the memo or topic, and the date.

    In the placement of dates should be actual.

    2. Introduction

    Next is the introductory structure located in the first paragraph of a memo. This introduction contains information about the purpose of the memo without being verbose. For example, a sentence such as “I am writing this memo to request approval regarding…”

    It should be known that the memo is to-the-point information, so that the delivery should also be to the point.

    3. Details

    The next structure is detailed. In this structure contains details of the purpose or subject of the memo which can be placed in the paragraph after the introduction. Similar to the introductory structure, the details should also be simple.

    For example: ” Along with the growth of the company and business, we have a new target market as of today … … 2022, so as the main director, I decided to separate the video and promotional content team from the marketing division. Furthermore, this team will move as an independent division effective from today ”

    4. Closing

    In the last structure of a memo, it must contain the contact number of the party that can be contacted in relation to the contents of the memo. For example, a memo containing permission to use the building for a festival event, then the closing part should have the contact of the relevant official clearly when the permission is approved.

    An example sentence: ” When permission is approved, please be willing to contact the Business Manager via the following email address… For his attention, I thank you and have a good job “.

    Tips for Compiling a Memo

    Specifically for an official memo, the compilation should use effective standard language, because the use of this memo is in an official context.

    • When you want to write a memo, it’s best to write it briefly and concisely, straight to the point.
    • Use language that is appropriate for who will receive it. When the receiver is someone with a certain position, use standard and effective language. However, when the recipient is the closest person in an informal context, can use everyday language but must be polite and clear in content.
    • Don’t forget to include the name of the memo maker clearly so that the existence of the memo can be accounted for.
    • Also include the recipient’s name so that the memo is not misdirected.

    Sample Memo

    Sample Official School Memo

    NEO CULTURE ZONE HIGH SCHOOL

    Jl. Citizen No.127 Tanjung Karang Barat

    Tel. (081) 332344 Email: culturezonehighschool@gmail.com

    MEMO

    From: Principal

    To: Head of SMA Neo Culture Zone

    I would like to discuss with you about the implementation of the Annual Festival in the framework of the 23rd School Anniversary which will last for three days. This discussion is to discuss the students so that they can better prepare for the Annual Festival.

    The discussion will be held on October 22, 2019. It is requested that you and all OSIS members prepare data about the Festival’s readiness. God willing, this discussion will be held later in the day after the second break in the OSIS room. That’s it and thank you.

    Bekasi, October 22, 2022

    Principal

    Kuncoro

    Sample Enterprise Memo

    PT Eska Lokal

    Jl. Jendral Sudirman No. 18 Depok

    Tel. 0212121212

    MEMO

    From: Managing Director

    To: Financial Staff

    Please prepare this month’s financial report. The report will be used as evaluation material with the board of directors which will be held at the monthly meeting, on December 19, 2019, at 10.00 WIB, in the office hall.

    The financial report still needs a lot to be prepared, so I really hope that you and all the staff can prepare the report as soon as possible. Don’t forget to send a soft copy of the report to my email. That’s it and thank you.

    Depok, December 13, 2021

    Principal Director

    Chandra Bayuji

    Example of an Organizational Memo

    Central Java Education Office

    State Vocational High School 1 Solo

    MEMO

    May 22, 2021

    From: Principal

    To : The entire Council of Teachers and School Staff

    It is requested for the entire council of teachers and staff to participate in reminding the students of SMK Negeri 1 Solo in the movement of neatness, such as putting on a shirt, wearing uniform black shoes, and neatness of hair, this is done so that the students become trained and accustomed to always appear neat in while in the school environment and outside of school. Thank you.

    Principal

    Kirino Saputra

    Well, that’s a comment on the meaning of memos and examples . If you often write notes on a sticky note and stick it on the fridge or table when you want to leave, that also includes a memo, which is an unofficial memo.

     

  • The Meaning of National Science: Systematics, and the Linkage of National Science with Other Sciences

    The Meaning of National Science: Systematics, and the Linkage of National Science with Other Sciences

    Meaning of National Knowledge – Friends of Reader, are there any of you who have a focus of interest in studying the country? Studying the country is a fundamental part of studying the building of national science. By studying the science of the state, we have opened the gates of other state sciences, such as the science of state administration law and the science of state law.

    That is why, many scientists say that national science is a “knowledge gate” to the next national science. It is the same as studying politics which is a basic part of studying the building of political science.

    Similarly, studying law is the main part of studying law. We will know that studying or understanding a country will expand our way to understand a country. Therefore, understanding the concepts of the country first becomes the main prerequisite in learning the science of the country.

    Below will be an explanation of the meaning, systematics, and the connection of national science with other sciences.

    Meaning of National Science

    National science is a science that belongs to the group of social sciences that study the origin, purpose, formation, and disappearance of the state in a general, abstract, and universal way. Further explanation can be presented as follows.

    1. National science “studying the country in general”, meaning discussion using general arguments, that is the general understanding of the country. If it is applied to the countries in the world, the above argument is generally agreed as a valid statement;
    2. National science “studying the country abstractly”, meaning in its description it presents the country as a value. In this case, what is observed is not just a country, but the country in general. Thus, the science of the state is distinguished from the science of state planning or state administration and the science of government. These three sciences study a country in a real situation, for example the constitution of Indonesia, the administration of Indonesia, and the government of Indonesia;
    3. National science “studying the country universally”, meaning the values ​​that exist and apply anywhere.

    From the description above, it can be stated that national science is science. The meaning of science here is the result of human thought that is objective and organized systematically. A science has the following characteristics.

    1. Being objective, it means that science must also be able to pursue the truth that can be generally accepted;
    2. Being systematic, it means that the understandings obtained cannot be separated, but are a close and whole unity.

    National Science Systematics

    A scholar named George Jellinek, in his book entitled Algemeine Staatslehre , revealed that national science has the following systematics.

    1. National science as s taatswissenschaft (science in the narrow sense), which investigates the country in an abstract and general state;
    2. National science as rechtswissenschaft (science in a broad sense), which is divided into two categories, namely individual staaslehre (science that investigates a specific country), for example studying state institutions, the judiciary, and so on; as well as pezielle staaslehre (science whose research is aimed at the country in a general sense, as well as representative institutions that are studied specifically).

    George Jellinek.

    George Jellinek is the figure who first formulated national science as a science that stands on its own. This caused him to be nicknamed “the father of national science.” This then raises a question, namely “Has national science been studied as science before the systematization done by George Jellinek?”

    In this case, the answer to the question still raises speculation because at that time national science has not yet become an independent science and its nature is still descriptive or includes all knowledge related to the state. Questions such as religion, politics, culture, morality, and economy related to the country are included in the discussion of national science.

    This can be known from the works of Plato and Aristotle in Ancient Greece in the book titled Politeia and Politica , which talks about the issues of the state in it. At that time, the object that was observed and studied was the city state (city state) which is known as the police with a territory that is not as large and the number of people is not many.

    It is not surprising if all issues related to the country can be compiled and poured into a work that discusses the country. However, that condition in its development could no longer be maintained due to the emergence of the nation state , with the boundaries of sovereignty expanding and reaching even larger territories and populations.

    As a result of this condition, there is a need for lessons about the country that need to be systematized in independent science.

    Regarding learning in Indonesia, national science was introduced by Universitas Gadjah Mada (UGM) in 1946. When compiling the study material for the law faculty, UGM compared it with the Rechstsschool (law school) located in Jakarta. However, the curriculum structure was found to be incompatible with the reality of independence and then a comparison was sought at the University of Leiden, the Netherlands.

    In relation to that, the initial lecture on national science was named Staatsleer (the term national science which comes from the Dutch language) which covers the main issues about the state and is free from colonial reality. In further development, there are also those who use the term “Theory of the Nation”, especially in the study of political science to systematize the object of research on the country.

     

    The Relation of National Science with Other Sciences

    National science has been taught for a long time, but it was only at the beginning of the 20th century that it was compiled as a systematic science by George Jellinek. With the development of the social situation as taught by Herbert Spencer, there is also a need for branches of science that conduct specific research on certain fields.

    With that statement, national science then has a relationship with other branches of science, among others with the science of constitutional law, the science of state administrative law, political science, and economic science.

    1. The relationship between State Science and State Law

    It has been stated that national science has a general research object regarding the growth, existence, formation, and disappearance of the country or it can also be about a specific country. This is the similarity between the science of the state and the science of constitutional law, that is, they both have the object of research in the form of the state.

    However, the object of research in the science of constitutional law is more concrete because it is bound to time, place, situation, and certain arrangements, for example the constitutional law of Indonesia, the constitutional law of the United States, and so on. Some parties even say emphatically that the science of constitutional law is law about the organization of the state.

    This is what causes the details of discussion in the science of constitutional law to be linked to state organs, relations between state organs, citizenship, the validity of laws, and so on. Thus, the connection between the two branches of knowledge is the same in its object, but the issues discussed are different.

    Of course, in order to learn the science of constitutional law, you must have a sufficient introduction to the subjects related to the joints of the state, all of which are found in the science of the state.

    2. The relationship between State Science and State Administration Law

    In general, administrative law is defined as the law that regulates the relationship between administrative organs and citizens. The areas that are the focus of the discussion are licensing, state officials, taxes, registration that creates rights, and so on.

    Thus, what is learned from the science of national administration law is the same as the science of the state, namely the state. The difference is that political science examines the basic elements of the state in general and abstract terms, while the legal science of state administration actually examines “the state in motion”, that is the relationship between (organs of) the state and society.

    For this reason, the knowledge of the state becomes the basis for learning the law of state administration, because to learn the latter, it also requires basic concepts related to the state.

    3. Relationship between National Science and Political Science

    Political science is a branch of science that studies issues related to the state. The object of his study is grundlagen (conditions for the establishment of the state), wesen (state essence), e rscheinungsformen (formations of the state), and landesentwicklung (state development).

    However, not all things that intersect with the state studied by a branch of science can be categorized as political science, but become a supporting element in the study of politics, for example:

    • History, especially that which concerns people or the country, is not part of the discipline of political science, unless it concerns the history of statecraft or the constitution. The behavior of community life, individual actions, history of literature, science, economic conditions, morality, military, diplomatic struggle, all of these cannot be categorized into a part of political science;
    • Statistics, especially those related to societal social problems, are not part of the discipline of political science;
    • Economic politics, especially those related to economic law and applied to individuals, are not related to the state, so they are not part of the discipline of political science;
    • Social studies, especially those related to identity, are not related to the state, so they are not part of the discipline of political science.

    Based on the Greek tradition, political science is called the term politiki . Furthermore, in Germany, studies were developed on s tasrecht (public law) and politics ( politics) as two different branches of science. Later, other differentiations developed, such as political statistics, administration, international relations, and so on.

    In its development, especially in the practice of learning, there is a difference between the object of study of political science in Europe, especially England and France, and in the United States. In learning in Europe, they take the root of the material in Ancient Greece, so the character of the material is conservative and normative. As for the study of political science in the United States, it already has a more specific meaning, which is about certain symptoms related to other countries.

    Meanwhile, political science in Indonesia until the 1960s was still taught by legal scholars, so the nature of the study was analytical and normative. It was only later with Miriam Budiardjo’s initiative and the establishment of an independent faculty that political science began to establish its object of study which has more special characteristics than the object of study of national science in the Faculty of Law.

    Although the method and institutionalization of the idea of ​​study differ from one country to another, in general it can be said that the object of political science study is about the country. This is where his attachment to national science lies. National science in this case provides a basic understanding of the main issues of the country, while the study of certain aspects of the country is empirically done by political science.

    In the subsequent growth, the object of study of political science becomes the provisions that apply in a certain country, so that in its development it will be studied by the science of constitutional law.

     

    4. Relationship between National Science and Economics

    The question of the role of the state or government in the economic field has for a long time given rise to an ideological debate between the four main schools of the world economy, namely laissez faire (let it happen), socialism, modern liberalism, and modern conservatism. However, the fundamental question that is being questioned is what kind of role is played in terms of government ownership and management in the economic field.

    Laissez Faire trend

    Some economists are of the view that laissez faire is the same as capitalism, even though capitalism itself is not a political ideology, but rather an economic system dominated by the private sector, especially in terms of production methods, distribution of production products, and the exchange of goods and services.

    Laissez faire in the Western world is a political ideology that is completely dependent on capitalism, which in its development always strives for capitalism itself to become an economic system.

    Currents of Modern Liberalism

    The understanding of classical capitalism then gets criticism and a sharp spotlight. A group of thinkers began to question the economic system of classical liberalism which is seen as more inclined to emphasize the notion of freedom form (free from) state or government intervention in economic affairs.

    This tendency is later referred to as negative freedom (freedom that is negative) because the emphasis on freedom from actually consumes freedom itself. On the other hand, what is needed is an economic system that emphasizes freedom to (free to) in the context of the role of the state or government in all areas of the economy.

    In further development, freedom to is known as positive freedom , which encourages the government to seriously and realistically provide guarantees of freedom of life for all levels of society.

    Modern Conservative Trend

    The trend of conservatism has a different view. This trend basically deals with efforts to preserve traditional values ​​and institutions. The strange question they face is the various radical changes driven by classical liberals in the 19th century.

    Adherents of conservatism believe that society should continue to run as it is. However, the holders of power are the aristocracy, not the emerging business groups.

    Trend of Socialism

    The view of socialists about freedom and competition is different from other trends. Because freedom and competition are very closely related to the social structure as a whole, freedom and competition
    in an unfair social order will strengthen the injustice itself.

    Therefore, the state or government cannot and should not take a certain role more actively so that the weak parties can be protected from the strong parties because they have power. Morally and politically, government intervention in the economic field can be justified and is absolute so that justice and common prosperity can be created for all members of society.

    Well, that’s the information about the Meaning, Systematics, and Linkage of National Science with Other Sciences . National science is a science that studies the basic concepts and joints of the national system in general. The study covers the same or similar things in the countries that exist or have existed in this world, for example about the emergence of the country, the disappearance of the country, the purpose and function of the country, the development of the country, the form of the country, and so on.

  • Meaning of Social Media, History, Functions, Types, Benefits, and Development

    Meaning of Social Media, History, Functions, Types, Benefits, and Development

    Meaning of Social Media – In today’s age, it cannot be denied that human life today is very much related to social media. Social media plays an important role in almost all walks of life. Starting from sending messages to friends, sharing information, to finding information that is hot in the community. So, it is not surprising when someone mentions that social media has become one of the important needs of almost everyone.

    The presence of social media in today’s society has provided enormous benefits, especially in the current pandemic era. Social media is quite helpful in erasing the distance between people, so it is very effective in shortening the time in communicating. However, something that has a high positive impact, does not close the possibility of giving a high negative impact as well.

    Well, the following will be explained about the ins and outs of social media, starting from the meaning of social media to all aspects. For those of you who want to learn more about social media, this article will be very suitable to help you understand what social media actually is.

    A. Meaning of Social Media

    Social media can be understood as a digital platform that provides facilities to perform social activities for each user. Some activities that can be done on social media, for example, communication or interaction to provide information or content in the form of writing, photos and videos. Various information in the shared content can be open to all users for a full 24 hours.

    Social media itself is basically part of the development of the internet. The presence of the past few decades has made social media able to develop and grow widely and quickly as it is now. This is what makes all users who are connected to the internet able to disseminate information or content anytime and anywhere.

    B. Meaning of Social Media According to Members

    Social media can actually be said to be one of the popular phenomena that attracts a lot of people’s attention. In some of his works, experts have given various definitions about the technology that society always needs today. The following is the definition of social media according to the opinion of experts, including:

    1. BK Lewis (2010)

    BK Lewis in his work titled Social Media and Strategic Communication Attitudes and Perceptions among College Students published in 2010 states that social media is a label that refers to digital technology that has the potential to make everyone connect and interact, produce and share order.

    2. Chris Brogan (2010)

    Furthermore, in 2010, Chris Brogan in his book entitled Social Media 101: Tactics and Tips to Develop Your Business, mentioned that social media is a communication tool that contains various possibilities for the creation of new forms of interaction.

    3. Dave Kerpen (2011)

    Meanwhile, Dave Kerpen in his book titled Likeable Social Media which was published in 2011 stated that social media has a definition as a place where pictures, videos, writings and interaction relationships in the network, both between individuals and between groups such as organizations.

    C. History of Social Media

    Quoted from the online site maryville.edu, the beginning of the creation of social media itself occurred on May 24, 1844. The beginning of social media was a series of electronic dots and lines typed on a telegraph machine. Also at this time, Samuel Morse sent a telegraphic message to the public for the first time.

    The roots of digital communication, along with the origins of the modern internet and the current understanding of social media, were pioneered by the emergence of the Advanced Research Projects Agency Network (Arpanet) in 1969. This digital network was created by the US Department of Defense to connect scientists from four universities to share with each other. software, hardware, and other data.

    Then, in 1987, the National Science Foundation launched a stronger national digital network called NSFNET. After running for a decade, precisely in 1997, the National Science Foundation launched its first social media platform to the public.

    However, according to The History of Social Networking on the Digital Trends website, the growth and development of the internet around 1980 to 1990 had the potential to introduce online communication services, such as CompuServe, America Online, and Prodigy. This communication service successfully provides users to interact via email, bulletin board messages, and realtime online chat.

    This is one of the driving forces behind the birth of the earliest social media network, namely Six Degrees which launched in 1997. Six Degrees itself is the first social media platform that can make users connect with real world contacts, for example creating a profile in database.

    After the emergence of Six Degrees social media, which turned out to be short-lived. In 2001, the world of communication technology innovated again by presenting a new social media called Friendster. Unlike the fate of its older brother, Friendster managed to attract millions of users by simply registering email addresses and basic online networks.

    Meanwhile, as one of the other early forms of social media communication services, after it was launched in 1999, a weblog or blog called the Livejournal publication site began to attract a lot of interest from many people. gain high popularity. Meanwhile, a few years later, the Blogger publishing platform created by the technology company Pyra Labs was officially bought by Google in 2003.

    Furthermore, in 2002, a social networking service from social media called LinkedIn managed to attract the attention of many users. This social media itself was established for professionals who are developing their careers. After almost two decades, LinkedIn has grown and developed into one of the most famous social media in the world with more than 675 million users worldwide. LinkedIn is currently still a social media site for someone who wants to find a job as well as companies looking for human resources.

    Still in the social network social media, Myspace managed to launch in 2003 and managed to become one of the most visited websites on the planet in 2006. This social media provides facilities for users to share music directly on their profile pages.

    However, precisely in 2008, the power of Myspace was defeated by Facebook. As a giant in the internet world, Google also tried to launch social media in 2012 with the name Google+. It’s just that this social media doesn’t have a long life after it was reported to breach the data security of around 500,000 of its users.

    D. Functions of Social Media

    After knowing and understanding the definition of social media in general and based on experts, in this section you will be explained about the function of social media. As one of the most widely used digital platforms today, social media has managed to connect almost everyone with internet access.

    However, the function of social media is not only limited to that, there are many other functions that you can get from social media. Well, the following are some of the social media functions that Sinaumedia.com can summarize, including:

    1. Communication

    The first function of social media is of course communication. Before growing to this point, social media initially only focused on building a good communication ecosystem for users. However, with the development of the internet and technology, social media is more than just communication, social media has become a second world for people all over the world to gather and interact. Social media has succeeded in developing communication that is not limited by time and geography.

    2. Branding

    The second function of social media is branding. After successfully building a gathering place for all people from various parts of the world, social media is always growing and providing various needs from people, one of which is branding. Branding itself is a person’s way of building an image in the eyes of many people.

    To do branding, users usually have a unique and special way to design social media accounts so that they are attractive to other users. This is what makes social media accounts similar to the real world, because everyone has their own unique characteristics.

    3. Place of Business

    The third function of social media is as a vehicle to do business or business. After successfully providing communication and branding, social media is slowly growing so that every user can build a business in the network or online. As a place that is open for 24 hours, social media is proven to make it very easy for its users to build a virtual business. This is predicted to have a lot of potential to reach more people than businesses that only rely on the real world.

    4. Marketing

    The fourth function of social media is to do marketing or marketing. As a platform that is almost always used by humans, now social media has succeeded in creating services that make it easier for businessmen to introduce and reach more consumers. This method is proven to be effective in increasing profits and making it easier for users to get what they need.

    E. Types of Social Media

    High demand, making many new social media emerging and competing to attract interest and attention from users. The development of social media is also very fast, many social media platforms that used to be very popular, have now slowly disappeared, or been acquired by larger parties. Well, the following are various services and types of social media that are very popular in the community, including:

    1. Blog Services

    Blog services can basically be understood as a personal journal that has internet. One of these types of social media has the function of sharing posts or views of its users about various specific issues. This type of social media user is usually referred to as narablog or blogger. Examples of social media blog services are such as: WordPress, Blogger.

    2. Social Network Services (Social Network)

    Social networking services or commonly referred to as social networks is one of the most widely used social media by people in various parts of the world today. One of these types of social media has a function as a gathering place for many people to socialize with each other. In this service, users usually send each other messages, information, photos, and even videos. Examples of social media services are Facebook and Linkedin.

    3. Micro Blog Services (Microblogging)

    The next type of social media is the service of micro blogs or commonly known as microblogging. Although it has almost the same services and uses as a blog, this type of social media presents a simpler page. This makes the micro blog service have a better speed than the blog service. One example of micro blogging services is Twitter.

    4. Media Sharing Services (Media Sharing)

    The next type of social media that you need to know is media sharing services or commonly referred to as media sharing. When you often spend leisure time or study time through social media platforms YouTube or Soundcloud. So, you have actually gotten used to using this media sharing service. One of these types of social media basically has a main focus to make its users share media content such as photos, audio, or video. Another example of media sharing services is Instagram, Flickr, and so on.

    5. Collaboration Services

    The following types of social media are collaborative services. This collaboration service itself is used to make users mutually invite other users to create a contribution. Not only invite, in this collaboration service, users are usually allowed to create content and make corrections to the content of ‘members’ of the site.

    One example of the most popular contribution service today is Wikipedia. Wikipedia itself is a multilingual encyclopedia project in a network that operates freely and openly. This contribution service is run by the Wikimedia Foundation, which is one of the non-profit organizations located in Florida, United States.

    6. Forum Services

    This last type of social media is known to have a classic form. This type of forum service can be said to be one of the types of social media that has been around for a long time and has been widely known for a long time. The forum service itself can be used by users as a place to discuss various matters or specific topics with other users in a discussion space. Examples of social media forum services are Kaskus, Quora, and so on.

    F. Benefits of Social Media

    After you know and understand various information about the meaning of social media and others, the following will be explained about the benefits you can get from maximizing the use of social media, including:

    1. Means of Learning, Listening, and Delivering

    There are several social media platforms that are now available that you can use to learn, from finding various information, data, to issues that are hot in the community. In addition, you can also use social media as a means to share information with other users, both friends in the real world and friends in the virtual world.

    2. Documentation, Administration, and Integration Tools

    The second benefit you can get from using social media is to create documentation, administration, and integration. Social media applications are basically a place for you to store a variety of content, ranging from profiles, information, reportage, events, recording events, to the results of research studies. Not only that, these are some of the benefits of social media, such as creating an organizational blog, integrating various lines in a company, sharing relevant content according to the target community, and operational effectiveness of the organization.

    3. Means of Planning, Strategy, and Management

    The third benefit of social media is as a means of planning, strategy, and management. In the hands of management and marketing experts, social media can turn into one of the weapons used to launch planning and strategy. For example, to carry out promotions, attract loyal customers, explore the market, educate the public, to gather feedback from consumers or the community.

    4. Means of Control, Evaluation, and Measurement

    Finally, the fourth benefit of social media is as a means of control, evaluation, and measurement. Social media itself can be used to control the organization as well as evaluate, starting from planning and strategy. In addition, social media can also process data related to community and market responses as a measuring tool, calibration and parameters for evaluation.

    This is a discussion about the meaning of social media, starting from the understanding of experts, the history of social media, the function of social media, the types of social media, to the various benefits of social media. Hope it can be useful for you.

     

  • Understanding Mass Media and Its Characteristics as a Means of Communication

    Understanding Mass Media and Its Characteristics as a Means of Communication

    Meaning of Mass Media – We must have a little contact with mass media in carrying out our daily life activities. We consume various types of information, whether from the internet, magazines, or television, especially in this all-digital era that makes everyone able to easily get new information.

    Basically, the process of delivering a message to a wide audience is called mass communication, while the tool or media used is mass media. Well, this article will discuss the meaning, characteristics, and functions of mass media.

    Meaning of Mass Media

    According to the Communication Lexicon , mass media are “means to deliver messages that are directly related to the wider community, for example radio, television, and newspapers”. According to Cangara in his book entitled Introduction to Communication Science , media is a tool or means used to deliver messages from the communicator to the audience, while the meaning of mass media itself is a tool used in delivering messages from the source to the audience by using communication tools, such as letters news, film, radio and television (Cangara, 2010: 123–126).

    Media is the plural form of medium, which means “middle” or “intermediate”, while mass comes from the English language, namely mass which means “group” or “group”. Thus, the meaning of mass media is an intermediary or tools used by the masses in establishing relationships with each other.

    1. Law No. 40 of 1999 about Pars

    Law No. 40 of 1999 on the Press mentions that the press is a social institution and mass communication vehicle that carries out journalistic activities, which includes searching, acquiring, owning, storing, processing, and conveying information, both in the form of writing, voice, image, voice and image, and data and graphics as well as in other forms by using print media, electronic media, and all types of available channels.

    2. Eep Saefulloh Fatah

    Fatah stated that the press is the fourth estate of democracy (the fourth pillar of democracy) and has an important role in building trust, credibility, and even the legitimacy of the government. The press that is meant as the fourth pillar of democracy is the press that has a function, namely as a tool of social control in democratic life.

    The control function makes the function of the press in society stronger. The press is expected to be able to cover both sides (seeing the news from two sides) which must be maintained because the press is a tool of social control for the government, so that the press becomes a medium for conveying the aspirations of the people towards the government.

    The press must also have a gate keeper function , that is to filter every report. It is hoped that the function of the press can provide good education for the community, as well as be a good bridge between the government and the community.

    3. Oemar Seno Adji

    Oemar mentions the press in a narrow sense, which is the broadcasting of thoughts, ideas, or news with the written word, while the press in a broad sense, which includes all mass communications (mass media) that emit someone’s thoughts and feelings, both with words – written and oral words.

    4. Onong Uchjana Effendy

    According to Effendy (2003: 65) in the Theory and Philosophy of Communication , mass media is used in communication
    if the communication is numerous and resides far away. The mass media that are widely used in everyday life are generally newspapers, radio, television, and movie theaters, which operate in the fields of information, education and recreation, or in other words information, education, and entertainment.

    Thus, mass media is a tool to do or disseminate information to a wide, numerous, and heterogeneous communicator. Mass media is a very effective tool in mass communication because it can change attitudes, opinions, and communication behavior. The advantage of communication using mass media is that mass media creates synchronicity, that is, a message can be received by a relatively large number of communicators.

    Characteristics of Mass Media

    Mass media is a means of mass communication. The process of delivering messages, ideas, or mass media information to the public is done simultaneously. A media can be called mass media if it has certain characteristics. Characteristics of mass media according to Cangara (2010: 126–127) include:

    • Being institutional, it means that the party that manages the media consists of many people, starting from the collection, management, to the presentation of information.
    • Being one-way, it means that the communication is less likely to allow dialogue between the sender and receiver. Even if there is a reaction or feedback, it usually takes time and is delayed.
    • Extensive and simultaneous, meaning that it can overcome the obstacles of time and distance because it has speed. Moving widely and simultaneously, that is, the information delivered is received by many people at the same time.
    • Being open, means that the message can be received by anyone and anywhere regardless of age, gender, and ethnicity.
    • Using technical or mechanical equipment, such as radio, television, newspapers, and the like.

    According to Cangara (2010: 76) in his book Introduction to Communication Science , mass communication is one of the types of communication that has a significant difference from other forms of communication. The nature of his message is open to a varied audience, both in terms of age, religion, tribe, occupation, and in terms of needs.

    Mass communication has a number of special features or characteristics, among which are the following.

    1. Institutional Communicator

    Mass media communicators move in complex, but institutionalized organizations. Board of mass communication message delivery through mass media, such as television, newspaper, radio, internet.

    2. Messages of a General Nature

    The messages conveyed in the process of mass communication by the communicator are aimed at a wide audience or all people, not just a group of people. Thus, the process of mass communication is open. This is because communicants are spread in various places. The news message also contains factual elements that are important and interesting for all circles of society, not just a group of people.

    3. Communication is Anonymous and Heterogeneous

    The communicator or recipient of information in mass communication is anonymous and heterogeneous. This is because mass communication conveys a general message to all communities who do not know each other without distinguishing tribes, races, religions, and have various psychological characters, ages, genders, places of residence, cultural customs, and different social strata. -different.

    4. Simultaneous Mass Media

    According to Effendy (2003: 53), the simultaneity of mass media is the simultaneity of contact with a large number of people in a distance from the communicator and the people are separated from each other.

    5. One-way Delivered Messages

    Communication between the communicator and the communicant occurs directly, but the communicator and the communicant do not meet each other and the communicant cannot respond directly. The communicator here handles the communication.

    6. Delayed Feedback

    This happens because between the communicator and the communicant who are not face to face directly. The communicator cannot immediately know the audience’s reaction to the message he has delivered.

    Functions of Mass Media

    1. Elvinaro Ardianto

    According to Elvinaro (2007: 14–17) in Mass Communication An Introduction , the functions of mass media can be divided into five, namely:

    a. Surveillance _

    As a tool to help the public to get warnings from the mass media that inform about threats.

    b. Interpretation (Interpretation)

    The interpretive function is almost similar to the supervisory function. Mass media not only supply facts and data, but also provide interpretations or temporary responses to important events. The media organization or industry chooses and decides which events are published or shown.

    c. Linkage _

    Mass media can unite diverse members of society, thus forming linkages based on common interests and interests about something.

    d. Transmission of Values

    The mass media represents the image of society, that is, it is watched, heard, and read. The mass media show us how they act and what they expect. In other words, the media represents us with role models that we observe and hope to emulate.

    e. Entertainment _

    The function of the mass media as an entertainment function is none other than to reduce the tension in the minds of the audience.

    2. Onong Uchjana Effendy

    Effendy (2003: 54) presents the function of mass communication in general, namely:

    a. Information function

    The function of providing information means that the mass media is a disseminator of information for readers, listeners or viewers.

    c. Educational Functions

    The mass media is a means of education for the public because it presents a lot of things that are educational in nature. One of the ways of educating that the mass media does is through teaching values, ethics, and rules that apply to viewers or readers.

    d. Influencing Functions

    The influencing function of the mass media is implicitly found in titles, features, advertisements, articles, and so on.

    Types of Mass Media

    According to Cangara (2010: 74), mass media are divided into three types, namely:

    1. Print Media

    Print media is the first mass media that appeared in the world in the 1920s. At that time, the mass media was initially used by the government to indoctrinate the public, so as to lead the reading public to a specific purpose, such as the needle theory in mass communication theory. However, the mass media is now free, as is the reciprocity of the audience.

    b. Electronic media

    After print media, the first electronic media appeared, namely radio as an audio media that conveys messages through voice. Speed ​​and timeliness in radio message delivery is certainly faster by using live broadcasts. During the dissemination of information about the Proclamation of Independence, the radio mass media played a major role in the dissemination of news. After that, a more sophisticated television appeared and could show pictures as audio visual mass media.

    c. Internet media

    New internet media is popular in the 21st century, for example Google was born in 1997. Internet media can exceed the capabilities of print and electronic media. Both media can enter the internet through a website. There are many advantages of internet mass media compared to other media. However, internet access which is still relatively free can be dangerous for users who do not understand, for example fraud, pornography, identity theft, and so on. Internet media does not have to be managed by a company like print and electronic media, but can also be done by individuals.

    Distortion of Mass Media Freedom

    Distortion of the freedom of the mass media in carrying out its functions include:

    1. Through Mass Media Regulation

    According to Article 28 of the 1945 Constitution and Law No. 11 of 1996 about the Press, the government has actually guaranteed the freedom of the press. The article provides a guarantee that there is no censorship and no prohibition for every citizen who wants to establish a press company. This is an important indicator of freedom of the press. For example, one of the TV stations reported on the Antasari case involving a woman named Rani. The reporting of the case only uses secondary sources, namely Rani’s family and Rani’s neighbors, not from primary sources.

    The violated article is article 3 which reads “Indonesian journalists always test information, report in a balanced manner, do not mix facts and judgmental opinions, and apply the principle of presumption of innocence”.

    2. Bureaucracy or Apparatus of Power

    In addition to the distortion of legal regulations, the control of press freedom by the government can also occur through the behavior of officials. During the time of the New Order (Orba), there were various behaviors of the apparatus that tried to control the freedom of the press, among others it was done by sending reprimands to the editors, physically assaulting journalists, up to the killing of journalists.

    For example, a member of the District House of Representatives (DPRD) of Cirebon City, Udin Saefullah, ran amok in the building of the people’s representative who did not accept after appearing in the local mass media, who said that he did not resign, even though he had registered as one of the prospective legislative candidates from Hanura party. He also threatened to beat journalists if he continued to raise his position as a member of the DPRD.

    3. Act of Judging the Community to the Media

    Freedom of the press guaranteed by UU No. 40 of 1999 was apparently used irresponsibly by some mass media. The freedom is used to unleash sensationalism. A number of individuals or community groups felt harmed by the news. They punish the press by going to the media office and then threatening and terrorizing, persecuting journalists, and vandalizing the media office.

    For example, the polling results reported by TVOne station and other TV stations experienced differences in polling results when the presidential election took place last year in 2014. This is what makes the community experience confusion in the quick calculation. In the end, a number of people protested against the TVOne station by criticizing it.

    4. Behavior of the Press Itself

    In practice, it turns out that not only factors outside the press have the potential to control press violence, such as legislation, the actions of the apparatus, and the control of press freedom turns out to be sourced from the press company itself. The media tends to present the entertainment side rather than providing information, political news tends to be presented that examines the personality of politicians rather than their thoughts and performance, and the news that is presented tends to be poor in meaning and make the reader cynical about the reality of everyday life.

    For example, the electronic media MNCTV always presents the advantages of the owner of the media, namely Harry Tanoesodibjo. This was done by the media because the owner wanted to nominate the president in the next election period. However, Harry Tanoesodibjo’s good image in the community was slightly tarnished after the revelation of the Antasari case that dragged his name. It can be ascertained that the media lacks professionalism when it comes to broadcasting advertisements and always favors its own owner or is not neutral.

     

  • Understanding Civil Society: Characteristics, Characteristics, and History

    Understanding Civil Society: Characteristics, Characteristics, and History

    Meaning of Civil Society – Do you know what civil society means? Civil society is a part of society that has manners in building, interpreting, and living its life. Civil society is often interpreted with different meanings. This is one of the concepts of waiuh face.

    Philosopher Petrus revealed that a civilized society can be interpreted as a civilized society in the meaning of life. The origin of the word civil is from English, which means civilized or cultured.

    While the term civil society is taken from the translation of civil society itself, that is civilized society. The concept of translation was first introduced by Dato Seri Anwar Ibrahim, through his talk at the National Symposium in 1995.

    This concept created by Anwar Ibrahim wants to show that the ideal society has an advanced civilization. More precisely, he mentioned that what is meant by civil society is a fertile social system. Where the system is based on moral principles that can guarantee a balance between the stability of society and individual freedom.

    Meaning of Civil Society

    As explained earlier, civil society is a fertile system that guarantees moral principles. Where individual freedom and community stability are very balanced.

    Another definition of civil society is that they are a group of people who are civilized, humane, possess knowledge, excel in technology.

    The Meaning of Civil Society According to Experts

    Below are some definitions of civil society according to experts. Read the information carefully.

    1. Mun’im (1994)

    Expressing that the term civil society is a unique idea that manifests itself in various social orders. Where the most important thing from the idea is the effort to coordinate various conflicts of interest. Whether it is the interest of the community, individual, or even the country

    2. Hefner

    Hefner revealed that civil society is a society that has special democratic characteristics in interacting with other societies. Moreover, civil society is usually more heterogeneous.

    In these conditions, they are expected to be able to organize themselves and be able to grow awareness to create civilization. That way, they are ultimately able to participate and overcome global conditions that are quite complex and also full of competition.

    3. Mahasin (1995)

    As explained earlier that civil society is a translation of civil society (in English). The word civil society consists of two words from Latin, civitas dei which means city, God and society which means society. From the word form one word namely civilization which means civilization. Therefore, civil society has the meaning as a community or group of urban people who have developed civilization.

    4. Munawir (1997)

    According to him, the civil society comes from the Arabic language. The word Madani comes from the word madana which means to inhabit, build, or live. But changed again to madani which means city people, civilized, and civil people. Thus, we can conclude that the word madani in Arabic has many meanings.

    While the civil concept according to Majid (1997) is often seen as a society that has merited in facing the plans of power and against the arbitrary government in Southern European countries, Latin America, and also Eastern Europe.

    5. Hall (1998)

    Hall says that civil society is usually synonymous with the term civil society. Where it means an idea, a shadow, a dream, and an ideal of a community that can embody social life. In a civil society, its members will stick to humanity and civilization.

    Characteristics of Civil Society

    After understanding some of the definitions of civil society from the experts, the following writer will explain some of the characteristics of civil society that you need to know:

    1. Upholding Values

    Civil society is synonymous with its civilized nature. They always uphold the values ​​and norms and laws they support. They hold all that with knowledge, faith, and technology. This means that civil society has a life based on the rules that are in place. Starting from values, laws, norms, and others.

    Their obedience is based on faith, knowledge, and technology that they have learned. Then developed with the strength of their faith and confidence in the Creator.

    2. Have a High Civilization

    As human beings who have strong confidence and faith in God the Creator, civil society has proven that they are a civilized society. Where they have good manners and manners. In addition, they also have manners towards their fellow human beings as well as their God.

    3. Prioritizing Equality and Transparency

    The next characteristic is that civil society judges that their status is all the same. Whether it’s a woman or a man. Openness or transparency means that they will live life with an honest attitude and do not need things to be covered.

    So that it will grow a sense of mutual trust between one member and another. This shows that this society has a democratic nuance. Where their democratization can be created with the existence of Non-Governmental Organizations, political parties, a free press, and tolerance.

    Why can it be like that? Because in social society it is related to the discourse of rational social criticism. Where community members explicitly and clearly create democracy. So, civil society can only be guaranteed by a country that adheres to a democratic system, such as Indonesia.

    Then related to the tolerance that has been mentioned above, it has the meaning of the willingness of each individual to accept various views, attitudes, and also political differences. Such tolerance is an attitude developed in a civilized society. It is a form of mutual respect and mutual respect. Both groups and individuals who have different opinions and attitudes.

    4. Free Public Space

    A free public space is usually also referred to as the free public sphere. This is a region that allows the community to have the rights and obligations of citizens. Where they have full access to various political activities, unite and also cooperate, express different opinions, and also gather and obtain information widely.

    5. Supremacy of Law

    In KBBI, the supremacy of law means the highest authority in the law which means that there is a guarantee of the creation of justice that can be realized. This can happen when a country places the law as the highest authority.

    It should be underlined, that the intended justice can be realized if the existing law is applied neutrally. This means, there is no exception to obtain a permission in the name of the law.

    6. Social Justice

    Social justice or also called social justice is a balance and also a proportional division between the rights and obligations of a citizen and the country itself. Where it covers aspects of life.

    That is, citizens have rights and obligations towards their country. So is the state, they also have rights and obligations over their citizens.

    The rights and obligations have a balanced portion. So that it will produce a balanced output as well. Plurality or diversity will certainly occur in society. Especially in a country that has millions of citizens. Where they come from various different groups.

    So, what is meant by pluralism is an attitude of accepting and acknowledging in writing that the society in a country is plural or diverse. This can be a factor in the creation of a multicultural society. Starting from culture, values, customs, norms, as well as language, religious tribes, ethnicities.

    As a member of civil society, as is the case with Indonesian society. We have various languages, tribes, religions, cultures, ethnicities, and others. Of course, we must have a pluralistic attitude and also believe that a plurality will provide positive values ​​that come from God.

    7. Social Participation

    To establish relationships and cooperation between groups and individuals, we need to participate in the social environment. This aims to achieve and realize certain goals.

    With clean social participation, then that is the beginning of the creation of a civil society. This can happen if there are nuances that can make individual rights and obligations very well protected.

    That means, civil society needs to balance between its rights and obligations. So that social justice will be created as mentioned above.

    Characteristics of Civil Society

    In addition to having special characteristics, civil society also has its own characteristics that are different from society in general. Here are some characteristics of civil society that you need to understand.

    1. Integration between individuals and groups is exclusively woven into society through social alliances and social contracts.
    2. The power that exists in civil society is diffuse. So that the dominant interest can be reduced by the presence of alternative forces.
    3. There are development programs that are dominated by the state or the government and also other development programs that are dominated by the community itself.
    4. Equipped with access to the relationship between the interests of individuals and also the country. Because, members of volunteer organizations can give input to decisions taken by the government.
    5. Progress and development of creativity that was initially hindered by the totalitarian regime.
    6. The creation of loyalty and trust. So that each individual acknowledges their attachment to other individuals and they do not prioritize their own interests.
    7. There is the liberation of society through the activities of social institutions with various perspectives.
    8. Having trust and faith in God. That means they are a society that has a religion and acknowledges the existence of God. In addition, they also place God’s law as the foundation in managing life.
    9. Live peacefully and peacefully. Because, all the people in the civil society, both as a group and as an individual, respect and appreciate the other party.
    10. Help each other without interfering in someone’s internal affairs that could reduce their freedom.
    11. Tolerance, that means they will not interfere in the affairs of others who already have freedom as human beings. They also will not feel disturbed by other parties who have different backgrounds.
    12. Creating a balance between rights and obligations.
    13. Have a high civilization. That means they have a love for science and use and benefit from that knowledge for the future.
    14. Have noble morals.

    History of Civil Society

    Various types of efforts have been made in order to create and create a civil society. Be it for a short term or for a long term. In order to create a civil society in a short period of time, it is necessary to choose a trustworthy leader. Then, the community also needs to place a leader who can be accepted well and who can lead wisely.

    When looking for the historical roots of civilized society, it can be seen that in Ancient Greek society, this already exists. In Raharjo (1997), it is revealed that the term civil society has existed since before AD. The person who first coined the term civil society was Cicero, an orator from Ancient Greece.

    According to Cicero, civil society is a political community that has good manners. This is usually exemplified by people living in the city. Where they have their own legal code. With the existence of citizenship and city culture, the term city is not just a concentration of people.

    But also as a center of culture and civilization. In addition, the term civil society does not only refer to the term civil society. However, it is also based on the concept of the city of Medina built by the Prophet Muhammad SAW. Therefore, civil society also refers to the concept of civilized society or civilization. As well as another concept introduced by the philosopher Al Farabi, namely the concept of Medina as the Main State.

    According to a researcher at the Pesantren Development Board and Islamic Studies, Dr. Ahmad Hatta, the madinah charter is an important document that can prove that civilized society in the past was very advanced. In addition, he also emphasized that the clarity of the law and the constitution in the society.

    Even if we look at the opinion of Hamidullah (1958) in his book First Written Constitutions In The World, the madinah charter is the first written constitution in human history. The constitution surprisingly contained rules about civil rights that are currently being debated a lot.

    These civil rights are now known as HAM or human rights. This appeared long before the Universal Declaration of the United Nations, the French Revolution, and even the Declaration of American Independence was proclaimed.

    Such is the explanation about civil society that the writer can give. From all the explanations above, we can conclude that civil society is actually the concept of society that we need today. Especially in Indonesia which has various differences. Starting from tribe, race, religion, values, morals, and others.

    With the creation of a civil society, of course we will be spared from the conflicts that arise due to differences that are not appreciated and respected. For example, during the election, there will definitely be many conflicts that arise due to political differences. Individuals and groups can hate each other just because they have different choices.

    Well, if we have characteristics and social concepts similar to civil society. So that kind of conflict can definitely be avoided or even eliminated. What do you think? Have you applied the concept of civil society in your daily life?

     

  • The Understanding of Human Beings as Individual Beings and Their Roles

    The Understanding of Human Beings as Individual Beings and Their Roles

    Understanding Humans as Individual Beings – Physically, humans are the same as other living creatures. Both have supporting elements that are able to help him live. But specifically, humans are different from other creatures. The meaning is that humans as creatures created by God become the most perfect creatures with the intellect they possess.

    The creation of reason that humans have can help them mention or categorize things and make a concept so that they have the ability to think. It can be said that the function of reason is to think.

    Then what about human needs? If classified, human needs are divided into two, namely material needs and spiritual needs. Material needs include two things, namely physical and biological. While spiritual needs include mental and psychological.

    Human Needs according to Abraham Maslow

    A pioneer of humanistic psychology Abraham Maslow argued that human needs are divided into five. Anything? See the following explanation.

    1. Physiological needs

    Some things that are categorized as physiological or basic needs are eating, drinking, clothing, sexual, and some others.

    2. The need for security and protection

    This one need includes several things, such as being free from fear, protected from danger, the threat of disease, war, and several other things.

    3. Social needs

    Being loved, recognized as a community, and counted as a person is a social need that humans need.

    4. The need for appreciation

    As the name suggests, the need for appreciation is certainly needed by humans to be appreciated for their abilities, position, position, etc.

    5. The need for self-actualization

    This one need is needed by humans, namely maximizing self-potential, self-expression, and creativity.

    The Meaning of Human Beings as Individual Beings

    After getting to know and understand the meaning of humans and their needs, Reader can only know the meaning of humans as individual beings.

    Ever heard of humans as individual beings? What is meant by individual? Actually individual comes from the Latin language individuum which means not divided. Whereas in English, individual comes from the words in and divided.

    If interpreted, individual means not divided or become a unity. Why is that? Basically, humans are born as individual beings who are not separated, not divided between their soul and body.

    Human development as an individual being does not only mean the unity of soul and body. Humans as individual beings have a broader meaning than that, namely humans have special characteristics with their own personality patterns.

    Despite having a twin brother, the personality of one individual is very different from another. People who are born with twins will not have exactly the same physical and psychological characteristics.

    In general, it can be seen that humans have the same physical equipment, but if we look further, the differences that each individual has will be clearly visible. The various differences will be seen in shape, size, nature, and so on.

    When Reader are in a group of thousands or even millions of people, you will still be able to recognize someone you already know because that person has recognizable physical characteristics.

    On the other hand, Reader will find it difficult to recognize one animal among thousands or even millions of similar animals. An individual is not only easily recognized through his physical or biological characteristics.

    Reader can recognize him through his nature, character, style, temperament, and taste. But physical characteristics become the main weapon for you to recognize people. Because physically there are people who are fat, thin, slim, straight hair, curly hair, brown skin color, white, and so on.

    Then you can recognize a person through his nature, character, and behavior. Because by nature there are people who are patient, cheerful, chatty, grumpy, etc.

    So, the term individual can be used to express the smallest or limited unit. Individuals can be understood as individual human beings so that they are often used as the term “people” or “individual human beings”.

    An individual can be defined as a human being who not only has a special role in his social environment, but also has a personality and specific behavior patterns about him.

    Then there are several aspects attached to the assessment of each individual, namely the physical organic aspect, the psychological-spiritual aspect, and the social aspect. The unity of the physical and spiritual aspects can be the meaning of the word individual.

    If there is a shock in one aspect, it will have consequences in other aspects. An individual’s spiritual ability can help him relate and think. In addition, the ability of the spiritual aspect of the individual can control and lead the mind to overcome every problem and reality that it experiences.

    These elements or aspects must be united in him so that a person can be said to be a human being as an individual being. If those elements or aspects are not united anymore, then a person cannot be called an individual.

    If a person only has his body, physical body, or body, then he cannot be said to be an individual. The term individual only applies to people who have organic physical integrity, psychological-spiritual, and social aspects.

    Without the existence of a society that is the background of its existence, individual identity will not be clear. In order to form a behavior that is in line with the situation, the individual needs to distance himself and process himself. In addition, individuals also need to form habits that suit their behavior.

    As individual beings, humans are always in the middle of other groups of individuals. Humans as individual beings need an environment that will help mature their personal formation.

    There is a time when the environment becomes an inhibiting factor and a supporting factor in the process of individual formation.

    The community environment is very influential on the formation of individuality. Conversely, individuals are also able to influence the community environment. The ability that each individual has is the main thing in establishing relationships with other human beings.

    Human Growth Process as an Individual Being

    Humans as individual beings are a combination of genotypic and phenotypic factors. What is meant by genotypic factor? Genotype factors are factors carried by individuals since birth and hereditary factors.

    Because physically everyone has similarities and the same characteristics of their parents. The similarities that occur can include the entire physical appearance or only certain parts.

    Physically you can see which part of the body has a resemblance to your parents. The same goes for nature and character. There may be some of your traits or characters that are similar to your father or mother.

    What about phenotypic factors? Phenotypic factors are physical characteristics, characters or traits that are influenced by environmental factors. These factors have a great influence in the formation of the special characteristics of each person.

    The environment in question is the physical environment, such as environmental conditions, living conditions or houses, and geographical conditions and climate. A person who lives in a mountainous area will certainly have different characteristics and habits from people who live in a coastal area.

    People who live in coastal areas may have a habit of speaking that tends to be harsh, unlike people who live in mountainous areas. The living environment will shape a person’s habits and behavior.

    Then there is the social environment that also forms the characteristics of individuals in social interaction. These interactions are usually done with family members, friends, and other large social groups.

    The process of growth accompanied by outward and inward development is considered a natural and normal human development. The meaning is that the human personality or individual has its own special characteristics on the whole soul and body.

    Growth can be interpreted as a human change towards being more advanced or arguably more mature. Then there are various opinions about growth. Basically, the process of association becomes part of growth. It can be said that the process of association is a change that happens to a person gradually and is influenced by the reciprocity of the experience he gets.

    Factors That Affect Human Growth As Individual Beings

    The following are some factors that can affect human growth as an individual being.

    1. The Nativist View

    Experts believe that this one growth factor is determined by other factors that individuals bring from birth. That is, a person’s growth is determined by the individual’s own factors, both similarity to parents, talent, and potential.

    2. Empiricistic view

    This one growth factor is slightly opposite to nativist, that is, the growth factor of an individual is backgrounded by the environment.

    3. Convergence View

    The last growth factor can be said to be a collaboration of the two views above. This individual growth factor is driven by the interaction of the environment and the environment.

    Based on psychology, individual growth levels are divided into four, namely:

    • Vital time (0-2 years)
    • Aesthetic time (2-7 years)
    • Intellectual age (7-14 years)
    • Social time (14-21 years)

    The Role of Humans as Individual Beings

    After discussing how the process of individual formation and growth, this article will take you to know how the role of humans as individual beings.

    Humans as individual beings have various roles to create all the things they want. Humans as individual beings have the role of protecting and defending their dignity.

    Then as individual beings, humans continue to strive to fulfill their basic rights. Realizing one’s full potential, both physically and spiritually, is one of the roles of humans as individual beings.

    In addition, humans as individual beings also play a role in fulfilling their own needs and interests for the well-being of the life they live.

    Human Development as an Individual Being

    Humans as the smallest unit in a group have self-awareness that comes from personal awareness of everything. The self-awareness referred to is reality, self-narcissism, self-respect, personality dignity, egoism, and self-realization.

    Humans as individual beings need behavioral patterns. Known as homo sapiens, humans have a mind that can help them think and act wisely. The intellect can be used by humans to develop the various potentials that exist within themselves.

    The potential is work, creation, and intention. The various development of potential that is done will make him a whole human being as the most perfect creature created by God.

    Human development occurs individually through various stages that take dozens or even decades to become an adult. Humans will grow with the efforts of education.

    The development that occurs will allow a person to have optimal potential. Educational efforts are made to develop human potential as individual beings.

    Education can also help people develop all the ideas in their minds and help apply them in everyday life. That way, human beings as individual beings will improve the quality of their own lives.

    Human Characteristics as Individual Beings

    As explained before, every human being is born with a different personality or becomes himself. That is the uniqueness that humans have.

    With the existence of individuality, each person will have different ambitions, wishes, feelings, enthusiasm, tendencies, and resilience. According to Oxendine, humans as individual beings have different characteristics. The following is the difference in the individuality of each person that appears specifically.

    1. Physical differences

    The physical differences in question are height and weight, age, vision, hearing, and ability to act.

    2. Social differences

    Social differences, including religion, economic status, tribe, and family relationships.

    3. Personality differences

    Personality differences lie in character, interests, motives, and attitudes.

    4. Differences in skill or intelligence

     

  • Meaning of Manhaj: Benefits and Advantages of Following Manhaj

    Meaning of Manhaj: Benefits and Advantages of Following Manhaj

    Manhaj is – Some Muslims may not know what is meant by manhaj salaf, although the term salafi may be familiar to some people. To understand it, it is necessary to dissect the meaning of manhaj and salaf first.

    Citing the journal Manhaj Salafiyah by H. Muhammadin (2013: 147), manhaj is ath-thariqah or the path taken by the companions of the Prophet SAW in understanding the religion of God. Meanwhile, salaf in a foreign language means the previous or leading.

    Yazid bin Abdul Qadir Jawas (2006: 18) in the Syarah Aqidah Ahlul Sunnah wal Jamaa’ah said that in terms of time, the word Salaf is used to refer to the period of time that should be emulated and followed, namely the first three generations in Islam.

    There are 3 main components of As-Salaf, namely:

    • The companions (those who lived as Muslims at the time of the Prophet, met him and died as Muslims).
    • Tabi’in (those who lived in the time of the Companions and died as Muslims).
    • Tabi’ut Tabi’in (those who lived in the time of tabi’in and died as a Muslim)

    It can be understood that the way of the Salaf is the path taken based on the understanding of the companions of the Prophet SAW.

    Meaning of Manhaj

    Manhaj salah is an expression of two words, “manhaj” and “salaf”. Both have their own meaning. Manhaj is interpreted as a bright path, while salaf means those who have gone before you.

    Salaf can also be interpreted as imams and companions of the Prophet SAW. So, the way of the Salaf can be interpreted as a clear path according to religious rules based on the understanding of the companions of the Prophet SAW.

    Mention for Followers of Manhaj Salaf

    The people who follow the way of the Salaf (salafiyyun) are commonly called Ahlus Sunnah wal Jamaah because they hold fast to the Al-Qur’an and As-Sunnah (the teachings of the Prophet) and are united on it. Also referred to as Ahlul Hadist wal Atsar because they hold fast to hadith and atsar when people prioritize reason.

    They are also called al-Firatun Najiyah, that is, the group that God saved from hell as will be mentioned in the hadith of Abdullah bin Amr bin al-‘Ash radhiallahu anhuma.

    In addition, they are also called ath-Taifah al-Manshurah, which is a group that is always helped and won by God as will be mentioned in the hadith Tsuban radhiyallahu anhu,

    Obligation to Follow the Manhaj of the Salaf

    Manhaj salaf and salafiyyun are not limited (confined) to certain organizations, certain regions, certain leaders, certain parties and so on. In fact, the manhaj of the salaf teaches us that the bond of brotherhood is built on the Qur’an and the Sunnah of the Messenger of Allah, may God bless him and grant him peace, with the understanding of righteous salafush.

    Whoever holds fast to him, then he is our brother even though he is in another part of the world. This is the holy bond connected by the manhaj of the Salaf, the manhaj followed by the Messenger of Allah, may God bless him and grant him peace, and his companions.

    The Salaf Manhaj is a manhaj that must be followed and held firmly by every Muslim in understanding his religion. Why is that? Because, this is what Allah explained in the Qur’an and by the Messenger of Allah, may God bless him and grant him peace, in his Sunnah. Meanwhile, God has bequeathed to us:

    “O you who believe, obey Allah and obey the Messenger (Prophet Muhammad) and the ululamri (power holders) among you. If you disagree about something, return it to Allah (the Qur’an) and the Messenger (the Sunnah) if you believe in Allah and the Last Day. That is better (for you) and better as a result (in this world and in the hereafter).” (An-Nisa: 59).

     

    Evidence of Al–Qur’an Verses about the Obligation to Follow the Manhaj of the Salaf

    As for the verses of the Qur’an that explain that we should really follow the way of the Salaf as follows:

    1. Surat Al-Fatihah verses 6-7

    “Show us the straight path. The path of those whom You have blessed.” (Al-Fatihah: 6-7).

    Imam Ibnul Qayyim said,

    “They are people who know the truth and strive to follow it. Everyone who knows the truth better and follows it more consistently, is certainly more entitled to be on the straight path. There is no doubt that the companions of the Messenger of Allah, may God bless him and grant him peace, are the people who are more entitled to bear this attribute (title) than the people of Rafidah (Shia).” (Madarijus Salikin. 1/72).

    Imam Ibnu Qayyim’s explanation of the verse above shows that the companions of the Messenger of Allah, may God bless him and grant him peace, who are the Salafush Salih, are more entitled to the title of “those who have been blessed by God” and “those who are on the straight path”. . Because, their knowledge of the truth is so deep and they are very consistent in following it.

    This title shows that the manhaj they follow in understanding this Islamic religion is the right manhaj and on the straight path. Therefore, those who try to follow their manhaj and footsteps, means that they have followed the right manhaj and are on the straight path.

    2. Surat An-Nisa verse 115

    “And whoever opposes the Messenger after the truth is clear to him and follows other than the path of the believers, We let him wander freely in error and We cast him into Jahannam. And Hell is as bad as the place of return.” (An-Nisa: 115).

    Imam Ibnu Abi Jamrah al-Andalusi said,

    “The scholars have explained the meaning of God’s words above that what is meant by the believers here are the companions of the Messenger of Allah, may God bless him and grant him peace, and the first generation of this ummah. Because, they are people who welcome this Sharia with a clean soul.

    They have asked everything that was not understood from him with the best questions. The Messenger of Allah, peace and blessings of Allah be upon him, also answered it with the best answer. He explained with a perfect explanation. They also listen to the answers and explanations of the Messenger of Allah, peace and blessings be upon him, by understanding, practicing as best as possible, memorizing and conveying with full honesty.

    They really have a great priority over us. It is through them that our relationship can be connected with the Messenger of Allah, may God bless him and grant him peace, as well as with Allah subhanahu wa ta’ala.” (al – Mirqat fi Nahjis Salaf Sabilun Najah p. 36 – 37).

    Shaykhul Islam Ibn Taymiyyah, may God have mercy on him, said,

    “Truly, both (opposing the Messenger and following other than the path of believers) are interrelated. Therefore, whoever opposes the Messenger as the truth is clear to him, must have followed other than the path of the believers. Whoever follows other than the path of the believers, he has opposed the Messenger after the truth is clear to him.” (Majmu’ Fatawa, 7/38).

    After we know that the believers in this verse are the companions of the Messenger of Allah, peace be upon him (as- Salaf) and the close connection between opposing the Messenger and following other than the path of the believers, it can be concluded that we must follow the “manhaj” whether we like it or not. salaf” way of friends.

    Because, if we take other than their path in understanding dinul Islam, this means that we have opposed the Messenger of Allah, may God bless him and grant him peace. The consequences are truly terrible, that is, they will be left free to wallow in error. The end is going into Jahannam, as bad as the place of return. Na’uzu billahi min dzalik.

    3. Surat At-Taubah verse 100

    “And those who were the first to convert to Islam from among the Muhajirin and Ansar and those who followed them well, God was pleased with them and they were also pleased with God. Allah SWT prepared for them a paradise with rivers flowing in it. They are eternal in it. That is a great success.” (at- Taubah: 100).

    In this verse, Allah subhanahu wa ta’ala does not specify His pleasure and guarantee of heaven for the companions of the Muhajirin and Ansar (as- Salaf). People who follow them well also get the pleasure of God and the assurance of heaven like them.

    Al-Hafiz Ibnu Katsir, may God have mercy on him, said,

    “Allah subhanahu wa ta’ala informs about His pleasure to the people who preceded them from among the Muhajirin and Ansar as well as those who followed their footsteps well. God also informed about the sincerity of their pleasure to God, as well as what He has prepared for them, which is heaven – heaven full of enjoyment, and eternal enjoyment.” (Tafsir Ibn Katsir, 2/ 367). This shows that following the way of the Salaf will lead to the pleasure of Allah subhanahu wa ta’ala and His heaven.

    Proof of the Prophet’s Hadith about the Obligation to Follow the Manhaj of the Salaf

    1. Hadith about the sunnah of Islam

    The Messenger of Allah, may God bless him and grant him peace, said,

    “Indeed, whoever among you lives as long as I do will see many disputes. Therefore, you must stick to my Sunnah and the Sunnah of the Khulafa ar-Rashidin who are guided. Hold it tight and bite it with your molars…” (Sahih, HR. Abu Dawud, at-Tirmidhi, ad-Darimi, Ibu Majah and others from the companion of al-‘Irbad Ibn Sariyah radiallahu anhu. Irwa ‘ul Ghalil , hadith no. 2455).

    In this hadith it is clearly stated that we will witness so many disagreements in understanding the teachings of Islam. The only way that leads to salvation is to follow the Sunnah of the Messenger of Allah, may Allah bless him and grant him peace, and the Sunnah of the Khulafaur-Rashidin (Salafus Salih). In fact, the Messenger of Allah, peace and blessings of Allah be upon him, ordered us to always stick to it.

    Imam ash-Syathibi, may God have mercy on him, said,

    “The Messenger of Allah, may God bless him and grant him peace, as you have witnessed, has linked the Sunnah of al-Khilafa ar-Rashidin with his Sunnah and one of the consequences of following his Sunnah is following their Sunnah.

    Because what they follow as Sunnah is really following the Sunnah of their Prophet, may God bless him and grant him peace. Or follow what they understand from his sunnah, may God bless him and grant him peace, both globally and in detail that is not known to anyone other than them.” (al-I’tishom. 1/118).

    2. Hadith about people who are above the truth

    The Messenger of Allah, peace be upon him, said,

    “Continually there is a small group of my people who always appear above the truth. Those who insult them will not harm them, until God’s judgment comes and they are in such a state.” (Sahih, HR. al-Bukhari and Muslim, the wording of this hadith is the wording of Muslim from the companion of Tsauban, may God be pleased with him, hadith no. 1920).

    Imam Ahmad bin Hanbl, may God have mercy on him, said, “If it’s not halul hadith, I don’t know who they are?!” (Shyaraf Ashhabil Hadist, by al-Khatib al-Baghdadi, p. 36)

    Imam Ibu Mubarak, may God have mercy on him, Imam al-Bukhari, may God have mercy on him, Imam Ahmad bin Sinan al-Muhaddits, may God have mercy on him, and they all said about the meaning of this hadith, “So, everything is about the meaning of this hadith.”

    3. Hadith about 73 groups

    The Messenger of Allah, peace be upon him, said,

    “My people will be divided into 73 groups. All went to hell except for one group. He was asked, “Who are they, O Messenger of Allah?” The youth answered, (The group that is above what I and my companions are.” (Hasan, HR. at-Tirmidhi in his Sunan, “Kitabul Iman”, “Chapter Iftiraqu hadzihik Umah.” From the friend of Abdullah bin Amr bin al – Ash.

    The truth is recognized by Allah SWT

    As Muslims, the way of the Salaf is a rule that must be held tightly. Allah SWT has ordered Muslims to follow the way of the Salaf as His word salam Al-Qur’an.

    “Those who preceded and were the first (to enter Islam) from (among) the emigrants and the Ansar and those who followed them well, God was pleased with them and they were pleased with Him, and God provided for them the heavens in which rivers flow; they remain in it forever. That’s a big win.” (Qs. At Taubah: 100).

    In other words, God also praises the faith of the companions of the Prophet SAW.

    “If they have believed in what you believe, they have indeed been guided. However, if they turn away, they are indeed at enmity (with you). So, Allah will suffice you (with His protection) from their (evil). He is All-Hearing and All-Knowing.” (Qs. Al Baqarah: 137)

    The priority of Manhaj Salaf

    As the only manhaj that must be followed to understand Islam, there are several merits of the Salaf manhaj, namely:

    1. It is a rule that shows the straight path according to the pleasure of Allah SWT.
    2. Manhaj salaf should be held tightly when there is an understanding or opinion in understanding Islamic law.
    3. Following other teachings other than the way of the Salaf means that it is more free to fall into error that is not according to the instructions of Allah SWT.

    Benefits of Manhaj Salaf

    Any Muslim who follows the way of the Salaf, will certainly get a reward from Allah SWT. Here are the benefits of obeying the Salaf method:

    1. Shown the way to safety to avoid going astray.
    2. Apart from the temptation of the cursed devil.
    3. Saved from the torment of hell.
    4. People who are always in the truth and will always get help from Allah SWT.
    5. People who practice the way of the Salaf will be pleased by Allah and attain heaven (Al Jannah).

    Closing

    It turns out that there are many benefits and priorities, yes, Reader. By knowing about its benefits and priorities, it is easy for us to know in depth. Now Reader have a better understanding of the Salaf manhaj, right? May we become obedient people who follow the way of the Salaf and be protected by Allah SWT to walk on the straight path. Hope this article inspires you!

     

  • The Meaning, Benefits and Purpose of Business You Need to Know

    The Meaning, Benefits and Purpose of Business You Need to Know

    Purpose of Business – The increasingly modern age makes many people who develop a business starting from a home business to a business that has expanded to several regions. A business built by a person or group can be said to be a business venture. Business activities that are carried out in earnest will experience development, so that the profits obtained will be more and more.

    Therefore, in order for a business to grow, it is best to first understand the meaning of business, the benefits of business, the purpose of business, and other things related to business. Some of these things need to be known by many people, especially for those who want to start a business. In fact, not only knowing some of these things, we also need to understand these things.

    By knowing and understanding things related to business, then the spirit of developing and expanding the business will increase, so that we will find various ways to develop the business that is being developed or pioneered. Businesses that are growing will be able to compete with old competitors or new competitors.

    The more people who create and develop a business, then the employment field will be wide open, so that the well-being of the community will increase as well. Therefore, never hesitate to build a business even if you have to face various obstacles.

    If you want to know business matters, such as the meaning of business, the benefits of business, the purpose of business, you can read this article to the end, Reader. So, read this article immediately, Reader.

    Meaning of Business

    The word “business” comes from the English language, namely business , while the word business itself comes from the development of the word busy which means busy. “Busy” in this case can happen to individuals, communities, or society. Business if interpreted in a simple context can be interpreted as a busyness in doing an activity or job that can provide profit to someone.

    Meanwhile, business if interpreted in the context of an entity can be interpreted as a business entity or organization that performs a movement in a professional, industrial, or commercial activity. All these activities are done with the aim of making a profit.

    This is in line with business in the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI) business is a commercial venture in the world of trade or business or business venture. In building a business, the business owner will definitely try to get enough profit because with that profit a business can be developed into a bigger business.

    In short, business is an activity or activity carried out by an individual or a business entity with the aim of making a profit by doing various things, such as manufacturing, distribution, selling, and purchasing. Therefore, many people say that business is related to economic activities and can build economic growth.

    However, in building a business, it is not as easy as flipping the palm of the hand, so whether it is an individual or a business entity, you should try to think about making a mature plan. This needs to be done so that the business that is built can last a long time, and even have the ability to compete with competitors.

    The Meaning of Business According to the Experts

    After knowing the meaning of business based on KBBI, now is the time to know the meaning of business according to the experts. Taken from several sources, the meaning according to experts is as follows.

    1. Brown and Petrello

    Brown and Petrello stated that business is an institution that can make a production result, either in the form of goods or services that can be used to meet business needs and can meet the needs of businesses that have been carried out by the government or the private sector with the aim of achieving a profit or no.

    2. Jeff Madura

    According to Jeff Madura, business is an institution built by individuals or groups with the aim of forming an enterprise that can be utilized or useful to provide services or production products that are liked by customers or society in general.

    3. Hughes and Kapoor

    Hughes and Kapoor said that business is an activity of an individual or a group of individuals that is planned with the aim of creating a product or service that can be sold to consumers in order to gain profit while also being able to meet the needs of the consumer himself.

    4. Steinford

    According to Steinford, business is an institution or business entity that can create goods and services that can be used to meet the needs of society. If, the needs of the community are increasing, then the goods and services produced by business institutions will also increase in order to meet the needs of the community while also getting more profit.

    5. Hooper

    Hooper said that business is all the complex things that exist in various fields, such as sales and industry, basic industry, processing and industry, manufacturing and network, distribution, banking, transportation, insurance, and others that then all those fields enter the business world as a whole.

    6. Merriam Webster

    According to Merriam Webster business is an activity, such as the manufacture, purchase, and sale of goods and services that are then exchanged for money. In addition, he also said that business can be interpreted as an activity that includes part of the job as well as some activities that have been completed by companies, shops, factories, and so on.

    7. Griffin and Ebert

    Based on what was expressed by Griffin and Ebert, business is an institution or organization that provides or produces goods or services with the aim of making a profit.

    8. LR Dicksee

    According to LR Dicksee, business is a form of an activity carried out in order to obtain profit or profit from a business activity carried out.

    9. Prof. Owen

    Prof. Owen said that business is a company that is closely related to production and distribution of production to be traded or sold to the market or consumers by giving a price for each service.

    Business Benefits

    A business built by a person or a business entity must have several benefits, namely:

    1. Be a Leader and Boss

    In creating and developing a business, we can be leaders or bosses. What’s more, if the business that is built is owned by yourself and not owned by the group. By being a leader as well as a boss, then we can make policies that suit our desires. However, it is even better if the policy is taken based on the joint decision of the employees of the business, so that communication between employees and leaders can be well established.

    For some people, becoming a leader and boss has been an ambition since childhood, so they will try as hard as possible, but some other people become leaders and bosses because of their exceptional performance in the company. From wherever the desire to be a leader and boss is important to have the ability to develop a business venture.

    2. Manage Time Well

    The next benefit that can be felt from business activities is being able to organize well. That is, we can arrange when to work and when to rest. However, things like this happen more often in businesses built by individuals rather than groups.

    If the business is developed as a group, it is best to arrange the time with the agreement of the group members. This needs to be done so that there are no misunderstandings between group members, so that the business that is being pioneered can grow and last longer. A business that is growing indicates that the business that is being carried out is making enough profit.

    3. Increase Self-Confidence

    Increasing self-confidence is very important in a human life. Basically, there are many ways to increase self-confidence, one of which is to build a business venture. Business activities turn out to be able to build self-confidence because we have confidence that production results in the form of goods and services can sell well in the market.

    The more self-confidence increases, the more ideas to develop business ventures. Therefore, the benefits of business should be maximized as best as possible.

    4. Getting Appreciation

    For those of you who build a business venture, either as a group or individually, then you can get benefits in the form of gaining appreciation. The appreciation given can be for the company and can also be for the individual. The more awards received, the greater the consumer’s trust in the company or individual itself.

    Consumer trust is very important for the sustainability of a business. In other words, consumer trust is the key to the success of a business.

    5. Awaken the Spirit of Entrepreneurship

    The benefit of the next business venture is to awaken the spirit of entrepreneurship. This spirit of entrepreneurship is very necessary in developing and expanding business ventures. Without an entrepreneurial spirit, it will be very difficult for a business to grow. In this modern age, developing an entrepreneurial spirit is necessary because we can open up jobs.

    6. Adding Experience and Insight

    The last benefit of building a business is adding experience as well as insight. The more experience we have in our lives, the more solutions we find to solve problems. Similarly, by building a business, the problems in the business will be easier to overcome when we already have a lot of experience in the business.

    Business Purpose

    Basically, the main purpose of a business is to make a profit. However, in reality, the purpose of business is not only that, but there are other purposes. Therefore, in order to make it easier to understand the purpose of a business, the purpose of business is divided into two, namely the purpose of business in general and the purpose of business for business actors.

    Business Purposes in General

    1. Making a Profit

    As many people already know that the main purpose of building a business is to make a profit. Almost all companies and entrepreneurs will seek profit from the business that is built. For this reason, business owners must be smart to find ways so that the business that is built can be developed well and profits can be achieved.

    2. Progress and Development for Business Enterprises

    Every business that is built by an individual or a group, must really want the business to continue to experience progress and development. The more advanced and developed a business is, the greater the profit obtained and the more jobs there are.

    3. Gain Performance

    Who does not want to get a performance, every business that is built must have a purpose to get a performance. This is because performance is a form of acknowledgment that the business is trusted by the community and that its goods and services have superior quality from competitors.

    4. Provide Community Needs

    In addition to making a profit, a business is also built with the aim of providing for the needs of the community. Community needs will be difficult to meet if there is no one to make goods and services needed by the community. Therefore, the community and the company will be interconnected. The company will make a profit from the goods and services sold, while the community can meet its needs.

    5. Increase Community Economic Growth

    Economic growth in the community should be increased so that the community becomes more prosperous. In addition, economic growth is also needed by the country to advance the life of the nation and the country. Economic growth can be obtained through the formation of a business venture. In short, when we build a business, the business must have the purpose of increasing economic growth, whether it is the economy of the community or the economy of the country.

    6. Creating Jobs

    The more jobs there are, the more people’s lives get closer to prosperity. Increasing employment can be done by building and expanding a business. The purpose of this one business can be said to be very good, because it can provide income or income to other people, so that the person can live a better life.

    7. Showing Enterprise Existence

    The existence of the company is the purpose of a business. Without the existence of the company, the trust of society and consumers will decrease, so the company will have difficulty growing.

    Business Purposes for Entrepreneurs

    1. To Meet the Needs of Life

    For business people, businesses must have a purpose to earn income from the business they pioneered. For this reason, business people will look for various ways to get profit from sales so that the needs of life can be well met.

    2. Enriching Family Life

    Entrepreneurs who already have families will rely on business as income or income. With that income, the entrepreneurs can provide for their families.

    3. Continuing the Family Business

    For some businesses that exist in Indonesia are the result of previous generations, so there are not a few entrepreneurs who aim to continue family businesses that have been established for a long time. By continuing the family business, the business that has been built for a long time will not disappear.

    4. Making Innovation and Adding Experience

    The purpose for the next business actors is to develop innovation while adding experience in the business world. Innovation in business is very necessary to be able to compete with other companies. In addition, with the emergence of an innovation, it means that the ideas owned by business actors are quite a lot.

    5. Want to Own Your Own Business

    For entrepreneurs who build their own business, they must be very proud because they can build their own business. What’s more, businesses developed individually will be free to determine a policy.

    Conclusion

    Businesses that are built and developed individually or with groups, actually have many benefits that can be felt. In addition, in building a business, we also need to know the purpose of building the business. This needs to be done so that the business that is built does not lose its direction and continues to experience progress and development, so that it can provide benefits for oneself, the community, and even the country.

     

  • Meaning, Benefits and Examples of Humility

    Meaning, Benefits and Examples of Humility

    KW Example of Humble Attitude

    Meaning, Benefits and Examples of Humility

    pixabay

    Example of humility – Humility as a commendable act, because to avoid arrogance and pride. Humility should always be applied in everyday life. Being humble can provide many benefits for yourself and even others. The benefits of humility are not only acceptable in this world but also in the afterlife. 

    On this occasion, we will discuss more about humility, starting from the meaning to examples of attitude. So, read this article to the end, Reader. 

    What is Humility?

    Humility or a humble attitude as an attitude that realizes the limitations of one’s own abilities and one’s own inability and does not become arrogant. A humble attitude can also be understood as a polite attitude and having a realistic view. However, it does not mean to humble yourself because humility and humility are different. Humility will keep away from arrogance and knowing everything. 

    Humility should be possessed by everyone. not only important in the work environment, but human beings as social beings and individuals who need each other, Reader need to remain humble wherever they are. 

    Humble Purpose

    After discussing the meaning of humility, the next discussion is the purpose of humility. Then, what is the purpose of being humble? The following is the purpose of humility that you need to know. 

    1. To respect others as human beings regardless of face or property.
    2. Humility will not magnify the great, nor will it diminish the small. 
    3. As a way to respect yourself because you feel that you still have a lot of shortcomings compared to others. 
    4. To be modest and not boastful even though one has many advantages. 
    5. To cover all the things that feel a shame that should not be heard by others. 
    6. Not to brag about yourself. This is one of the gifts given by God Almighty. 

    Humble Priorities

    In addition to purpose, it turns out that humility also has priority. The following are some of the priorities of humility. 

    1. Humility will pave the way to heaven.
    2. God will raise the status of those who humble themselves.
    3. Liked and respected by others.
    4. Liked by many people.
    5. Have a lot of friends.
    6. His heart will always be calm.
    7. Inherit the noble attitude of the Prophets.
    8. Tawadhu is the path to a noble position. 

    Examples of Humility

    Well, after knowing the meaning, purpose, and priority of humility, then at this point we will discuss examples of humility. The following are examples of humility as follows:

    1. Do not hesitate to ask for help

    Asking for help, especially for trivial matters, is sometimes prestigious, but not for humble people. When they find difficulties in solving something they will not hesitate to ask for help. 

    2. Easy to thank

    Are Reader among those who often say thank you, even for small things? This is one of the signs of a humble attitude , Reader! They will easily say thank you for help and service from others. For example, to waiters who bring food, couriers who deliver packages and other small things. 

    3. Have a high sense of curiosity

    Humble people are eternal learners aka always thirsty for knowledge. They will make more use of time to study, both academically and learning from other people’s experiences. No wonder if humble people are sometimes identified as serious people. 

    4. Prioritize the interests of others

    A humble person will understand his worth. Because of this, they rarely stand out in front of others, just to show how smart or great they are. 

    In addition, they will also realize that as many things as they know are not the most important. But how much they care about others. 

    5. Able to handle ego

    A humble person is less likely to engage in ego-driven disagreements or disagreements. This is because they understand that everyone has a different perspective and that perspective is just as valuable as their own. 

    6. Have many friends

    In general, humble people think more flexibly. Therefore, they will be easier to get along with anyone who has a different mindset. They can get along well and rarely have conflicts or disagreements with others. 

    7. Easy to compromise

    Arrogant people are quite difficult to be invited to compromise on something. Unlike those who have humility in themselves. Humble people tend to find it easier to meet in the middle and reach a compromise that benefits both sides. This applies in all aspects of both work and relationships.

    8. Not proud to admit wrong

    Admitting mistakes is sometimes difficult for some people, but not for those who have a humble attitude. When wrong or confused, they will not seek justification and immediately apologize. If true, they are also not arrogant or arrogant. 

    9. Accept criticism or other people’s input

    Humble people will always be open to the opinions of others. They understand that there are 2 sides to every argument. Therefore, humble people will listen and accommodate every input, criticism and admit that other people’s ideas or opinions are better than theirs. 

    10. Do not envy the success of others

    Humble people will celebrate and be happy with the success or happiness of others. They sincerely congratulate their colleagues or friends on their achievements. 

    11. Listen a lot, talk a little

    They are humble people who listen more than dominate the conversation. In addition, when telling stories or speaking they do not exaggerate everything or look for validation or acceptance from others.

    12. Always be grateful for what you have

    Being grateful for what you have, whether it’s in good or bad conditions, is a manifestation of humility. So, so that Reader can always feel happy and joyful, then thank God a lot for all the blessings. 

    13. Follow the work of devotion even if you are a well-respected and respected official

    In the community, devotional work activities are often held, so even though Reader has a highly respected and respected position, there is nothing wrong with continuing to participate in the devotional work activities. 

    14. Helping others who have done evil to us

    What is the attitude of Reader when he sees people who used to do bad things suddenly experience difficulties? Surely even if the person has done less good to us then when he is in trouble we are obliged to help and help him. The attitude of always wanting to help others who have done good to us is a reflection of humility. 

    15. Openness to accept every test and problem

    The next humble attitude is to openly accept every test and problem that comes in life. A humble attitude comes from believing that all problems and trials come from God. 

    16. Be patient when insulted

    What did Reader do when insulted and insulted by others? Everyone definitely has a different reaction, yes, Reader. But when Reader is insulted by other people, it is best to try not to respond to other people’s insults and make the insults a lesson that has wisdom for you. Reader’ attitude of being patient is a reflection of his humble attitude. 

    17. Putting other people first even if they are a respected person

    Still putting others first even if someone is looked up to is one of the humble attitudes. For example, an official or prominent person is queuing even though he may not have to queue but he chooses to queue because there are other people queuing. 

    18. Not arrogant despite having a lot of wealth

    Another example of humility is not being arrogant despite having a lot of money or property, which can be used to buy whatever you want to buy. So, even though Reader has abundant property, he still feels that the property or wealth he owns is a deposit from God, so that at any time the property he owns can be taken back by His owner. 

    How to Apply Humility

    Applying humility in everyday life as a commendable attitude that needs to be done in everyday life. This trait is a trait that is shown by not being proud of what we have. 

    Applying humility in life turns out to have its own priority that is beneficial for life both in this world and in the afterlife. This is in accordance with what is stated in the following hadith narrated by Imam Muslim:

    “Alms does not reduce property. God does not add to a servant the nature of forgiveness but will glorify himself more and more. And also no one has the quality of tawadhu (humility) because of Allah but Allah who exalts him.” (HR. Muslim no. 2588).

    The property can be applied in various ways. For example, not bragging about one’s advantages in front of others, always being open to other people’s input and advice and always appreciating other people’s success. 

    The Benefits of Having a Humble Attitude 

    Why should you have a humble attitude in the work environment as well as the everyday environment? Because the work environment or everyday environment is the most visited place because they spend a lot of time there. 

    There will be many relations, more experienced people and significant others. Therefore, it is very important to have a humble attitude in the work environment so as not to create arrogance and feel the greatest and most capable. Does Reader know the benefits of being humble? Let’s take a look!

    1. Build good relationships

    When Reader is humble and not arrogant, it will certainly be better to develop a good relationship. No one is comfortable with someone who has an arrogant attitude. A good relationship in the work environment or the surrounding environment is of course very important, if you have a good relationship between colleagues, the work environment will definitely be more comfortable. 

    2. Build good teamwork

    A good relationship and relationship between colleagues in the work environment is very much needed. For example, if a leader is not humble, of course the team under him will not be comfortable in the work environment. However, if Reader is humble, this can build good teamwork. 

    3. Creating relationships 

    Being humble and building good relationships can also have a positive impact by creating relationships. If in the work environment, of course this relationship is very important both to support careers and to improve and develop Reader’ abilities. 

    4. Can continue to learn

    Being humble will also make Reader feel that their knowledge and skills are not enough. Curiosity will make Reader able to continue learning and be humble. This is also one of the triggers for Reader to continue to be curious and develop skills. 

    5. Easy to adapt 

    Not being arrogant and humble will make Reader know the position well and neither exaggerated nor humble. When Reader locates itself well, it will be able to adapt quickly in the work environment. 

    6. People become more sympathetic

    Another benefit of being humble is that other people will be sympathetic towards us, Reader. This is nothing else because the nature of Reader is very opposite to the arrogant nature. Where arrogance is not liked by others. 

    Characteristics of Humble People

    By understanding the meaning of humility, it will be easier to apply it in everyday life. Here are the characteristics of people with a humble attitude and nature.

    1. Not selfish and selfish.
    2. Able to handle his emotions wisely.
    3. Helper and prioritize the interests of others. 
    4. Always be grateful for receiving and getting help from others. 
    5. Forgive people who have done wrong. 
    6. Do not discriminate against others based on position, class, taste and so on. 
    7. Don’t try to justify yourself so always apologize when you do something wrong. 
    8. Easier to accept criticism and include others. 
    9. Make the success and achievements of others as motivation. 
    10. More listening than talking. 

    How to Cultivate Humility

    To cultivate a humble attitude, one needs to be aware of the following things:

    1. Realizing our need for help and guidance. 
    2. Believing in spiritual and transcendental reality.
    3. Believing in our need to give to a higher power. 
    4. Realizing our need to make amends and clean up mistakes. 
    5. Realizing our limitations and our mistakes. 
    6. Believing in life after death.
    7. Awareness of our mortality as human beings. 

    Well, that’s about the meaning, benefits and examples of humility, Reader. Humility in a person does not come by chance. However, it should be formed and also from some life experiences. After realizing a few things, slowly a humble attitude will also be embedded in a person. Of course this should also be accompanied by a positive and supportive environment. Hope this article inspires you! Good luck!

     

  • Definition of Management Trainee and 16 Tasks

    Definition of Management Trainee and 16 Tasks

    What is the meaning of management trainee ? Management trainee  or what is often referred to as the term MT is indeed no stranger to the ears. However, there may still be some who ask about the meaning of  management trainee .

    In addition, there are many who do not know the duties of  a management trainee . Many  fresh graduates  choose to enter the MT world. It was done as a stepping stone in the career world.

    When entering  training , participants will get a lot of training. However, in addition to that, the participants will also gain a lot of knowledge. They will participate in the trial program in each department.

    Then, what is the meaning of  management trainee?  This article will briefly discuss the meaning of  management trainee , its requirements, duties and responsibilities and the benefits of following this program.

    Definition of Management Trainee

    The training will be carried out in each department of the company. Then will be evaluated by the manager or senior manager. They will then be placed in the department they control.

    The purpose of holding this program is to create new manager candidates in a company. The manager that will be created is allocated to various fields. Such as sales, marketing, operational midwifery and so on.

    Some people often equate  management trainee  or MT with internship programs in general. However, both are different programs. Management trainee programs   are more difficult than internship programs in general.

    The activities will be more challenging. Because, there will be many surprises from the company in it. Therefore, each participant must prepare and improve the abilities they have.

    In addition, the difference between  management trainees  and interns lies in their position. People who undergo  management trainees  are people who are already legally part of the company. While the trainees are only temporary.

    Intern participants can be said to still be “outsiders” from the company. Management trainee  is also a role that is discussed in a company organization. They are official employees in the company.

    However, in the career level, the role and salary will be different from the employees in general. There are several different terms to refer to  management trainees  in each company. Such as Graduate Program, Management Associate Program, Officer Development Program, Future Leaders Program, Global Leaders Program and so on.

    However, if you look back, the terms from  the management trainee  have similarities. The similarity is emphasizing  development  and  leadership , or a development and leadership. However, basically all those terms are the same as the meaning of  management trainee .

    That is, participants will be prepared and developed to become a leader. They will become leaders in the company after completing the  management trainee program  .

    Management Trainee Requirements

    However, in general or in outline,  the management trainee requirements  are as follows:

    • Have good communication skills.
    • Have mathematical ability.
    • Have computer skills.
    • Having the ability in verbal presentation.
    • Have skills in written presentation.
    • Have MS skills. Strong office.
    • Have relevant experience in the same field.
    • Have a business or management degree.
    • Speak in math and computer skills.
    • Speak in verbal and written presentations.
    • Strong MS Office skills.
    • Relevant experience in a similar field.
    • Possess a management or business degree.

    Management Trainee Duties and Responsibilities

    • Complete all assigned tasks.
    • Helping other jobs every day.
    • Participate in workshop activities, meetings and other classes.
    • Learn and observe from the experiences of other colleagues.
    • Absorb and understand information and knowledge about company rules, work processes and SOPs that apply in the company.
    • Listen in detail to all input or criticism given by managers, supervisors, and other seniors.
    • Meet all requirements.
    • Follow all the meetings held in the training.
    • Follow all company rules, safety protocols and health protocols.
    • Prepare documents.
    • Make a report.
    • Learn about the resolution of a problem.
    • Listen well to all the speakers in the training or meeting.
    • Willing to go to another office or branch.
    • Join to jump right into the training process.
    • Following the test and evaluation at the end of the training session.

    Benefits of Following a Management Trainee

    Not only that, there may be doubts when looking at the tasks that must be done in following the  management trainee program . However, there are many benefits that can be taken when following the  management trainee program . Especially for you   fresh graduates .

    What are the benefits of following the program? Here is the explanation.

    1. Train the ability to work together

    To be a good manager, one must be able to work well together. That does not only apply to co-workers of the same profession. However, towards  customers .

    Through this training program, a person’s ability to work together will continue to be trained. This is done until they can master and pass the training program. The way to train the ability to work together in  management trainees  is to divide them into several groups.

    The group will be used as a place to practice cooperation in the next few months. All training participants must be able to solve the problems encountered. In addition, they must be able to work together in completing the test that will be given.

    2. Teaching the spirit of leadership

    One of the functions of management in a company is leadership. Therefore, in this training all participants will be trained. The participants will be prepared how to be a good manager in a company.

    Not only that, the participants will learn more about leadership. And be able to master the leadership attitude, as needed by a manager.

    3. Work according to interests and talents

    The third benefit of following a management trainee program   is being able to work in a place that suits your interests and talents. Mostly, a company will use a generalization system in the  management trainee process.

    Based on that, so in the program will be taught and presented with various types of job divisions available. For example, a person will start trying different types of jobs. Starting from finance, marketing, communication,  supply chain  and so on.

    Through that,  the supervisor  will know where the person’s best abilities are. The participants can also participate in the discussion, as well as explain which role they like best in the business.

    That’s a brief summary of the meaning of  management trainee , requirements, responsibilities and the benefits that can be gained if you follow the  management trainee program .

     

  • Definition of Functional Foods and Examples of Functional Foods

    Definition of Functional Foods and Examples of Functional Foods

    Functional Food – As we know that every human being definitely needs food or food to survive. With the food we eat, we will get energy or strength to be able to do our daily activities, be it heavy activities or light activities. In addition, food can make the body fit and healthy, thus avoiding some diseases.

    In this fast-paced life, human awareness of the importance of healthy food is quite high. In fact, it can be said that most people are aware that food does not only function as a filler to fill the stomach, but it is necessary to observe the nutritional content of the food eaten. Things like this need to be spread to others so that more and more people behave in a healthy way, especially through food.

    However, there are still many foods out there that contain pesticides. This is because when the food is grown or harvested it does not use organic ingredients. If the pesticide substance is still within normal limits, it does not really harm our body. However, if the pesticide substance is beyond normal limits, then it is best not to consume that food.

    For those of you who don’t know what functional food is, let’s get acquainted with the term. By getting to know functional foods, you can live a healthy life, so that your body’s health can be improved and the risk of disease can be reduced. So, read this article to the end, Reader.

    Meaning of Functional Food

    In maintaining life, humans need food, especially food that contains the nutritional value needed for the body. By consuming nutritious food, we can create a healthy body. A healthy body will make us feel better in carrying out various activities and the most important thing about a healthy body is that it can reduce the risk of getting sick.

    To get a healthy body, not only consume nutritious food, but you need to get used to organizing the right diet. With nutritious food and a regular diet, the body is not only healthy, but will be fit as if there is a sense of enthusiasm in carrying out activities.

    Food or functional food is food that is born from food ingredients that contain nutrients and bioactive compounds that play a very important role in maintaining the health of the body. Therefore, functional food is food or food that is natural or has gone through a processing process that has the function of maintaining the metabolism of the human body.

    Functional foods can be eaten as foods that have been freed from harmful chemicals, one of which is pesticides. Food that is free from pesticides will not harm the body, it can even make the body healthier

    Currently, functional food can be known by several terms, namely Functional food, Nutraceutical, Pharma food, Designer food, Vita food, Phytochemical, Food Aceutical, Health food, Natural food, and Real food. Although functional food has many terms, but until now there has not been an agreed functional food term.

    The Meaning of Functional Food According to Experts

    According to the Indonesian Language Dictionary (KBBI)

    Functional foods are natural and artificial foods that contain one or more compounds that are beneficial for health.

    According to Astawan

    Astawan says that functional food is food that contains active components that can have a positive impact on health, apart from the benefits provided by the nutrients contained therein.

    According to the Consensus Document Scientific Concepts of Functional Foods in Europe

    This consensus document was published by the European Commission Concerted Action on Functional Food Science in Europe (FUFOSE). Based on this document, functional food is food that is proven to provide one or more benefits that can be felt by the body, maintain health and fitness, and reduce the risk of disease.

    According to Nenden Indrayati A

    Functional food is food or food that is natural or that has been processed, containing one or more compounds based on scientific research that are considered to have a variety of specific physiological functions that have a good impact on human health.

    According to Goldberg 

    Goldberg states that functional foods are foods (not pills, powders or capsules) that come from natural ingredients. This food can launch processes in the body, such as taking care of physical and mental conditions, curing diseases, and preventing diseases.

    Functions of Functional Foods

    According to Astawan, functional food has three functions, namely sensory, nutritional, and physiological .

    1. Sensory

    The first function of functional food is sensory or food that has an interesting color and appearance and the taste of the food is very delicious. Food with an attractive appearance will look very tasty to enjoy, so that there are nutrients that enter the body. In addition, food texture is also included in sensory .

    2. Nutritional

    Every human being definitely needs nutrition to support his life. In this function, food contains higher nutrients than similar foods. The nutrients contained in the food will provide a positive impact that can be felt by every human body.

    3. Physiological

    Food can provide a physiological effect that can be felt by the body, such as the body’s immune system is well maintained, the nervous system can function properly, delay the aging process, and prevent the appearance of diseases.

    Examples of Conventional Functional Foods

    Taken from several sources, examples of conventional functional foods include:

    1. Fruits

    Fruits are well known as food or intake rich in vitamins. Each fruit has different vitamins. Therefore, everyone should choose fruits that suit the needs of the body. For example, oranges that are rich in vitamin C, apples that contain a lot of vitamin A, bananas that contain vitamins A and C, and other fruits.

    2. Spices

    Indonesia is very well known for its spices, even almost every preparation of Indonesian cuisine contains spices. Spices that can be used as functional foods, such as cinnamon, cloves, turmeric, ginger, etc.

    3. Fermented food

    Fermented food can be used as a functional food. Currently, there are many fermented foods, such as tempeh, kimchi, kefir, kombucha, and so on.

    4. Drinks

    Some drinks will be beneficial for the body as long as they are consumed regularly and not excessively. Drinks that can be used as functional food because they have nutrition in them, namely coffee, black tea, green tea, herbs, and others.

    5. Vegetables

    Just like fruits, vegetables contain vitamins and substances that are very beneficial for the health of the body. We should get the vegetables that are around us. Vegetables around us, such as spinach, cauliflower, broccoli, kale, mustard greens, white mustard, etc.

    6. Grains

    Grains that look small turn out to be included in functional food. Grains as functional food, such as buckwheat, brown rice, wheat, oats, barley, etc.

    7. Seafood

    It is no longer strange that seafood contains a lot of vitamins and substances that are beneficial for the body. Therefore, seafood is included in functional foods. Examples of seafood are salmon, anchovies, sardines, cod, prawns, lobsters, and others.

    8. Nuts

    After grains, nuts can also be used as functional foods, including almonds, cashews, pistachios , Brazil nuts, macadamia nuts , and so on.

    9. Legumes

    Legumes are foods that contain nutrients and belong to the legume family. The amount of nutrients contained in legume plants, so the plants are included in functional foods, such as peanuts, chickpeas, soybeans, lentils, red beans, green beans, etc.

    Examples of Functional Food Modifications

    Below will be given examples of functional foods that have been modified. The examples are taken from several sources, namely:

    1. Yogurt

    Yoghurt is a food made from milk that is processed by fermentation. Yogurt is rich in vitamin D content that can strengthen bones.

    2. Almond milk

    After yogurt, now there is milk made from nuts, such as almond milk and cashew nut milk which are very beneficial for our body because they contain a lot of vitamin D and calcium.

    3. Bread and pasta

    Are you someone who eats bread or pasta for breakfast? Bread and pasta turns out to have a lot of iron content. The iron content can reduce the risk of anemia.

    4. Cereal

    The next modified food is cereal. Cereal is enriched with vitamin B12, so it is very suitable to be used as a functional food.

    5. Packaged juice

    If you are too lazy to make juice, then you can buy bottled juice. Although this juice is packaged, the nutritional content in it is still very good for the body.

    Types of Functional Foods

    Functional foods are divided into several types, namely based on the source of food or food and based on the way it is processed.

    1. Based on Food Sources

    Functional food sources are still divided into two, namely plant-derived food sources and animal-derived food sources. Plant-based foods, such as grapes, tomatoes, brown rice, soybeans, etc. While the food source comes from animals, such as salmon, tuna, milkfish, and others. Not only fish, animal food sources also come from beef, goat meat, etc.

    2. Based on the Processing Method

    There are three types of functional food processing methods, namely natural functional food, traditional functional food, and modern functional food.

    a. Naturally

    Functional food can naturally be interpreted as food that can be eaten directly or processed into a dish, such as kale, spinach, broccoli, etc. Fruits also include naturally functional foods, such as oranges, watermelons, pears, guavas, and so on.

    b. Traditionally

    Indonesia is well known for its traditionally processed foods. Functional foods processed traditionally, such as kencur rice, bandrek, tape, dali , and others.

    c. Modernly

    After functional foods that were processed traditionally, now functional foods can be processed in modern ways, such as pasta, isotonic drinks, sausages, packaged juices, and others.

    Benefits of Functional Foods

    Functional foods that we consume have several benefits for us. Below will be briefly explained the benefits of functional food.

    1. Protect Yourself From Disease

    It seems that it has become a common thing that functional food is indeed one of our personal protectors in order to avoid various diseases, especially chronic diseases. Not only that, functional food can also be used as medicine when we are affected by an illness.

    Apart from medicine, the body needs energy so that our body has the ability to move, so that the disease can be fought well. By protecting yourself from illness, it is the same as making the people closest to you happy.

    “Why can functional foods protect us from disease?” That question may often appear for some people, especially those who are not used to consuming functional foods. In functional food there is a substance called “antioxidant”. The molecules in antioxidant substances will protect us from free radicals. Free radicals are substances that can damage cells in the body.

    Thus, we should assume that health is the number one thing that needs to be taken care of, so we will try to eat functional food and eat with a regular diet.

    2. Keeping the Body Not Deficient in Nutrition

    The nutrients in functional foods are very abundant, so that if we consume those foods, the nutrients in the body will be fulfilled. The nutrients found in functional foods, such as vitamins, minerals, fiber, and healthy fats. All these nutrients are beneficial for the body. For example, fiber that can be useful for smoothing the digestion of food, vitamins that are useful as boosters of the body’s immunity, and so on.

    If our body suffers from a lack of nutrition, then it is very vulnerable to disease, so it will be difficult to do various daily activities. In fact, some diseases require us to ask for help from others, such as heart, stroke, etc.

    Basically, there are many diseases caused by our lack of body nutrition. For example, goiter caused by iodine deficiency, anemia caused by iron deficiency, and many more.

    Therefore, if we want to avoid diseases caused by malnutrition, we must get used to consuming functional foods regularly. Even better, we should get used to a healthy lifestyle, such as sports, regulating sleep patterns, etc.

    3. Encouraging the Growth and Development of Children

    The growth of the child must be observed so as not to experience a delay in growth. If a child experiences growth retardation, then some parts of the body will not function optimally. Body parts that cannot function optimally will make it difficult for a child to do some activities, so they will be “left behind” from children of their age.

    Functional foods have nutritional contents that can be beneficial for children’s growth, such as vitamin B12, omega 3, calcium, folic acid, and others. Vitamin B12 and calcium are very good for the growth of children’s bones, the fulfillment of these two nutrients, then the bones will be strong. Omega 3 can improve brain health and intelligence. Folic acid reduces a child’s risk of spinal cord disease, reduces the risk of neural tube defects, etc.

    For this reason, every parent should give functional food as soon as they are children, so that the child’s growth will go well. Parents can provide food, such as milk, grains, cereals, etc.

    Conclusion

    Food or food is the main source in human life because with food, then humans can undergo various kinds of daily activities. Food consumed by humans can be of natural origin or that has gone through the processing process. From wherever the food we consume comes from, we must look at the quality of the food. Not only looking at the quality of food, but the nutrition in a food also needs to be considered.

     

  • Meaning of Food 4 Healthy 5 Perfect and its Types

    Meaning of Food 4 Healthy 5 Perfect and its Types

    Initially, food 4 healthy 5 perfect was a campaign carried out by the government. As time progresses, society becomes more aware of the importance of healthy food. So now people are flocking to eat healthy food.

    Healthy food is very beneficial for the body. There are many benefits to be gained from eating healthy food. In addition, healthy food is not difficult to find. There are many shops that sell healthy food ranging from raw materials to food menus.

    However, what exactly is healthy food? This article will discuss the meaning of healthy food and its benefits for the body.

    Meaning of Food 4 Healthy 5 Perfect

    While 5 perfect is milk that becomes additional nutrition. Initially, this 4 healthy 5 perfect food was a campaign. A campaign promoted by the government to its citizens. However, as time goes by this becomes a lifestyle for the community.

    Awareness of the importance of consuming healthy food continues. However, it should still be accompanied by a healthy lifestyle. Examples include regular exercise, enough rest, a healthy and clean lifestyle, and many more. Through healthy food and a healthy lifestyle, health will always be maintained and avoided from various diseases.

    Types of Food 4 Healthy 5 Perfect

    1. Plant Food

    In addition, carbohydrates also have great benefits in the body. The benefit is as the main energy in the body. Complex carbohydrates are the healthiest type of carbohydrates for the body. Complex carbohydrates consist of fibers and starches that are strung together in long, complex chains.

    Complex carbohydrates also have more nutrients. However, complex carbohydrates take longer to digest in the body. Foods that contain complex carbohydrates have a lot of minerals, vitamins and fiber. All those contents are important for the health of a person’s body.

    The staple food sources that go into the 4 healthy 5 perfect food are diverse. For example, rice is widely consumed by people in Indonesia. In addition, potatoes are also one of the staple foods in Indonesia. Not only that, staple foods such as bread, yams and cassava are also widely consumed as staple foods.

    2. Side dishes

    Protein has amino acid content in it. The structures and functions in the body depend on how the proteins in the body are. The arrangement of tissues, cells and organs in the body will not happen if there is no protein in it.

    There will be many deficiencies in the body if the protein content in the body is lacking. The protein can be obtained through food. If a child does not have enough protein, it will cause problems in the child’s nutrition. So that he will suffer from malnutrition, this will threaten the child’s life.

    Therefore, it is necessary to have complete protein for the health of the body. These proteins can be obtained from various sources, such as animal sources. Like fish, eggs, and meat. Apart from animals, protein can also be obtained from vegetable or plant sources. Examples are tofu, tempeh, soybeans and nuts.

    3. Vegetables

    Vitamins are things that also have an important role in the body. So much needed by the body. Vitamins are responsible for producing energy and immune function in the body. In addition, vitamins are also responsible for blood clotting. In addition to the functions above, there are still many other functions of vitamins in the body.

    Not only vitamins, vegetables also contain many minerals that have various benefits. One of them is to play a role in the growth process. In addition, minerals also have a role in bone health and fluid balance. There are many more functions of minerals for the body.

    Vegetables are very healthy foods. In addition to being nutritious, vegetables are also rich in fiber. So good for digestion. A simple way to maintain health is to eat a lot of vegetables. Not only that, eating lots of vegetables will also protect the body. The body is protected from various diseases. Chronic diseases such as diabetes, heart disease and cancer can be prevented by eating lots of vegetables.

    4. Fruit

    In fruits there is also fiber that can help health. Like facilitating defecation. And lower cholesterol levels in the body. In Indonesia, there are many types of fruits. Many people do not like to eat vegetables, but prefer to eat fruits. That’s because the fruit has a more varied taste. Like having a fresh, sweet, sour taste, etc.

    5. Milk

    One of the things that is often associated with drinking milk is bone health. That’s because of the combination of its strong nutrition. A combination of calcium, potassium, protein and phosphorus. Grass-fed full-fat milk products also contain vitamin K2. All these nutrients are important and have a big role in maintaining bone health.

    In Indonesia, the most commonly consumed milk is cow’s milk. Not only drinking milk directly, milk is also widely used as a food ingredient. Such as cream, cheese, yogurt, butter and many other products.

    In addition to cow’s milk, there are still several types of milk consumed by Indonesian people. There are some people who are sometimes allergic to cow’s milk. However, he can replace it with other types of milk. Such as soy milk, goat milk and other types of plant milk.

    The most commonly consumed milk is cow’s milk. A wide variety of food products are made from cow’s milk, such as cheese, cream, butter, and yogurt. Other types of milk such as goat milk, soy milk , and other types of plant milk.

    Food Benefits 4 Healthy 5 Perfect

    1. Preventing malnutrition

    One of the great benefits that can be obtained when eating healthy food is preventing malnutrition from occurring. Malnutrition is one of the high-risk health problems. To minimize it, you can eat healthy food. These 4 healthy 5 perfect foods will help maintain the nutrients in the body. So that the body will not lack nutrition.

    2. Improve the immune system

    One of the benefits of eating healthy food is improving the immune system. From now on, pay attention to the food menu that will be consumed. Consume vegetables and fruits in sufficient amounts for the body. Vegetables and fruits have many nutrients for the body. In addition, many vitamins are contained in it. This will form a better immune system.

    One example of a vitamin that is important to consume is vitamin C. Many fruits contain vitamin C. Such as oranges, strawberries, mangoes and kiwi fruit. Not only fruits, many vegetables also contain vitamin C. Consuming it regularly is believed to prevent various diseases.

    3. Controlling body weight

    One of the benefits of eating 4 healthy 5 perfect foods is being able to control body weight. Consuming healthy and nutritious food can make the body maintain a healthy weight and idea. In addition, eating healthy food can also reduce the risk of chronic health problems.

    In addition to keeping the body healthy, eating healthy food can also help reduce weight. Many people diet and choose to eat healthy food. However, a healthy diet program should also be accompanied by regular exercise.

    4. Lowering sugar levels

    Sugar levels in the body can decrease as a result of consuming healthy foods. Through a healthy diet, diabetics can manage the level of glucose in their blood. For people with diabetes, it is very important to limit foods that have a very high level of salt and sugar.

    So it is recommended to consume healthy and nutritious food. In addition, the food consumed should be low in sugar and salt. It is useful so that the glucose in the blood is not high.

    Examples of foods that can be consumed are nuts. Like almonds and hazelnuts. In addition, cucumbers and tomatoes are also good for consumption.

    5. Take care of the digestive system

    There are many bacteria in the large intestine. However, those bacteria have an important role in the process of metabolism and digestion. Through healthy food that is low in fat, the intestines will be healthier. In addition, consuming foods high in fiber will also help. Examples of foods that can take care of digestion are green vegetables such as sweet potatoes. In addition, yogurt and egg whites also have benefits for maintaining the digestive system.

    6. Keeping the mood

    Not only physically healthy, nutritious food will help maintain spiritual health. There are several studies that prove that eating a healthy food menu will affect feelings or mood. The opposite will also happen, if the eating pattern is not healthy then it will trigger increased symptoms of depression. In addition, the body becomes easily tired.

    Read: Healthy Food According to Blood Type

    7. Helps growth

    Growing children really need to eat healthy food. In the process of growth and development, that will be very helpful. Food that has balanced nutrition will help the body in carrying out its functions. In addition, nutrition such as protein, minerals, vitamins, carbohydrates and fats will help the child to stay active.

    8. Reduce the risk of cancer

    Another benefit of healthy food is reducing the risk of cancer. The development of cancer cells will be prevented through healthy and nutritious foods. To take care of that, it is recommended to consume foods containing beta-carotene, antioxidants and vitamin A. These contents can be found in fruits, vegetables and nuts.

    9. Maintain skin beauty

    One of the ways to treat the skin is with nutritious food. A body that gets good nutrition will have an effect on the skin. The skin will be healthier and smoother. In addition, it will look more youthful. To get that, consume healthy food. Such as vegetables, fruits and Omega-3 acids in the daily food menu.

    10. Improve brain memory

    One of the ways to maintain brain health is to eat healthy food. In addition to maintaining health, eating healthy food can also improve brain memory. Healthy foods that can be consumed are foods that contain vitamins D, E, C and Omega 3. In addition, flavonoids and polyphenols will be useful in protecting cognitive decline and dementia.

    Food that can be consumed is fish. Like tuna and milkfish. In addition, salmon is also believed to have good benefits for brain health. Not only that, catfish is also a good fish to consume.

    11. Improve sleep quality

    In addition to physical health problems, eating healthy food can also help improve sleep quality. In addition to eating healthy food, there are several things that can be avoided to get good quality sleep. Like drinks and foods that contain caffeine or alcohol.

    That is some explanation of the meaning and benefits of eating 4 healthy 5 perfect food. Although many people know the importance of eating healthy food, there are still some who ignore it. Therefore, do not forget to keep reminding to eat healthy food.

     

  • The Meaning of Kalam: History, Sources, and Its Relationship with Some Islamic Sciences

    The Meaning of Kalam: History, Sources, and Its Relationship with Some Islamic Sciences

    Meaning of Kalam – Does Reader know that the existence of kalam is one of the sciences that must be learned by Muslims? Yes, the existence of the knowledge of kalam is also as important as the knowledge of monotheism and fiqh. Although it is admitted that many people do not understand the study of the science of this pen. In fact, the existence of pen knowledge has existed since the time of the Prophet SAW, but at that time it was not yet known by such a term.

    Considering that all of us as Muslims are obliged to follow the truth of the Messengers of God, then that is why the knowledge of kalam exists. In fact, many scholars have also contributed to answering the existence of this knowledge. Then actually, what is the knowledge of the pen? What is the scope of pen knowledge? What is the history of the development of pen knowledge until now? Does the science of kalam have a relationship with other sciences, namely the science of philosophy and the science of Sufism? Well, for Reader to understand that, let’s read the following comments!

    Definition of Kalam Science

    If literally, the term “kalam” means ‘words’ or ‘conversation’. While in terms of terminology, the science of penmanship is the science that talks about the existence of Allah SWT, the attributes that must be in Him, the attributes that He does not have, the attributes that may be in Him, until the Messenger of God to determine the truth of his apostleship. If Reader each feels strange with the name of this science, it is only natural because people usually call this Science of Kalam as the Science of Monotheism.

    Definition of Kalam Science According to Experts

    Some scholars also put forward the definition of the Knowledge of Kalam, for example:

    According to Al-‘iji, the Science of Kalam is a science that provides the ability to establish Islamic religious beliefs by presenting arguments in order to eliminate existing doubts.

    According to Ibn Khaldun, Kalam is a science that contains rational arguments to defend the creed of faith and contains a rejection of the heretics (new actions without previous examples) that in the creed deviate from the wrong school of thought and ahlussunnah He also thinks that this knowledge will later contain reasons why we should defend the beliefs of the faith, of course by using the arguments of the mind and containing objections against those who deviate from the beliefs of the Salaf and AhlusSunnah.

    According to Hasbi al-Shiddieqy, the existence of the Science of Kalam or the Science of Tawheed is a science that talks about the ways of establishing religious beliefs by using convincing arguments, both naqli, aqli, and wijdani arguments.

    Well, from some experts’ opinions on what is the Knowledge of Kalam, it can be concluded that the Knowledge of Kalam or the Knowledge of Tawhid is a science that talks about how to establish the beliefs of the Islamic religion with valid evidence. These beliefs include Allah SWT (along with His attributes), messengers, revelations, the afterlife, faith, and others.

    As for why this knowledge is called the Knowledge of Kalam, because:

    • The most important question to be discussed in the first century of the Hijri is ‘does the Word of God (Al-Quran) include Qadim or Hadith?’. Therefore, the whole of science uses the name and makes it one of the most important parts of its study.
    • The basis of the Science of Kalam is the propositions of thought and the influence of these propositions is evident especially in the talks of the Mutakallimin (Islamic theologians).

    Scope

    It should be understood once again that the object of study in the Science of Kalam is indeed a bit more complicated and is even able to provoke a long debate in Islamic theological trends. Briefly, the main issues discussed in the Science of Kalam lie in 3 issues of scope, namely:

    1. Qismul Ilahiyat , that is, the sense of God’s existence and His attributes. The matters discussed are about:
    • Attributes of God. Does God really exist or not? This problem is debated by the Mu’tazilah and Ash’ariyah schools.
    • Qudrat and Iradat god. The question is debated in the Qadariyah and Jabariyah schools.
    • The question of human free will. This problem is closely related to God’s Qudrat and Iradat.
    • The problem of the Quran. What is a creature or not, and what is the original or new Al-Quran.
    1. Qismul Nububiyah , that is the relationship that cares between God and His creatures. The matters discussed are about:
    • God’s messengers who have been appointed to do certain work, namely Angels.
    • The revelation that God delivered to His Messenger both directly and through Angels.
    • The Apostles themselves received orders from God to deliver teachings to mankind.
    1. Qismul Al-Sami’yat , which is a question related to life after death. The matters discussed are about:
    • The day of human resurrection returns in the afterlife.
    • Day of reckoning.
    • Shiratal Mustaqim (bridge).
    • The question related to the place of retribution, be it heaven or hell.

    Other Names in the Science of Kalam

    The use of the term “kalam” in the Science of Kalam often makes the public feel alien to its existence. Therefore, there is another name for this Knowledge of Kalam, namely:

    1. Knowledge of Tawheed

    It is called the Science of Tawhid because it talks about the oneness of Allah SWT. According to the scholars of Ahl al-Sunnah, Tawheed is that Allah SWT is One and His essence, undivided, One in His attributes, which is eternal, unparalleled for Him, One in his actions- His, and He has no partner.

    2. Knowledge of Ushuluddin

    Named as Ilmu Ushuluddin because it discusses the principles of the Islamic religion. Not only the principles of religion, but also on the principles of religious belief with clear proofs (Al-Quran and Mutawatir hadith) as well as mental proofs.

    3. Knowledge of Aqidah or Aqa’id

    Named as Science of Aqidah or Aqa’id because it talks about Islamic beliefs. Sheikh Thahir al-Jazairi (1851-1919) also explained that the Islamic creed is the things that Muslims believe in, meaning they decide on the existing truth.

    History of Kalam

    Does Reader know that Kalam is included in the four scientific disciplines in the study of Islam? Yes, the other three are Jurisprudence, Sufism, and Philosophy. If in the Science of Fiqh it is more about the formal aspects of worship and Islamic law. Then in the Science of Sufism, we discuss more about aspects of appreciation and personal religious experience. While in Philosophy, it discusses more about things that are speculative reflections about this life.

    The early history of the emergence of Kalam is from the death of the Prophet Muhammad SAW, at which time there was a question among Muslims about who would be the successor of the Prophet (Khalifatul Rasul). This was then overcome by appointing Abu Bakar As-Shiddiq as caliph. After his death, the caliphate was led by Umar bin Khattab who at that time the Muslims seemed determined to experience expansion such as the peninsula from Arabia, Palestine, Syria, some Persian territories, to the Romans and Egypt.

    After the caliphate of Umar bin Khattab ended, Uthman bin Affan was appointed as the caliph to replace Umar. Uthman is still included in the wealthy Quraish group, his family also consists of Makkah Aristocrats who have trading experience and administrative knowledge. That knowledge was used in leading the administration in the regions outside the Arabian peninsula. But unfortunately, at that time nepotism tended to occur so that there was instability among Muslims. In fact, there were many opponents who did not agree with Uthman’s leadership, until finally he was killed by rebels from Kufa, Basrah, and Egypt.

    After Uthman died, Ali Abi Talib was selected as the next caliph candidate. However, he immediately received a challenge from other leaders who also wanted to become caliph, let’s say there were Talhah, Zubair, and Aisyah. The event is known as the Jamal War. Then, there was also a challenge that came from Muawiyah bin Abi Sufyan who at that time wanted to become caliph and demanded Ali to punish the murderers of Uthman. Due to the existence of those events, Theology emerged regarding the historical origin of the existence of the Science of Kalam.

    At the time of Prophet Muhammad SAW, the existence of the Knowledge of Kalam did exist but was not yet known by such a term. It was only known later, precisely after other Islamic sciences appeared one by one. Especially when people have talked a lot about belief in the supernatural (metaphysics). From the existence of political and historical events that happened in the past, grow the factors that caused the emergence of the Knowledge of Kalam, namely:

    Internal factors

    1. The existence of the Al-Quran in addition to inviting His people to believe in prophethood and things related to it, also alludes to the existence of groups and religions that existed in the time of the Prophet Muhammad SAW. The Qur’an does not allow their belief and opposes it with the following reasons:
    • As a group that denies religion and the existence of God, and also says that they are the ones who cause destruction and damage, as mentioned in QS Al-Jatsiyah verse 24.
    • As groups of polytheists, as mentioned in QS Al-Maidah verse 116.
    • As groups of infidels, as mentioned in QS Al-Isra’ verse 94.
    • As hypocritical groups, as mentioned in QS Ali Imran verse 154.
    1. There are passages that seem to contradict each other, so people come who collect the verses and philosophize them.

    External Factors

    1. Many of the followers of Islam, who used to be Jews, Christians, and others. After they “calmed down” from the pressure, they began to review their religious beliefs and expand them into Islam.
    2. The Muslim groups that existed in the past, especially the Mu’tazilah group, focused their attention on the broadcasting of Islam and refuted the reason that they were hostile to Islam, by knowing their beliefs as well as possible.
    3. The Mutakallimin want to balance their opponents using philosophy, so they study logic and philosophy.

    The science of Kalam is mentioned as a science that can stand on its own during the Dani Abbasid Empire, especially during the leadership of the caliph al-Makmun, which was pioneered by two Islamic figures namely Abu Hasan al-Ash’ari and al-Maturidi.

    Sources of Kalam Knowledge

    The existence of Kalam still makes the Al-Quran and Hadith as the main source of their study in an effort to explain the existence of Allah SWT, His attributes, and other issues of Islamic belief. Well, here are the sources of study from Ilm Kalam.

    1. Al-Quran

    In this holy book, there are many verses that talk about divine problems. For example in QS Al-Ikhlas verse 3-4 which means “(Allah) neither begets nor begets” “and there is nothing equal to Him” 

    2. Hadith

    In the hadiths of the Prophet Muhammad SAW, many talk about problems that are also discussed in the Science of Kalam. Among them is the Prophet’s hadith which explains the nature of faith and the division of groups, namely:

    “This hadith was narrated from ‘Abdullah bin ‘Umar. He said that the Messenger of Allah once said ‘What happened to the children of Israel will happen to my people…. The children of Israel have split into 72 groups and my community will split into 73 groups. All will go to hell, except for one group,’ ‘Who are they, O Messenger of Allah’ asked the companions. The Prophet replied, ‘They are those who follow my footsteps and my companions. (HR At-Tirmidhi)

    3. Human Thought

    Namely in the form of thoughts that are issued by Muslims and non-Muslims. Considering that Islam has used rational thoughts to explain things related to the verses in the Quran, especially those whose meaning was not clear even before Greek philosophy entered.

    The relationship between Kalam and other Islamic knowledge

    The existence of the knowledge of Kalam certainly has a relationship with other Islamic knowledge, namely in the form of:

    The relationship between Kalam and Islamic philosophy

    Many experts are of the opinion that Kalam and Islamic philosophy have a relationship, because basically Kalam also discusses divine and religious knowledge. While in Islamic philosophy discusses the intellectual proof.

    The relationship between Kalam and Sufism

    In relation to the Knowledge of Kalam, the existence of the Knowledge of Sufism has the following functions:

    • As a provider of spiritual insight in the understanding of Kalam. A deep appreciation through the heart of the Knowledge of Kalam makes it more understandable and can be applied in behavior. Therefore, the existence of Sufism can be said to be the perfecter of Kalam.
    • Functioning as a provider of spiritual awareness in the debates that exist in the Science of Kalam.

    The relationship between Kalam and Sharia

    In the Islamic religion, the existence of the knowledge of the pen is based on it being built through the Shari’a. If it is likened to, then sharia without the knowledge of Kalam is like a building hanging in the sky without any support.

    The relationship between Kalam and the Quran

    As mentioned before, the existence of Al-Quran has an inseparable connection with the Science of Kalam, because it is used as its main source. Al-Quran has a discussion about God in the form of essence, nature, asthma, actions, and demands, while Kalam will discuss about the oneness of Allah SWT.

    The relationship between the Knowledge of Kalam and the Knowledge of Ushuluddin

    In fact, the knowledge of Kalam is the popular name of the Knowledge of Ushuluddin. In Ushuluddin Science, which is also known as Theological Science (Divinity), discusses the basic principles of religion in the form of belief, monotheism, and i’tikad (belief) about the 6th pillar of Faith.

    The relationship between Kalam and Tawheed

    The science of Kalam is a science that discusses about God and bases its arguments on logic or ratio as proof against the argument of naqli or text. While Tawheed is a form of belief in God Almighty by believing in God and having no partner for Him. Therefore, Kalam and Tawhid both discuss about God.

    The relationship between Kalam and Ushul Fiqh

    According to Abu Hanifah, the existence of Fiqh is divided into two things, namely Fiqh Al-akbar and Fiqh Al-Ashgar. In Fiqh al-Akbar discusses beliefs, religious principles, and monotheism. While in Fiqh Al-Asghar discusses how to worship. Well, so the relationship between Ilm Kalam and Ushul Fiqh is both discussing belief and monotheism, especially in Fiqh Al-Akbar. In addition, both of them also use the Al-Quran and Hadith as their main sources.

    The relationship between the Knowledge of Kalam and the Knowledge of Aqidah

    Aqidah knowledge is knowledge that talks about matters related to belief in Allah SWT and His attributes of perfection. Well, in Ilmu Kalam also discusses such things.

    The relationship between Kalam and Sharia/Law

    Sharia is the whole of Islamic teachings in the form of divine norms, both governing inner behavior and concrete behavior. Well, in Ilmu Kalam also discusses this Sharia.

    Well, that’s the commentary on what Kalam is and its relationship with other Islamic sciences. Are Reader interested in learning this Science of Kalam?

    •  
  • Understanding Papers: Types, Structure, and How to Make Them

    Understanding Papers: Types, Structure, and How to Make Them

    Definition of Papers – Scientific writings are often made by academics to show the knowledge they are studying in depth in accordance with their respective fields. Almost all academics, whether they are still in school or college, know what is called a paper. The paper itself is usually used as a task to develop oneself. A paper is a scientific product written by someone. Writing a paper is not a difficult thing, but it only requires carefulness to see the situation and conditions to be used as a writing idea and also requires good writing skills based on the rules of paper writing.

    Therefore, in this article, we will explain in detail what a paper is, starting from the definition, type of paper, structure, and how to make a good and correct paper. The following is a complete explanation.

    Understanding Papers

    A paper is a scientific writing that discusses a specific topic that is included in the scope of knowledge. A paper has a systematic system that is divided into four parts, namely introduction, literature study, discussion, and conclusion or closing. In addition, a paper is one of the conditions to complete studies or education. A paper usually has a characteristic that is the result of a literature study or a report on the implementation of an activity, demonstrating an understanding of the theoretical problems being studied in the paper, showing the ability to deal with issues that come from the various sources used and demonstrating the various sources of information from the paper into one whole unit .

    The Meaning of the Paper According to the Experts

    The definition of a paper according to experts is certainly different in grammar from one to another. Even so, they all have the same meaning. The following are some definitions of paper according to experts:

    1. According to the Big Indonesian Dictionary or KBBI

    According to KBBI, the meaning of a paper is divided into 2. The first is that a paper is an official writing about something that is mainly used for publication and at conferences and is often compiled and published. The second is that papers are written works by students or students to give a report in the context of the implementation of campus or school tasks.

    2. WJS Poerwadarminta

    According to him, the meaning of a paper is a written description that discusses a specific problem from which further discussion and explanation is obtained.

    3. Cape and Ardial

    According to Tanjung and Ardial, a paper is a written work that contains a problem written systematically and through logical and objective analytical thinking.

    4. Panuti Sudjiman

    According to him, a paper is a prose essay that is not fictional and discusses a specific topic. In the sense of a paper, it will generally be published in magazines and newspapers or it can also be in the form of an anthology book.

    Based on the meaning mentioned above, we can conclude that a paper is a formal scientific work with a specific discussion topic. The conditions for a written work to be called a paper are if it is based on one’s own thinking, is not plagiarized, has never been published before, and contains contemporary elements. For example, it contains a topic that is being hotly discussed by the public and the most important thing is that it is scientific.

    Types of Papers

    The following are the types of papers based on the type of study, among others:

    1. Deductive Papers

    A deductive paper is a paper based on a theoretical study which is relevant to the problem being discussed.

    2. Inductive Papers

    An inductive paper is a type of paper written based on empirical data that is objective in nature based on what is obtained from the field but remains relevant to the discussion.

    3. Mixed Papers

    A mixed paper is a type of paper that is compiled or written based on theoretical studies as well as empirical data. That means, this mixed paper is a combination of deductive and inductive papers. In the mixed paper, there are six categories based on the subject of the problem formulation discussed, namely:

    a. Scientific Papers

    Scientific papers are basically used for written works resulting from scientific studies that contain problems and discussions. You should note that if viewed in terms of principles and scientific procedures, a scientific paper will resemble a simple research report. Where scientific papers are generally written as a scientific problem solving suggestion. Certainly, the writer of a scientific paper will also need library studies and that is seen in the attached revision.

    b. Working Papers

    The working paper will usually be read at the working paper seminar. Where it will be delivered in the form of argumentation in a research result. In the work paper that is read there should be a problem that is presented. The presenter of the working paper has included assumptions and also hypotheses to answer the problem. Based on the content of such a paper, a discussion will arise.

    c. Research Papers

    A research paper is one of the terms used for scientific writings in the form of suggestions for solving a controversial problem without the intention of being read in a seminar.

    d. Position Papers

    A position paper is a paper prepared at the request of a party that serves as an alternative solution to a controversial problem. As for the procedure used as a discussion and writing is done scientifically.

    e. Analysis Papers

    Analytical papers are a type of empirically objective paper. As for the source of data obtained based on experience gained from discoveries, experiments, and also observations that have been made.

    f. Response Papers

    A response paper is a paper that is often used as a course assignment for students that contains a reaction to a reading.

    Paper Structure

    The structure of the paper consists of cover, introduction, table of contents, introduction, discussion, conclusion, and bibliography. The explanation of the structure of the paper is as follows:

    1. Cover

    Cover is the front page of a paper. Where the paper cover contains important information. Usually, an example of a paper cover contains the author’s name written in full, the logo of the institution or institution, the place and also the year of publication. The following are some examples of paper cover examples in universities:

    – Title of the paper.
    – Author’s name accompanied by NIM.
    – The name of the apologist lecturer.
    – Campus logo.
    – Name of major.
    – Faculty name.
    – University name
    – Year and place

    The writing on the cover page of the paper should be in accordance with the applicable format. An example of a paper cover with the title “The Influence of Education on the Character of the Nation”. In the sample cover of the paper, the title should use capital letters and be printed in bold. For the font on the cover title of the paper can be larger than other writing which is generally only size 14. So that the reader will find it easier and more focused to read the title of your paper.

    2. Introduction

    The introduction is not only found in the structure of the paper, but in almost all scientific works. Where this preface is an opening greeting from the author intended for the reader. The writing of the introduction is written before the writing of the table of contents of the paper. Generally, this introduction is written to provide information about anyone who has played a role and also contributed to the creation of the author’s paper, thanks, explains the main structure of the paper, and the basic thinking of creating the title and its purpose in outline.

    At the end of the introductory paragraph, you can add the hope and also the benefits of writing the paper to the readers. This preface is then closed with the date of manufacture and the author’s signature accompanied by a clear name.

    3. Paper Table of Contents

    The table of contents of the paper usually contains page information from each chapter and sub-chapter of the paper. Therefore, the table of contents of the paper is important and should be there. The function of the table of contents is to make it easier for readers to find the material they want to read. In addition to containing page numbers and chapter or subchapter titles, the table of contents also contains a list of pictures and a list of tables if any. The table of contents of the paper must be well organized, complete, and correct by arranging it in order, ie from the smallest to the largest page number. If the paper requires an appendix that supports the content of the paper, then the appendix can be included in the table of contents of the paper called the table of appendices.

    4. Chapter I Introduction

    In the structure of this paper is the main part of the paper that explains the problem to be discussed. Where in the introductory chapter it will be further divided into three important points that become sub-chapters, namely background, problem formulation, and also the purpose of writing.

    5. Chapter II Discussion

    In this section it is also included in the structure of the paper which is the description of the main topic in the writing. This happened because chapter II contains a discussion about research methods, research targets, and an explanation of the research results that have been obtained, either qualitatively or quantitatively. For qualitative papers, the discussion contains more theoretical studies that are discussed using one’s own language, instead of copying results from other sources. Qualitative paper data can be obtained from interview methods and other methods that support the discussion. So that it is exclusive and different from other papers.

    The composition between theoretical study and discussion should have more discussion compared to the theory, ie with a minimum ratio of 1:2. When quoting from the theory in the discussion, then the source must be included. It is important to show that the information obtained from the paper is authentic and not random. If the data is quantitative, then it can be discussed by making a table that contains numbers so that it is easy for readers to understand. A graph or diagram can also be made to show the increase or decrease of data with certain variables. So that it is easy to see and understand. Then the data that has been processed is discussed to answer the problem posed. From the discussion, theoretical foundations, theoretical comments that can be in the form of support or refutation of previous studies, are obtained.

    6. Chapter III Closing

    The last structure of the paper is the conclusion which consists of conclusions and suggestions. The conclusion is the meaning given by the writer from the discussion he has made. The characteristics of the conclusion in the paper are:

    – Contains a comprehensive meaning from the content of the discussion
    – The conclusion is not a summary of the content, but the answer to the problem discussed
    – Must be in accordance with the purpose and also the formulation of the problem
    – Can explain whether the answer to the problem is in accordance with the hypothesis
    – Written briefly and clearly
    – Can be written using point format

    The subchapter in the next cover is a suggestion. Suggestions are input from the author and tend to be aimed at the reader. For readers, the purpose of this suggestion is expected so that readers can apply it theoretically or practically in society. The suggestion is obtained from the content and conclusion of the paper to be developed, followed up on, and various things that need to be observed by further researchers. In addition, suggestions can also be used for policy makers or institutions related to research to be able to correct when something is not in accordance with the rules.

    7. Register Library

    The bibliography is the final part of the paper which serves to provide information about the sources that are used as a reference in the paper, especially in Chapter II of the discussion. The bibliography page is also included in the table of contents of the paper so that the reader can understand its location. The order of writing the bibliography should be alphabetical.

    Usually, the writing style starts from the author’s name written in reverse. Then followed by the year of publication and the title of the book whose first word is written using capital letters, then followed by the place of publication, and the name of the publisher. With the bibliography, it will provide information that the paper is written based on logical reasoning and scientific theory as explained by experts in books, websites, scientific journals, and others.

    How to Make Papers

    Here are some steps you can take to write a paper, among others:

    1. Choosing the Right Theme

    Theme is one of the important things that should be in a scientific work. Where the theme of the paper needs to be thought about in depth so that the paper made can be useful for others. The theme used in the paper is generally related to the writer’s academics. After finding a theme, write down ideas related to the theme.

    2. Formulating Purpose

    The next step in making a paper is by formulating the purpose. Once you have determined the appropriate theme, then the next step is to find the purpose of why you are writing the paper. Is it for education or for what?

    3 Determining the Limits and Title of the Paper

    The function of the paper’s limitations is to make the paper more specific and in-depth about the theme you will study. As for the title of the paper, it is made by involving variables that are the topic of discussion. So that readers can know the outline of the paper you wrote.

    4. Collecting References

    The way to make the next paper is to collect various kinds of supporting data or literature studies related to the title of the paper you will make. Steps to gather references can be done by making notes containing small summaries and writing quotes and even words that are difficult to learn.

    5. Developing the Paper Framework

    After searching for literature that produces a framework of thought. Therefore, the way to make the next paper is to develop ideas and ideas broadly and contextually from the framework of the paper based on the structure of the paper which is the basis for its preparation.

    That’s an explanation of what a paper is and various things in it. Starting from the meaning, type, structure, and how to make it. Hopefully useful.

     

  • Understanding Majas: Functions, Kinds, and Examples

    Understanding Majas: Functions, Kinds, and Examples

    Meaning of Majas – Who doesn’t know about Majas? Maybe the meaning of majas and all kinds of things are more familiar among students. Because, they are the ones who still get lessons and assignments to write poetry using majas. However, do you know that we often find the use of majas in everyday life? Even without us realizing it, we also often use majas in communicating with other people.

    In general, the use of majas in everyday life is often used in conversations with people who are close enough. Although it is often used in everyday conversation, many of us are still not aware that sometimes we use majas in our conversation. What’s more, there are many kinds of majas in Indonesian.

    In this article, the author will explain the meaning of majas and its various types. In addition, the writer will also explain the functions and examples of majas in Indonesia and their meaning.

    Meaning of Majas According to Experts

    Before discussing majas too deeply, it is important for us to know the meaning of majas according to experts. Of course they will have differences of opinion about the meaning of majas. For that, let’s look at the explanation of the meaning of majas from the experts.

    1. Dale and Warriner

    According to Dale and also Warriner, the meaning of majas is a metaphor that can affect many effects. The influence they mean is influence that can be done by comparing and introducing in general. Majas is generally used in short sentences. But despite that, majas has a value and also a taste that can give birth to certain connotations. In addition, majas is also often referred to as an imaginative word.

    2. Craft

    The meaning of majas according to Keraf (1988) is the effort of someone who represents his thoughts by using special language. Where the language can show the person’s personality. Keraf also said that there are three elements in language so that it is better impressed. These elements include, among others, honesty, politeness, and attractiveness.

    3. Moeliono

    Majas according to Moeliono are distinguished based on their style. Where it aims to animate an essay. Majas is also referred to as a denotation used to express a word that is moved. Not only that, majas is also often used to awaken the reader’s senses.

    4. Ratna

    Meanwhile, Ratna (2009) revealed that majas has a purpose which is to create an aspect of beauty in a literary work. However, the beauty of style in a language in literary works is a key element. Because, literary works can be used as a genre produced from human civilization and formed due to the activity and creativity of an author.

    5. Aminudin

    According to Aminudin (1995), majas is one of the language styles used as a technique in stringing together a sentence. Where later the structured sentences can be used to explain or describe ideas in accordance with existing ideas and norms. He also said that majas is presented as a classical rhetorical insight that is evaluated as a birth ornament.

    While the Javanese tradition considers the opposite, where majas is a type of rinengga language or the use of language arranged to be beautiful. But as time goes by, majas is no longer used just to be fashionable, but has a wider provision of songs. Where majas can provide awareness for its connoisseurs.

    6. Nurgiyantoro

    While Nurgiyantoro thinks that majas is a style of language that has its own way in its application. For example, the language in a prose, where majas is used to convey an idea and also the writer’s thoughts.

    7. Pradopo

    Almost the same as other opinions, Pradopo evaluates majas as a language that has a specific way of using it. Where the method aims to obtain certain effects in literary works. One of the ways is to include majas.

    8. Kridalaksana

    More specifically, Kridalaksana (2001) revealed that language style can be used to take advantage of the wealth of language that a person possesses in speaking or writing literary works. In addition, majas can also be used for certain things in order to get certain effects as well. Kridalaksana also says that the characteristics of majas in general have language characteristics of a group of literary writers.

    From the explanation of the meaning of majas above, we can conclude that the meaning of majas is a style of language that can be used to influence or convince the readers or listeners. That means, majas can be used both in written and oral form.

    Majas function

    After understanding the meaning of majas, now it’s time to learn about the function of majas itself. Here are some explanations about the functions of majas that you can learn.

    1. Build a Fun

    One of the functions of majas is to build a pleasure. When we use majas, then words that are generally ordinary will become more beautiful and interesting and more effective. That means, there is a sentimental value in every sentence that uses majas in it.

    When words, sentences, and even an essay are intended for other people specifically or may be intended for readers. So majas will create its own sense of pleasure compared to ordinary sentences. Of course, happiness here has various forms. It depends on the person receiving it.

    2. Creating an Imagination

    In addition to building pleasure, majas also serves to create an imagination. Because, majas is able to encourage someone to give birth to imagination. The presence of majas in a written work does have a meaning that can be interpreted differently from one person to another. The meaning of majas can vary depending on the person’s way of thinking, knowledge, and insight.

    Of course it will affect the quality of imagination or the formation of the perspective of the readers or connoisseurs. Not only that, majas also has the function of bringing the reader and the writer closer together.

    3. Bringing the Reader closer to the Author

    As already mentioned above, majas can also be used to bring the reader and the author closer emotionally. Why is that so? Because, there are so many different kinds of majas. Where from the large number of majas there is more and more giving pressure to more essential values.

    4. Essential

    Something that has an essential value will be deeply impressed. For example, when there is a sentence written using two different techniques. A sentence is written with general words and what they are. Then the second sentence is written using majas. Of course, sentences that have meaning will be more different and more meaningful.

    5. Increase Readers’ Attraction to Literary Works

    If you pay close attention, the presence of majas is actually intended to attract the attention of literary connoisseurs. Where the use of majas can increase the value in a literary work. Then majas can also give spirit to the work. Also helps in explaining the meaning and description of the writer.

    6. Creating a Suggestive

    One of the functions of majas is to create a suggestion from the writer to the reader. In addition, majas can also create dense, rich, interesting and effective information effects for readers. So that the readers will feel entertained and still get information from the literary work.

    All kinds of Majas

    Majas is divided into several types, within one type of majas it may still be differentiated into several other types. Well, this time we will tell you, what kind of majas there are. Let’s watch until the end!

    1. Comparative Law

    Comparative clauses are one of the types of clauses that function as comparative sentences. Well, the comparison majas itself has many more types. Here are some comparisons.

    a. Allegory

    This word is usually used in writing stories by using the method of making figurative sentences. This majas can be made as a sentence or can also be made a full paragraph.

    b. Allusions

    Majas allusion is often used as a sentence that can refer to a legend, event, metaphor, proverb or figure. This majas has a shortcoming which is often considered incomplete because it is quickly impressed.

    c. Simile

    Majas is usually used to compare things that are different but have a similar meaning. This majas can double as two majas at once, namely the comparison and parable majas.

    d. Metaphor

    Language Style This majas uses a direct comparative language style, this majas is used to compare comparisons both physically, properties, things and ideas.

    e. Synesthesia

    Using a style of language that has changed meaning due to the exchange of responses. This majas functions as the soul of a literary work.

    f. Litotes

    Language style that functions as a display of ideas about something that is considered strong and big. This Majas usually uses sentences that are not very strong, to mean polite.

    g. Hyperbole

    Shaped as an exaggerated figure with a specific purpose.
    Those are some types of comparisons, actually there are still other types of comparisons.

    2. Confirmation Authority

    Is one of the majas used to emphasize something, with the aim of increasing the level of understanding and impact of the readers or listeners. There are several types of affirming majas, such as pleonasm majas and repetition majas. Majas pleonasm itself has a definition as a majas that uses a language style that has characteristics as a marker that there are some words that must be repeated.

    Then for repetition is a majas that uses a language style that is useful to show the repetition of the whole word from the word made by the writer. The repetition can be in the form of words, clauses, phrases and even sentences.

    There are several types of majas that are still the same as affirming majas, such as:

    • Pararima
    • Apophasis
    • Alliteration
    • Parallelism
    • And so on.

    3. Dispute Resolution

    Opposition majas become majas that are used quite often. There are several types of opposition, such as:

    a. Paradox

    Majas paradox can be simplified into an opinion that has a conflict with the general opinion or the opinion believed by many people. Majas paradox has signs, such as the sentence is strange and considered unexpected. Majas paradox has a key, which is to be clever in hiding the truth.

    b. Antithesis

    Majas which generally uses two words, functions as an opposition between two ideas.

    • Oxymoron
    • Anachronism
    • Interminous contradictions

    4. Majas Sidran

    Sarcasm is used to allude to something with a specific purpose. Here are all kinds of sarcasm that we can present for you.

    a. Irony

    Majas sarcasm characteristically hides the truth and says the opposite of the fact. This Majas has a characteristic as if it raises something, then drops it.

    b. Sarcasm

    Satire uses words and even harsh sentences to hurt other people’s feelings, usually in the form of rude mockery or ridicule.

    c. Cynicism

    This majas will be expressed directly to the person with negative words. The majas of cynicism can be the opposite of the majas of irony.

    d. Satire

    Majas uses expressions that contain the meaning of sarcasm, irony and parody that serve to threaten and laugh at something.

    Majas examples

    Actually, from the various types of majas that have been mentioned above, there are still many more majas that have not yet been explored. so that it can be a picture or a concrete example of majas, here are 50 examples of majas.

    Majas Repetition

    Example:
    Suppose a rose blooms, you are the fragrant flower in my heart and mind.
    Like the ocean, you are the owner of wider knowledge

    Majas Epifora

    Example:
    If you forbid, I will not come.
    When I have time, then I will come on time

    Majas Pararima

    Example:
    Two days ago I used to deliver. Oh no, just yesterday.
    We mean to go to Pak RT’s house, want to organize a takbir keliling event, meaning to ask for permission to organize takbir keliling.

    Majas Alliteration

    Example:
    Satisfying the soul, captivating the
    body

    Majas Assonansi

    Example:
    Everyone is pressing on
    Harum’s chest as a secret flower

    Majas Simile

    Example:
    Like water on a taro leaf
    Like water with oil
    Lighting a spirit like a candle that never goes out The
    mother and child’s faces are like betel nuts split in two
    The woman is very beautiful, her eyes are like bright stars

    Majas Metaphor

    Example:
    Brian is a land crocodile
    Lazy to read so
    the night goddess shrimp brain is out of his contest

    Majas Personification

    Example:
    I miss talking to an old weed that is about to die
    Insects lament the increasingly selfish behavior of humans, even nature howls unable to advise the apathetic attitude of humans.
    Waving, bathing on the beach
    Not all romances will lead to marriage

    Depersonalization Majas

    Example:
    If you are the moon, then I am the star.
    If you are the envelope, then I will be the stamp.
    If I am a flower, then you are a beetle.

    Majas Alusio

    Example:
    Bandung is known as the Paris of Java.
    Yogyakarta is famous as a miniature of Indonesia.

    Majas Antithesis

    Example:
    My success in winning the race made him sad.
    Seeing that I failed to apply for a job made Ardi happy.
    Even though he tried and fought, he still failed.

    Majas Pleonasm

    Example:
    Rian went downstairs. It came down.

    Majas Euphemism

    Example:
    I often hear of female friends who sell themselves.

    Majas Synecdoche Pars Pro Toto

    Example:
    Campaign attributes are not carried

    Majas Synecdoche Totem Pro Parte

    Example:
    For students, generation Z and millennial children understand technology, especially social media.

    Majas Hyperbola

    Example:
    My love for you is as wide as an ocean that cannot be touched by humans.
    The divorce that happened to Rini’s parents made it seem as if their world had come to an end.

    Majas Litotes

    Example:
    I’m sorry if we only serve cold tea and village cakes.
    Sorry if I think for a long time, because my brain is squatting.

    Majas Metonymy

    Example:
    Ardi is confused about whether to buy an Avanza or an Ertiga.

    Majas Cynicism

    Example:
    Your words that always lie make me nauseous.
    I don’t want to see the hypocrisy of your attitude.

    Majas Sarcasm

    Example:
    Your appearance does not attract the lust of boys.
    No repentance, your habit of stealing is known to the whole world.

    Majas Anaphora

    Example:
    The sound is boring, the sound is deafening, the sound is hitting

    Majas Symmetry

    Example:
    Father is silent and mother does not like to speak when seeing Endru’s attitude.
    My sister hates Aryani’s behavior.

    Majas Climax

    Example:
    Everyone from children, teenagers, to adults like to watch ’tilik’ movies

    Majas Rhetorik

    Example:
    Where is there a person who does not want to succeed?
    Does salt taste salty?

    Interruption Majas

    Example:
    I, the people who have worked here for ten years, have never been promoted.

    Those are some explanations about the meaning of majas and its various types. Not only are they diverse, majas also have functions that are interesting enough to learn more about. Are you interested in learning slang and using it in everyday conversation?

     

  • The Meaning of Magazines – Functions, Criteria, and Complete Types

    The Meaning of Magazines – Functions, Criteria, and Complete Types

    Definition of Magazines – Since colonial times, the presence of mass media has played an important role in the independence process of Indonesia. Although at that time, the mass media was limited to two sheets of paper with several writings on them, but the written content contained great meaning and information.

    As time progresses, so does the mass media that circulates. Currently, mass media is divided into three forms, namely print mass media, electronic mass media, and online mass media .

    Print mass media is usually published daily, weekly, biweekly, or even monthly. Then, this electronic mass media usually takes the form of electronic devices such as radio and television to spread information. Meanwhile, this online mass media consists of telephone satellites and internet networks.

    According to Reader , the existence of magazines is included in which mass media ?

    If Reader doesn’t understand what a magazine is , let’s read the following explanation regarding the meaning of a magazine along with its functions, criteria, and various types!

    Meaning of Magazine

    According to Soeatminah (1987), the definition of a magazine is a periodical publication that contains articles and publications for an unlimited time and has a serial number.

    Well, based on the expert’s opinion, it can be concluded that the meaning of magazine is “mass media that is published periodically and contains informational articles in accordance with the relevant field in the magazine.”

    The existence of this magazine appeared not long after the newspaper appeared. In Indonesia, the existence of magazines has a long history and is divided into four periods, namely at the beginning of independence, the old order period, the new order period, and the reformation period.

    Magazines are usually published with a predetermined target or audience. That is, the editors have determined from the beginning who will be the readers, whether children, teenagers, adult women, adult men, or even general readers.

    However, the target reader is not only based on age and gender, but can also be based on profession. For example, readers as businessmen or farmers.

    Magazine Functions

    A magazine has different functions from other magazines. It depends on the information contained in it.

    For example, news magazines such as Tempo have a function as an informational media that contains domestic and foreign events, as well as an entertainment function.

    It’s different with the adult women’s magazine Femina . In the adult women’s magazine Femina, the articles contained in it are about various information and tips about feminine issues, so that they function more to educate and entertain.

    Then, there is also the Trubus agricultural media , whose main function is to provide education and guidance on how to cultivate crops, making it an informational function.

    However, in general, magazines have many functions other than those previously exemplified. According to the thesis written by Devita Permatasari with the title LKP: Pembutan Desain and Page Layout in Zigma Magazine , a magazine has 2 functions seen from different points of view, namely the function for the publisher and the function for the reader.

    1. Magazine Functions For Publishers

    • Magazines as organizational learning media
    • Magazines as communication media
    • Magazines as promotional media (with product advertisements contained in them)
    • Magazines as a medium for channeling talent in the field of writing
    • Magazines as a means of investment

    2. Magazine Functions For Readers

    • Magazine as a source of information
    • Magazines as communication media
    • Magazines as channels for everyone’s aspirations (with a special column to publish the aspirations of each person who sends them to the editors)
    • Magazines as seeds of democracy
    • Magazines as promotional media
    • Magazine as a media for learning based on reading and writing
    • Magazines as a medium for channeling talent in the field of writing
    • Magazine as an increase in creativity
    • Magazines as entertainment

    Good Magazine Criteria

    What are the things that make a magazine called a good magazine? Does a good magazine have to contain the latest information?

    Just like teaching materials, a magazine must also have accurate readability so that readers can understand the information contained in it. The criteria of a good magazine can be seen from various aspects, namely in terms of segmentation, function, cover , layout , color, selection of typefaces (font), selection of rubrics, illustrations and pictures, size, and layout composition.

    1. Segmentation

    • The magazine’s target market mission must be in line with its readers.
    • The name of the magazine should be suitable for its target readers.
    • The content of the magazine rubric should be suitable for the target readers.

    2. Functions

    • When the reader reads the articles contained in the magazine, the reader finds it easy to read and get benefits and inspiration in his life.
    • Readers can feel the benefits directly after reading the magazine.

    3. Cover

    • Show the identity of the magazine in accordance with the mission that has been set in advance by the editors.
    • Can attract the attention of potential readers to want to read it.
    • Communicative and informative.
    • The illustrations used correspond to the theme of the magazine.

    4. Layout

    • Not monotonous
    • Has its own groove
    • Easy to read and understand

    5. Color

    • Not too flashy
    • Does not make the eyes tired quickly
    • The use of color should match the segmentation and theme of the magazine rubric

    6. Font Type

    • Must use a font that is easy to read

    7. Selection of Rubrics

    • The content of the rubric should match the name of the magazine
    • The rubric should be able to attract the attention of the reader
    • Each rubric must have at least 1 illustration or picture

    8. Illustrations or Pictures

    • Illustrations should fit the theme of the magazine
    • The illustration does not offend SARA
    • Illustrations should be easy to understand
    • The image must have a high resolution to be seen clearly

    9. Magazine Size

    • The size of the magazine should not be too big and not too small, usually using A4, Letter, B5, or F4 size
    • Easy to carry and does not break quickly.

    Types of Magazines

    1. Scientific Magazine

    Is Reader just now aware of the existence of a scientific magazine?

    The definition of a scientific magazine is the same as a magazine in general, only the content is different. In scientific magazines, it usually contains the most up-to-date sources of information, be it about discoveries or new theories and developments in science.

    In a scientific magazine, it is usually managed and published specifically by scientific institutions, universities, and professional organizations.

    2. Children’s Magazine

    Definition of Children’s magazine is a mass media that is published periodically and contains general knowledge with the target audience being children. This children’s magazine can also be used as a learning medium because it contains many pictures and illustrations so children tend not to get bored.

    Examples from children’s magazines are Bobo and Mombi .

    In addition, children’s magazines can also indirectly give children intelligence because they contain a lot of reading that can develop skills, knowledge, and creativity in children.

    The existence of children’s magazines is considered to have many benefits in the same way as other mass media. The benefits of children’s magazines are:

    • Can develop children’s imagination

    Through reading and illustrations contained in it. In addition, in children’s magazines there is usually a special rubric that invites children to cut, color, and do other creative activities to develop their imagination.

    • Get information and insight

    The information and insights contained in children’s magazines are certainly general matters. In fact, sometimes the information and insight is not necessarily known to all adults 

    • Improve harmony between children and parents

    Usually, in a children’s magazine there is a special section that contains fairy tales, short stories, and cergam (picture stories).

    As a parent, of course you can read the stories contained in the child’s magazine. Of course, it can add harmony to the relationship between children and parents. In addition, the child’s focus in listening to his parents tell a story turns out to be good for his brain development 

    3. General Magazine

    In general magazines, there are usually no specific topics discussed in them. The information contained is information of a specific nature and there is no specific segment.

    4. Religious Magazine

    This type of magazine usually contains religious articles. Although the readership of this type of magazine is quite limited because not everyone can read it, but it turns out to be very popular 

    5. Men’s Magazine

    This men’s magazine will contain articles related to hobbies, sex, men’s outfits, gym tips , automotive, and others. His writing style is more simple and direct to the point

    6. Women’s Magazine

    The women’s magazine will contain articles about women’s lifestyles, food recipes, gossip, gossip columns, make-up tips , inspirational stories, and others.

    Well, that’s the meaning of magazines and some things about magazines. Does Reader still subscribe to favorite magazines? If so, don’t forget to always keep it because it contains a lot of valuable information and knowledge…

  • The Meaning of Course Play: Types, Examples, and How to Process It

    The Meaning of Course Play: Types, Examples, and How to Process It

    Main Course Is – The term Main Course is often seen when visiting a star restaurant, Reader. Usually available at lunch and dinner.

    The use of the term Main Course comes from the culture or habit of Western people who enjoy various foods. However, you should pay attention to the order of the dishes in order to enjoy the taste to the maximum.

    This habit is often referred to as Full Course Meal or food with a complete menu. During the series of full courses , Reader will enjoy various menus. A Full Course Meal usually starts with an appetizer before the main course, such as soup or amuse-bouche , followed by the main course and ending with sweets, coffee, and tea.

    Main Course is one of three classifications of food based on the order in which it is presented.

    Main Course is one of the main dishes that are usually served after the appetizer . Main Course is also commonly referred to as “main dish” or “groce piece”.

    This Main Course is usually served in a much larger portion than the appetizer portion because it consists of many ingredients both at lunch and dinner .

    For its own type, there are various types such as Indonesian main course, continental, oriental, Japanese, western. In the world of food and drink, we are no stranger to this classification. Here is a further explanation about the main course, see the explanation.

    Definition of Play Course

    Main Course is a main course or main meal with a set menu that is served at lunch or dinner in a larger portion than the appetizer.

    Some staple ingredients in this cuisine often use meat, fish or poultry. Vegetarians use ingredients that look like meat or synthetic meat made from vegetable gluten.

    Main Course is usually served with a sauce that suits the type of food. This sauce can be served directly on the food or served by itself using a gravy boat (saus boat = boat shape).

    The type of sauce served can be divided into white sauce, chocolate sauce, oil sauce or sauce. The main course is always accompanied by side dishes in the form of side dishes consisting of various vegetables and potatoes or other carbohydrate sources such as pasta, noodles, rice or other root vegetables.

    The dishes that can be served as Main Course are very diverse. Starting from salad dishes, soup dishes, egg dishes, cheese dishes, pasta and vegetable dishes, fish and shellfish dishes, poultry and chicken dishes, beef dishes, pork dishes, and others.

    Course Play Features

    Main Course features are as follows:

    • The portion for the ala d’hôte menu is 175–200 gr and 200–250 gr for the a la carte menu
    • From the selection of ingredients, the Main Course is usually made from food ingredients that contain animal ingredients. proteins such as beef, poultry and seafood
    • As a dish, the main course or main course is usually served on a dinner plate.
    • Including animal side dishes, vegetables and carbohydrates, the amount of Main Course ingredients is around 350-375 grams (side dishes 175-225 grams, carbohydrates 75 grams, vegetables 75 grams)
    • Main Course is varied with many variations available.
    • Do not use the same ingredients or colors in each menu
    • Main Course should be separate without appetizer or dessert. Therefore, the Main Course menu should meet the nutritional needs of the body.

    Main Course Compilation Materials

    Main Course usually consists of several spices such as:

    • Animal side dishes such as fish (tuna, snapper, mackerel, catfish), poultry (turkey, chicken, duck, etc.) quail and seafood (octopus, squid, lobster, shrimp, crab) are prepared with various spices and served with a lot of sauce (175-225 grams)
    • Carbohydrates used are usually rice, potatoes, various noodles and pasta that are processed in various ways or can be in the form of bread in a 75 gram portion.
    • The vegetables used are generally cauliflower, broccoli, chickpeas, radishes, asparagus, mustard in a 75 gram portion.

    So all the spices are on the dinner plate like the Main Course . The combination of carbohydrates, vegetables and complements should match the aroma, color and taste in order to stimulate the appetite.

    Types of Course Play

    Based on the Processing Technique

    • Deep Frying: Chicken maryland, Chicken Cordon bleu.
    • Grilling: Beef Steak, Chicken Steak, German Steak.
    • Roasting: Roast Beef

    Based on the Type of Basic Material

    Egg Dishes : It is a dish whose main source of protein comes from various types of poultry eggs and fish eggs (caviar). For example: Scrambled egg, omelette, scotch egg, etc.

    Pasta : Processed food used in Italian cuisine, made from a combination of flour, water, eggs and salt to form pasta that can be made into various types, sizes and shapes. Examples of pasta serving: Spaghetti bolognese, Fettuccine Carbonara, Macaroni and cheese and others.

    Fish Dishes (Fish Dishes) : As a dish based on fish, both freshwater fish and saltwater fish, this dish is chosen by many people because of its very high nutritional content. Examples: Meuniere Fish Fillet, Spanish Naked Fish and others.

    Seafood Dishes : As a dish made from various types of fishing and sea farming, the most commonly used ingredients are lobster, shrimp, squid, clams, and octopus. Examples of cuisine: Moules la Marinière, Lobster Fireplace, Shrimp Stew, and others.

    Meat Dishes : This dish is considered different from the poultry category. What differentiates cooking from poultry is that the meat comes from red meat animals. Meat from this post includes beef, lamb, camel and pork, old or young.

    Other countries or regions can use other meat as a base ingredient for their Main Course, such as horse meat, rabbit meat, deer meat, etc.

    How to Play Course Processing

    To serve the Main Course , some common food processing preparation techniques are used. This is of course to see what food ingredients will be prepared and cooked. Main Course processing techniques include:

    1. Deep Frying Technique

    This technique is commonly used because we only need to dip food into hot oil with a temperature between 176 and 190 degrees Celsius. quickly cooked, such as fried fish fillets.

    2. Boiling Technique

    In addition to frying, Main Course can also be boiled in boiling water. Food is usually boiled with coconut milk, chicken broth or other spicy liquid.

    3. Roasting technique

    The roasting technique is a way of cooking food in an oven at a temperature of 150 degrees Celsius by only using oil or fat from the food itself.

    Examples of dishes prepared with this technique are grandma’s grilled chicken, grilled beef with dabu-dabu sauce, and many more.

    4. Braising technique

    Simply put, the preparation of the main dish can also be done by boiling the food for a certain time until soft. Foods that are usually prepared with this technique are stew, rendang, boiled tofu, etc.

     

    5. Sauteing technique

    The sauteing technique is a technique of frying Main Course food with only a little oil. Of course this is the opposite of deep frying which uses a lot of oil.

    Cooking equipment used in this technique such as frying pans or frying pans, frying pans can also be used. Commonly prepared meals

    by the way is Gordon Blue Schnitzel, Black Paper Steak, or Chicken Stir-Fry.

    Example of Main Course Menu

    There are many examples of Main Course menus that are famous in the world, both menus from Indonesia, Western, Continental, Eastern and other countries that we often see such as:

    1. Foire Gras

    Foire Gras est is a typical French dish that has been a favorite of many people since the Middle Ages. This dish is made from foie gras base material that is processed in various ways starting from boiling, grilling, or frying.

    Foie Gras has a delicious and unique taste. From the first bite, you will taste the sweetness like butter but more concentrated. Although tasty, this main dish is quite expensive.

    2. Chicken Parmigiana

    Chicken Parmigiana is a prepared chicken dish that is coated in breadcrumbs and served with a Napoli sauce made of cheese and tomatoes. This dish originates from Australia and is often served with side dishes such as salad and potatoes. Chicken Parmigiana has a rich and delicious Italian taste, used as a family dinner.

    3. Lasagna

    Lasagna is a special and first food in Italy, a pasta dish consisting of layers of lasagna served with sauce and other ingredients.

    While in other places, this lasagna is made with cheese or ricotta, tomato sauce, mozzarella cheese and various meats (chicken, beef, pork), vegetables (mushrooms, zucchini), spinach and prepared with onions, garlic, oregano, then grilled.

    4. Tortellini

    Tortellini is a typical Italian dish shaped like a navel, made from a mixture of grilled meat and cheese. Tortellini food is served in a thick sauce. In another version, Tortellini can also be stored in the refrigerator for less than 7 weeks, so if you want to eat it, just reheat it in the microwave.

    5. Pizza

    Pizza is a type of baguette with various fillings such as chicken, meat, etc. with ketchup, cheese and grill or grill for a few minutes. This pizza was invented in Naples, Italy and has become a popular dish all over the world.

    6. Spaghetti

    Spaghetti is an Italian staple food made from fine flour with a thin and dense cylinder like pasta.

    In the beginning, this spaghetti size was very long, but in the middle of the 20th century, the shorter size became much more popular and was widely used by the local population. The size is around 25 to 30 cm with different variations.

    In its presentation, spaghetti is often mixed with tomato sauce, meat, olive oil and vegetables. But for cheese lovers can add types of cheese such as parmesan, pecorino or grana padano.

    7. Beed Bourguignon

    Beed Bourguignon is a beef stew in red wine with a blend of selected spices. Usually the meat used is tenderloin so that it is soft and not greasy.

    8. Tortillas

    Tortillas are light flat breads made with wheat or corn. So, in general, this tortilla will be eaten with a variety of sauces, meat, vegetables and nuts. For Spaniards, this tortilla must be brought to accompany their meal.

    9. Rendang

    Rendang is a typical Indonesian dish made from processed meat that is boiled for a very long time to get a very soft texture with a favorite spice.

    This dish is known as the best dish in the world, and of course because the cooking process requires spices and time.

    10. Gudeg

    Gudeg is a special food of Jogja made from young jackfruit boiled with coconut milk until it turns brown. Usually this gudeg is served with hot rice accompanied by fried chicken, tempeh, egg, and fried sambal krecek.

    11. Uduk rice

    Nasi uduk is a dish made from thinly sliced ​​white rice and steamed with grated coconut milk. Then season with nutmeg, cinnamon, ginger, lemongrass and pepper.

    This food is then served with fried dumplings, fried tofu, omelet/egg slices, abon, dried tempeh, fried onions, fried chicken, cucumber and peanut sauce. This food is usually sold in the morning for breakfast.

    12. Stew

    Semur is stewed meat from Indonesia that is boiled in a dark brown sauce made from sweet soy sauce, shallots, onions, nutmeg and cloves.

    There are many types of stew, including meat stew, chicken stew, and jengkol stew.

    Sweet soy sauce based on black soybeans is the most important ingredient in making stew because it plays a role in improving the taste, but still has to create a mixed taste with other ingredients.

    In addition to having special ingredients of beef and potatoes, semur also has various types of ingredients such as tofu, tempeh, eggs and other additional ingredients according to the tastes of the local community.

    13. Betutu Chicken

    Betutu is a side dish made from whole chicken that is filled with spices and then grilled over a fire. Betutu has been recognized in all districts in the province of Bali. Ayam Betutu is a special dish of Gilimanuk and one of the most popular Bali dishes among tourists.

    Betutu is used as a dish in religious ceremonies and traditional ceremonies as well as as a dish for sale. The customers are not only Balinese but also foreign guests who arrive in Bali, especially in certain places such as hotels and restaurants.

    14. Fried rice

    The first main dish is fried rice which is also very popular. This menu consists of rice that is removed from the cooking process and then combined with special Indonesian spices.

    There are actually many types of fried rice, such as chicken fried rice, seafood fried rice, meatball fried rice and many more. This unique menu often attracts tourists to several tourist spots.

    15. Meatballs

    Indonesian meatballs are one of the best main dishes. Fill it with meatballs, noodles, tofu, fries and then add beef broth. These meatballs are chewy and juicy, so many people use them as the main dish at some events.

    There are also various types of meatballs, not only meatballs but also chicken meatballs, fish meatballs, tendons, shrimp meatballs, rib meatballs and pork meatballs. All these rocks are worthy of being tasted and even easy to find in all cities in Indonesia.

    16. Gado-Gado

    Gado-Gado menu food can be said to be a kind of special Indonesian tool. Although included in the salad menu, these gado-gado are often used as the main dish in Indonesia. The ingredients of the gado-gado are various, starting from potatoes, bean sprouts, cubes, eggs, lettuce and then sambal pea.

    Gado-gado itself is an Indonesian name that refers to the combination of many foods in one portion. This menu is very popular in the Yogyakarta area. When eating, you can use it with rice or with lontong. But sometimes vegetables are added to add flavor.

    Closing

    Well, with the comments above, of course you more or less understand the meaning, types, methods of processing and examples of the Main Course food menu. In this way, you can get many Main Course menu suggestions if you hold an event or invite guests for dinner. If you want to make a Main Course food menu, but don’t know the recipe, just buy the recipe menu book at Sinaumedia.com .

    That’s the discussion about the main course or main course. In general , the Main Course can be divided into two, namely the Indonesian Main Course and the Continental Main Course . Both can be chosen according to personal preferences and tastes.

  • Understanding Magnets: Properties, Types, Shapes and How to Remove Magnets

    Understanding Magnets: Properties, Types, Shapes and How to Remove Magnets

    Meaning of Magnets – Looking for a falling needle will take time by hand, of course it will take a long time, although we can guess where it falls, but it will be difficult for sure.

    Try using a magnet. The trick is to bring the magnet close to the surface of the floor and the needle-like metal will be attracted to the magnet. The search process will be easier.

    Ever noticed the nail scavengers on the street? They also used a stick with a magnet attached to the end so they just combed the road and attached all the metal including nails which would later be collected.

    Why can magnets attract metals? Can all metals be drawn? Can we make magnets? Can magnetic properties be removed? Let’s talk more about the power of magnets

     

    A. Meaning of Magnets

    Initially, in a metal mining area, a metal was found that was able to attract other metals, although not all metals could be attracted. Then the metals that were found turned out to be strongly attracted, some weakly attracted and some unable to attract metal.

    Magnet itself comes from the Greek word magnítis líthos which means Magnesian stone. The region has magnetic stone content, and Magnesia itself was a region in Greece in the past currently called Manisa.

    If a magnet is between iron powder, then you will see a lot of powder sticking to both ends of the magnet. The more in the middle, the less iron powder sticks.

    This means that the two ends of the magnet are where the attraction force is the strongest. While the middle part has no magnetic or neutral attraction. 

    B. Magnetic Properties

    What distinguishes magnets from other things? Of course there is a unique property that the magnet has, what is it? Learn various interesting facts about magnets through the book Jago Fisika: Magnet Dan Listrik

    1. magnets can attract certain things

    Magnets only attract certain objects around them, so not all objects can be magnetized even if the objects are around them.

    There are certain materials that can be attracted by magnets. The materials are metal type. But, not all metals can be magnetized, depending on the type. Then there are metals that are attracted so strongly, but there are also weak ones.

    2. A magnet has two poles

    Magnets have two poles, the positive pole and the negative pole. The two Poles are located at the end. That’s where the magnetic force is so strong.

    Eits but don’t expect to find north and south writing. The north pole of the magnet will always face the north of the earth, and the south pole of the magnet will always face the south of the earth.

    Hm.. why do magnetic poles always point north and south?

    The answer is because of the influence of the Earth’s strong magnetic field.

    The Earth’s magnetic field was discovered in 1600 by a William Gilbert, the most prominent scientist in England. Gilbert theorized that the Earth functions as a giant magnetic bar that affects all magnetic objects on Earth.

    Quoted from NASA that, the Earth’s core is an electromagnetic solid surrounded by a liquid core (liquid iron and nickel) in which electric current flows.

    The electric current in the molten core causes the Earth’s magnetic field to be so strong that it covers the entire Earth as well as the outer space around it.

    Earth as a very large magnet with the north pole of the earth’s magnet around the south pole of the earth, on the other hand the south pole of the magnet around the north pole of the earth.

    The north pole of the free magnetic field faces north because it is pulled by the south pole of the earth’s magnet which is located around the north pole of the earth. The south pole of the magnet is free to face south because it is pulled by the north pole of the earth’s magnet which is located around the south pole of the earth. The direction of the lines of magnetic force in the earth’s magnetic field is from the direction of the south pole of the earth to the north pole of the earth. How can you?

    The location of the earth’s magnetic poles is not exactly the location of the earth’s poles! Therefore the compass needle will form an angle with the north-south current as well as with the horizontal plane of the earth. The direction of the magnetic axis of the compass needle forms an angle with the north-south direction of the earth. This angle is called the declination angle.

    The declination angle is the deviation of the direction of the compass needle from the true north and south direction of the earth. The magnitude of the angle of declination in various places is not the same, and also changes every year.

    In addition to the angle of declination, there is also the angle of inclination. The angle of inclination is the angle formed by the magnetic axis of the compass needle with the horizontal direction of the earth. It turns out that the magnetic axis of the compass needle forms an angle with the horizontal or horizontal line of the earth.

    Well, the navigation of ships and airplanes uses a compass as a direction indicator. By observing the direction of the magnetic pole of the compass needle, it can be estimated which direction is north and south.

    By reading the angle of declination on the compass, the actual north-south direction of the earth can be determined.

    Because the angle of declination changes every year and as technology advances, sooner or later the compass is considered less accurate as a direction indicator.

    It is Radio Beacons that replace the use of a compass to inform the north and south direction of the earth, including the wind angle accurately.

    3. Different poles will attract each other, same poles will repel each other.

    If the poles of the same type are brought together, there will be a force of repulsion, while if the poles are opposite, there will be an attraction.

    Suppose we bring the north pole closer to the north, then the two magnets will repel each other. But if we bring the north and south poles closer together, there will be an attractive force.

    If we use a natural magnet and when we bring the two ends together it turns out that they repel each other then we can conclude that their poles are different, while if they attract each other, be sure that the poles are different.

    Oh, yes. If a magnet is cut into small pieces, it turns out that the small pieces will form new magnetic poles. No matter how small the size, it still has magnetism.

    So a magnet consists of small magnets that are located in a row from the north pole facing the south pole of the magnet and on the other hand the south pole faces the north pole of the magnet. These small magnets are called elementary magnets.

    4. Magnetic force can penetrate the barrier.

    Magnets have a force that can penetrate objects. So even if there is metal blocked by glass or paper, the metal is still affected by the magnetic force. So it’s not magic, it’s not magic if the magnet can still attract metal even if it’s blocked.

    To prove it, just sprinkle iron powder on paper and put a magnet behind the paper. Although blocked by paper, the iron powder will move as the magnet is moved. Want to be moved up, down to the right and to the left the iron powder will follow.

    5. Has a magnetic field

    A magnet has a magnetic field that will produce a magnetic force. The magnetic force of a magnet will get closer if it is near the magnetic field, but will move away if the distance is also away from the magnetic field

    a. Definition of magnetic force field

    What is a magnetic force field?
    The magnetic force field is the space around the magnet that still has the influence of the magnetic attraction force.

    The field of magnetic force is described as curved lines called lines of magnetic force.

    Curious to see what the magnetic line style looks like? try to sprinkle iron powder on white paper, if we keep a magnet behind the paper, then the iron powder will show a regularity, they will be in the area around the magnetic field

    b. Magnetic style line pattern

    The pattern of style lines when poles of the same type are brought close together, the style lines formed move away from each other, until there seems to be an empty space. For example, we bring the north pole closer to the north pole or the south pole to the south pole.

    Meanwhile, if poles of different types are brought closer, the north pole if brought closer to the south pole,
    then a pattern of lines of force can be seen connecting each other from pole to pole.

    C. Types of Magnets

    1. Types of magnets based on their origin.

    Where does the magnet actually come from? Based on its origin, magnets are divided into two, namely natural magnets and artificial magnets, which are discussed in the SMA/MA/SMK Kitab Keramat Listrik&Magnet: Seri Pendalaman.

    a. Natural Magnets

    This natural or created magnet was discovered by the people of Magnesia in the past. This magnet has magnetic properties since it was discovered. Usually natural magnets are in the form of rocks. Natural magnets also have special characteristics, which are permanent. That’s why the magnetism of natural magnets is harder to lose.

    So, when this magnet was discovered, it already had the ability to attract things around it without human intervention or being formed naturally.

    b. Artificial Magnets

    Based on the need that is increasing over time, then make a magnet.
    So along with the development of time, humans began to be able to make artificial magnets.

    Not everything can be made into a magnet. Things that have elemental magnets can be made into magnets. As discussed earlier that the magnet consists of domains or elemental magnets

    1). Artificial magnets based on the strength of the magnet

    a) Permanent magnet

    Based on their strength, artificial magnets are divided into permanent magnets. Artificial magnets have permanent magnetism if their domains or elemental magnets are in a fixed order. For example, in steel, the elemental domains or magnets are indeed difficult to arrange, but once magnetized it turns out to be regularly organized.

    b) Temporary Magnet

    Artificial magnets have temporary magnetism if the domains or elemental magnets can only be organized for a while and then soon become scattered or chaotic again, for example iron. It turns out that iron is an elemental magnet that is easy to set up, but unfortunately it will soon be scattered again. If it scatters back then the magnetic strength is gone.

    2). Based on the material, artificial magnets are divided into 3 groups

    a). Ferromagnetic

    Ferromagnetic is a material that if made into a magnet then the magnetism is very strong.

    Examples of ferromagnetics are iron, steel, nickel, and cobalt. In addition to being strong as a magnetic material, these materials are also very strongly attracted to magnets.

    b). Paramagnetic

    Paramagnetic is a substance that, if made into a magnet, has weak magnetic properties, and cannot be made into a magnet. Examples of ferromagnetic materials are aluminum and platinum.

    c). Diamagnetic
    Diamagnetic is a material that cannot be made magnetic.
    The reason is because there is no elemental magnet in the material.

    3). How to make artificial Magnets

    There are two ways to make magnets namely:

    a). Making magnets by rubbing

    Iron or steel rubbed with a magnet will become a magnet. How to rub iron or iron to become a magnet?

    The way to make a magnet by rubbing is to rub iron or steel in the same direction. Directional movement is able to make elementary magnets become directional

    b). Make a magnet with an electric current.

    How to make a magnet with electric current is:

    Wrap the copper wire around the nail, connect the end of the wire to the battery pole. Observe, Once connected, the nail will have a magnetic force and can attract metals around it.

    Why is that? Electric current flows from the power source to the coil wire, the larger size nail made of iron is in the electric field. Small nails are attracted to big nails.

    So as long as the big nail is in the electric field the big nail will become a magnet. If we cut the current, the big spike will become neutral again. Because magnets always have 2 poles, namely north and south, how do you determine which is the north and south poles? This way, the electric current will flow from the positive pole to the negative pole.

    In the event according to the picture, it means electric current in the direction of clockwise rotation. As long as the electric current flows, the nail end B is the north pole and the end A is the south pole.

    So when the electric current in the coil wire flows clockwise, the iron or steel end where the electric current enters the wire is the south pole while the place where the current leaves the coil becomes the north pole.

    When the electric current in the coil is counter-clockwise, where the current enters the iron or steel end as the north pole and the other end is the south pole.

    It turns out that the number of windings and the voltage given will affect the size of the magnet produced.

    The greater the electrical voltage used, the greater the magnetic intensity, the greater the electric current, the greater the magnetic strength and the more turns of the coil, the stronger the magnetic intensity.

    c). Making a magnet by induction
    If we use a US magnet to induce iron AB until it becomes a magnet with A as the north pole and B as the south pole of the induction magnet. If we move the magnet US away then the iron aB becomes neutral and will not attract the metal anymore

     

    D. Shapes of Magnets

    Magnets found in a mine have an irregular shape. While the magnets that are made have a shape that is adapted to the needs. Magnets are currently a key component of modern technology as discussed in the book Electricity and Magnets.

    Magnetic forms among them

    1. Rod magnet

    A rod magnet is a rod-shaped magnet or like a small block or cube.

    These magnets are usually used for door locks on glass and wooden cabinets. In addition, it can also be used as a cover for other things, such as pencil boxes, gift boxes, etc

    2. Horseshoe magnet

    Horseshoe magnets are also known as horseshoe magnets. Why? Because its shape resembles a poultice that is used as a horse shoe.

    The use of u magnet or horseshoe magnet is to lift magnetic objects

    3. Magnet needle

    Needle magnets have a flat, elongated, and pointed end. A needle magnet is usually used to make a compass work as a wind direction indicator.

    4. Cylindrical magnets

    Cylindrical magnets have a cylindrical shape, round and flat. The use of cylindrical magnets is largely similar to the use of bar magnets.

    These magnets are used for door locks on glass and wooden cabinets.

    Not only that, ino magnets can also be used to cover other things, such as pencil boxes, gift boxes, etc.

    5. Ring magnet

    Its name is also a ring magnet so the shape of a ring magnet resembles a ring. This magnet has a circular shape with a hole in the middle.

    Ring magnets are used to make loudspeakers, such as speakers in radios, cinemas, or mobile phones. Ring magnets can also be used in electric motor machines.

    E. How to Eliminate Magnetism

    It turns out that magnetism can be removed. How to remove it is as follows:

    • Beaten
    • Heated
    • Flowed back and forth

    That is the information about the meaning of magnet that should be known. It is certainly very useful for us in our daily lives, because many things around us use magnets in their operation. Also read the following other articles:

    Recommended Books & Articles

  • Meaning of Internship: Purpose, and Benefits

    Meaning of Internship: Purpose, and Benefits

    Internship is – During college, you may also often hear about senior sisters or lecturers who suggest an internship if you are in the final stage. In fact, some people think that this internship student can give you the facility to find a job after graduating from college.

    However, before you start searching for internship vacancies for students, it is good for you to first understand what an internship is. That way, it will be easier for you to determine what abilities will be developed in the internship.

    For more clarity, here is an explanation of the internship that Reader needs to know.

    Definition of Internship

    The definition of internship or internship is a study program as well as practicing working in a direct way at a company for some time. Companies that accept interns have the right to assign tasks and must provide guidance during the program. Then, at the end of the program, the trainees will then get an evaluation from the company, especially from their direct superiors.

    In general, internships are done by SMK students as well as students at the final level. In some fields of study, internship can be said to be one of the compulsory subjects that will later affect the grade. However, there are also study programs that do not require students to do an internship.

    You may also have heard the term PKL or Field Work Practice or commonly known as the abbreviation PKL. Although they are basically the same, the difference between an internship and a PKL is only limited to the use of the term. The term PKL generally refers to internship programs at the SMK and diploma levels. Meanwhile, for the S1 and S2 lecture levels, the term internship or apprenticeship has become more commonly used.

    Purpose of Internship for Students

    Basically, the main purpose of the internship is to act as a bridge between the world of education and the world of work. In the internship program, the trainees will learn a lot about the world of work and also add useful skills for the world of work. As for the several objectives of the internship, among others:

    1. Implementation of knowledge to work

    In some fields of study, the theoretical knowledge that has been learned on campus is sometimes still not enough. Therefore, you still have to learn how to implement this knowledge into real and more beneficial work activities. Having an internship program will make it easier for you to improve your skills that will be useful in the world of work later.

    2. Increase Hard Skill

    There are many skills and knowledge that you will learn when you start your internship. In addition to getting it from the training session, you will also directly practice it under professional supervision. With this program it can be regarded as an effective way to develop skills or abilities.

    3. Learning Various Soft Skills

    In addition to learning hard skills, you will also learn various soft skills directly in a more effective way. As for soft skills , such as the ability to communicate, negotiate, and time management will definitely be honed during the internship. Not only that, you can also develop various other soft skills , which are adapted to the type of work and the responsibilities of the work you are doing.

    4. Easier to Adapt to the Work World

    The rhythm of the world of work is very different when compared to the rhythm of school and college. Because of this, there are not a few fresh graduates who later find it difficult to adapt when they first enter the world of work. The internship program will then give you the opportunity to adapt more comfortably and gradually.

    5. Facilitating Career As a Fresh Graduate

    After graduating from college, students will definitely look for a job that will then be quite challenging because of the high competition and lack of experience. However, by being a fresh graduate with internship experience written on your CV, it can make you superior to other job applicants, so the possibility of being recruited is also greater. The connections you make during the internship will also help you open a good career path.

    6. Improve Insight and Competence

    The work internship program can be likened to the initial gateway to getting to know the real world of work. Therefore, trainees will not be surprised when they graduate and enter the world of work. This is because the internship participants already have the insight that has been gained throughout doing internship activities. In fact, you will also be more accustomed to the system of dividing tasks in each division in a company and being involved in a project.

    7. Developing Relationships and Friendships

    Friendship or relationship has an important role in the world of work. When you follow an internship program , then you have the opportunity to meet new people with diverse backgrounds. From there, you can also strengthen relationships professionally. In addition to personal relationships, the internship program will also expand the relationship between the campus and your school with the company.

    Benefits of Internships for Companies

    On the one hand, internships will then be seen as troublesome for companies because they are required to provide work facilities, education, and guidance to students. However, on the other hand, the company can get profit from the trainees.

    Saving Employee Salary Costs

    The company will then seek the services of interns for a number of small jobs, such as administrative affairs and light practical work. This practice can save the company’s budget because the internship does not require the company to pay a salary.

    Finding Potential Employees

    When providing training and supervision, company management will also look at the quality and performance of each trainee. On several occasions, it is not uncommon for companies to find participants who have the potential to be recruited as employees after graduation.

    In addition, companies will also find superior seeds from this internship program. Because of this, it is not uncommon for companies to then recruit part-time employees from employees who have had previous internships. This will certainly simplify and save the recruitment process.

    Internship Aspects

    The internship program has several rules and regulations that must be met and agreed upon by both parties in order to ensure that no one is harmed. There are several important aspects that need to be considered during the internship.

    Application and Recruitment

    You can participate in the internship program by sending an application directly to the company of your dreams or by participating in a recruitment event organized by the company. The process is similar to full-time job application and recruitment, but simpler and simpler.

    Duration

    Most internship programs themselves are only around 3-6 months. According to government regulations, this internship cannot be done for more than one year. If the company then still needs the services of an intern employee, then this status must be renewed to become a contract employee.

    Pocket Money

    Being an intern does not entitle you to a salary. However, the company must provide pocket money as compensation for transportation costs, meals, and work compensation. Although there are no specific rules regarding the amount of pocket money, but usually the interns will get a little under the UMR or even more.

    Guidance and Training

    Intern participants have the right to receive various training and work guidance in order to achieve their goals. Usually, this aspect is already written in the apprenticeship agreement to ensure that the company fulfills its obligations.

    Job Desk

    In return, the trainees are also obliged to provide this service to the company by doing some light work. In this aspect, it should be clearly stated in the agreement so that in the future there will be a balance between the work education received by students.

    Facilities

    Intern participants have the right to obtain facilities that will help them fulfill their obligations, such as desks and chairs in the office, computer equipment, and internet connection. Of course, these facilities are generally not as luxurious as full-time employees.

    Job Security

    The company is obliged to guarantee the work safety of the apprentice employees just like other employees, especially in various types of risky practice jobs. For example, civil engineering and architecture students who are interns in construction projects are entitled to be provided with safety helmets and safety shoes

    Evaluation

    At the end of the internship, the company is then obliged to give an evaluation according to the student’s performance during the program. The results of this evaluation will later be used as evaluation material by the campus.

    The difference between an internship and a management trainee

    Some people often think that internship is the same program as Management Trainee . However, the two then have many fundamental differences, including:

    1. The main purpose of the internship program is to prepare students to face the world of work. Meanwhile, the main purpose of Management Trainee is to prepare them to become policy holders in a company.
    2. Management Trainee with status and rights as an employee, while Internship or internship is not.
    3. Only fresh graduates with a maximum of two years of work experience will become Management Trainees . Meanwhile, Internship can only be followed by final level students.
    4. The Management Trainee will then be appointed as a permanent employee if he successfully completes the program with high marks. This benefit itself is not in the internship program.
    5. This internship program is limited to a maximum duration of only one year. On the other hand, Management Trainee then has a longer duration with a minimum of one year only.

    Internship Success Tips

    Here are the internship success tips you need to know.

    Actively Searching for Internship Information

    To be able to follow the internship program, of course you have to register first. Each company has its own standards in determining the candidates it seeks.

    If you are in college, usually this internship is done in the third, fifth or final semester. It should be noted that the internship quota is usually only a few, while the fans are very many, so your competition will definitely increase.

    The way to follow this program is by searching for internship information on your campus, social media, company website, or by asking your seniors who have worked or had an internship in a company.

    Don’t Focus on Money

    Don’t be obsessed with money when following an apprenticeship program, although it cannot be denied that money is very important to you. Some companies will then provide incentives for apprentices even if it is possible with a not too large nominal. It would be good to keep focusing on developing skills so that it is easier to get to know the world of work later. for Even if you are indeed employed, this is another benefit.

    Follow the Internship Program with Professionals

    Do the entire range of internship programs well, especially those that are related to your responsibilities or duties. In addition to work ethic, attitude and personality will also be seen by the company. Be polite and don’t act weird.

    Closing

    That’s the discussion about the internship and its purpose, hopefully all the discussions in this article will be useful for you. So, have you started an internship for college?

    If you want to find a book about career, then you can find it at Sinaumedia.com. To support Reader in adding insight, Sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Reader has information #LebihDenganMembaca .

    Author: Sofyan
    Source: Sofyan

    Recommended Internship Related Books

    More Probation: Enjoying the Job Search Journey

    Finding a job is a process that everyone faces in their career journey. However, there is often confusion and uncertainty that arises. Starting from incomplete information about job vacancies, HRD that is difficult to contact, to a lot of salary negotiations. Later on Probation , Samuel Ray—a professional HR practitioner—shares job hunting tips and tricks, from CV writing to salary negotiations, written in simple and “landing” language.

    Without covering up, based on his experience and point of view. This book is written for those of you who are looking for a job for the first time, are looking for a new job, or are reminiscing about the times when you were looking for a job. Because life is as simple as going through one probation process to the next.

    The Art Of Navigating Careers And The World Of Work

    Many people say, “I hate Monday” when starting Monday. Anyway, what’s wrong with Monday? Pambudi, Wing, Sagita, and Astrid, four professionals who have careers in various national and multinational organizations and companies have an idea to change I Hate Monday into I Love Monday so that we can be more enthusiastic in living our working days.

    They did an Instagram Live How’s Your Monday? every Monday, at 20.00 WIB. How’s Your Monday? discuss the world of work, career development, and leadership in a relaxed, but serious way, plus guest stars who are also professionals in their fields. The book How’s Your Monday? This is presented fluidly and thoughtfully, so that we can learn from seasoned professionals about:

    • Tips and tricks for making a persuasive CV, investigating job interviews and salary negotiations in a professional manner.
    • Essential things in the world of work that need to be known in order to succeed faster, such as making friends with seniors, coordinating, finding mentors, and getting precise coaching .
    • Accelerate your career, get a promotion, become a team leader for the first time, form a support system , etc.

    Work Not Suitable for Majors : Future Of Work In Industry 4.0

    Many people think that choosing a job that does not match the major is just pointless. Many are still disappointed if they get a job that does not match their major. This book will cover everything related to jobs in the future, especially with the rapid development of Industrial Revolution 4.0.

    Like it or not, we have to have the skills that the company will be looking for. Then, what skills do you have to have? Creativity, Emotional Intelligence , Positive Thinking, Decision-Making Ability, Communication Ability, Leadership Ability, Cultural Intelligence, and Technology Skills.

    13 Ways to Compose a Cv and a Job Application Letter

    The world of work today is certainly not free from the aspect of competition that is so tight. The competition is even more intense when the number of jobs and the number of applicants are not comparable. A job application letter and CV reflect your true seriousness and personality.

    Therefore, you must be able to create an accurate cover letter and CV and be able to describe yourself well. What should you include in your cover letter and CV? 

  • Meaning, Types and Examples of Press Releases

    Meaning, Types and Examples of Press Releases

    Meaning, Kinds and Examples of Press Release – In the world of Public Relations , it cannot be separated from what is called a Press Release. Press Release is an activity to notify information, whether it is in the form of the implementation of an institution or company’s activities, product launch, company launch, and so on. Simply put, Press Release can be said to be a way to do a soft sell .

    With a Press Release, the company or institution will be better known by many people so that it can improve the image of the company or institution. However, currently there are still some companies or institutions that have not used Press Releases. This kind of thing is very unfortunate because it can make other people not know an institution or company.

    Therefore, it is highly recommended for companies or institutions to use Press Releases. However, for some people, they do not know what a Press Release is. Below will be discussed about the Press Release to the examples. Reader, happy reading this article.

    Definition of Press Release

    Press Releases in a company or institution are usually written by the Public Relations department or public relations department. Public relations is short for community relations. Therefore, this part of public relations connects the company or institution with the community. Usually in the form of information in the form of writings from companies or institutions so that many people know.

    That information is called Press Release. With a Press Release, the public will know what information is being conveyed. In fact, not only the community knows, but other companies and other institutions know the information.

    So, Press Release is information in the form of writing given to the community, other companies, and other institutions with the aim of promoting the image of the company or institution. This press release can be published through offline or online newspapers , to social media.

    However, there are some companies or boards that hand over the task of creating a Press Release to a third party. This is done because third parties are considered more competent in making Press Releases.

    If seen at a glance, a press release is shaped like a news, but a promotion or branding of a company or institution is inserted. Therefore, the writing of Press Releases requires precision and the choice of language that is interesting for many people to read.

    Even for newly established companies, Press Releases are very suitable to be used as a way to introduce new companies. If there are many readers who read the Press Release, then it is most likely that the existence of the company will be seen and its products will be known by many people.

    The use of Press Releases in some companies is used to promote new products. The more people who know about a company’s new product, the greater the chance that the new product will be sold in the market.

    Why is a press release needed?

    “Why is Press Release so needed by companies or institutions? Perhaps such questions often appear in our minds. Actually there is no definite answer, but in general there are three answers. First, the Press Release becomes important because it can introduce a company’s product. Second, Telling an information related to an activity that will be carried out by the company or institution. Third, provide information related to the company or institution.

    If seen based on the three answers, then making a Press Release requires a very high level of thinking ability so that there are no mistakes in writing, using language that can attract the reader, until diverting slanted news related to the company or institution.

    Press Release Structure

    In order to make it easier to make a Press Release, it is necessary to know the structure. See the structure of the Press Release below.

    1. Title (head)

    The first thing to note when making a Press Release is the title. The title should be made as interesting as possible so that the information provided is read by many. In addition, the writing of the title should represent the contents of the Press Release. Titles with active sentences will make it easier for readers to understand the message or meaning of the information presented by the company or institution.

    2. Core (lead)

    After the title, the next structure that should be observed is the core or lead . The core of the Press Release can be interpreted as the opening part of a news story. Because of this, cores are usually first and foremost in the news. In writing the core, it is best to use subjects that are added with 5W+1H elements and written in a short, clear, and concise manner.

    3. Fill (body)

    The inverted pyramid method is very good to use in creating content from a Press Release. The inverted pyramid method places very important information at the top or beginning of the news. After that, gradually general information is written under it, then less meaningful information is written under it. Important information that is placed at the top or at the beginning aims to attract the attention of the readers.

    Basically, when making a Press Release, not only observe the structure, but also need to observe several things, such as the time the Press Release will be published, the date of the Press Release, providing the company or agency contact at the end of the Press Release, using the 5W+1H elements, and avoid specific terms.

    Various Press Releases

    Press Release is one of the ways that a company or institution does to introduce itself so that it is better known by the wider community. Press Release itself is divided into three types, namely Basic Publicity Release, Product Release, and Financial Release .

    1. Basic Publicity Release

    Basic Publicity Release is a Press Release that only provides information that exists within a company or institution. In addition, the information provided has news value that can be accepted by the mass media, whether it is value for local media or value for national media.

    2. Product Release

    Product Release is a Press Release that only focuses on soft selling or promotion of a new product, new company, and the like. However, usually at Product Release it is usually used to promote new products from a company. In general, this type of Press Release is published in media related to economics and business.

    3. Financial release

    Financial Release is a Press Release made with the purpose of providing information about the company’s financial condition to the general public. However, Press Release Financial Release is very rarely done by companies. If there is a company that makes a Financial Release , then it is most likely that the general public will believe in that company.

    Examples of Press Releases

    1. New Product Press Release

    Title: 

    Golden King Launches New Variant Chocolates . From the title alone, the reader can already imagine what information will be delivered by PT Golden King Chocolate. The easy-to-understand title makes readers interested in knowing what products will be launched by PT Golden King Chocolate in Sabuga, Bandung.

    Core:

    The opening sentence in the Press Release above, directly explains the important information to be conveyed, “PT Golden King Chocolate launched a new variant chocolate product on Monday (18/3).

    Contents:

    The content of the Press Release written by PT Golden King Chocolate has applied an inverted pyramid where important information has been placed at the top or the first paragraph. After other general information is placed at the bottom. What’s more, this Press Release provides a contact that can be contacted so who knows if there are consumers who want to buy the new product.

     

    2. Hotel Press Release

    Title:

    The title from the Press Release above explains about the Grand Istana Rama Hotel that has passed the Ministry of Energy’s certification. However, this title is still incomplete because it does not explain the purpose of the certification.

    Core:

    Although the title is incomplete, but at the core, Grand Istana Rama Hotel directly provides very important information. The information was in the form of Grand Istana Rama Hotel very compliant with the Covid-19 health protocol. With the Press Release, tourists do not need to worry if they want to stay at the Grand Istana Rama Hotel.

    Contents:

    The content of the example Press Release above explains that the Grand Istana Rama Hotel strongly supports the prevention of Covid-19 so that it follows the health protocol implemented by the government. From the Press Release example above, Grand Istana Rama Hotel insists that tourists can stay at the hotel safely and comfortably.

    3. Activity Press Release

    Title: 

    From the title alone, the reader can already imagine the contents of the Press Release example of an activity in the form of a competition organized by KFC and followed by 10 universities. The competition in question is to create a solution to the problem of garbage.

    Core:

    The opening sentence in the example Press Release above does not directly provide important information, but explains the background of the event. General information placed at the beginning of the Press Release can make the reader less interested in reading the Press Release example.

    Contents:

    The contents of the Press Release example above put important information at the bottom so that the reader should read it to the end first. The point of the Press Release example above is to announce the winner of the competition held by KFC.

    4. Press Release News

    Title: 

    The example of the press release above uses active sentences so that the reader can easily understand it and be interested in reading the example of the press release until the end. From the title of the Press Release example, the reader will know that the information to be provided in the form of PTPP experienced an increase in net profit of 38%.

    Core:

    The opening sentence in the example Press Release above directly explains the point that matches the title. After that, the next sentences provide information about the cause of the PTPP profit increase.

    Contents: 

    Although at the beginning of the sentence you already know that PTPP experienced an increase in profits, but overall the contents of the Press Release example above are too much to make the reader confused.

     

    5. Press Release Event

    Title:

    Readers already get an idea when reading the title in the Press Release example above. The Press Release above gives a press release that a tribute concert will be held for Erros Chrisye Yockie.

    Core:

    From the opening sentence in the example of the Press Release about the event, important information has been immediately given in the form of the place and date of the Erros Chrisye Yockie tribute concert. In addition, an example of the Press Release event was published on January 30, 2019, which indicates that the Erros Chrisye Yockie tribute concert will be held in two days

    Contents:

    The content of this Press Release is very complete and directly explains important information from each paragraph. Not only is the time and place explained in the example of the Press Release, but the singers who liven up the concert are also informed.

    In organizing an event, very good management is required, from event financing to event decoration. Someone who is successful in managing events needs a long experience. Although it requires a long experience, but you can learn it through a book on Event Management . From this book you will learn many things about how to manage events. So, what are you waiting for, immediately buy this book, by clicking the “buy book” button.

    6. Press Release Seminar

    Title:

    The title from the example Press Release of the seminar above has the title “Indonesia 2040: Trapped or Missed?” From the title alone, people who see and read immediately understand what will be discussed at the seminar later.

    Core:

    Although there is no opening sentence in the Press Release example above, the reader immediately knows that the resource person will be present at the seminar

    Contents:

    The content of the press release example of the seminar in the form of a picture and a title where both of these things are able to explain the essence of the press release example.

    7. Company Press Release

    Title:

    The use of the title in the company’s Press Release example above already uses active sentences. Therefore, the reader will know what information is in the Press Release and be interested in reading the sample Press Release until it is finished.

    Core:

    The example of the Press Release above uses an opening sentence that is easy to understand and directly explains the important information to be conveyed. The important information contains about PT Bank Tabungan Pensiun Nasional Syariah (BTPN Syariah) preparing to release its shares to the public.

    Contents:

    The example Press Release above contains the release of BTPN sharia shares to the public which is continued with the amount of shares to be released as much as 10%. At the end of the paragraph it is explained that BTPN Syariah has always experienced an impressive increase.

    8. Press Release Notification

    Title:

    An example of the press release notification above, if seen from the title, it will look like it only explains the press release made by the Meteorology, Climatology and Geophysics Agency (BMKG). Some readers will feel confused about the meaning of the title.

    Core:

    The opening sentence in the example Press Release above indicates that BMKG is giving a statement related to the earthquake that will occur in Banten at 22:30-22:59. It was only in the next sentences that BMKG explained that the information about an earthquake in Banten was a lie.

    Contents:

    An example of the Press Release notification above contains the statement made by BMKG regarding the information of an earthquake that will occur in Banten. The content of this Press Release example uses inverted pyramid elements so that it is easy to understand and comprehend.

    Read Also:

    Conclusion

    For many companies, it is no longer strange to use a press release when they want to introduce a company or a product from a company. Every Press Release that is made must be in accordance with the purpose or meaning that is to be conveyed to the public. The point is, companies or institutions still desperately need a press release.

  • Understanding Metals: Elements, Properties, Classification, and Types

    The meaning of metal – When we hear the word metal, it must be familiar to our ears, Reader. Unknowingly we can find things around us that have metal elements. This material is very commonly used and used in our daily life. However, do Reader already know what the meaning of metal is? To know more about metals, then Reader can read the explanation of this article about what metals are.

    Meaning of Metal

    Metal is a chemical element that is strong, sticky, hard and able to conduct electricity or heat energy. Metals also have a high melting point. In addition, metals come from metal ores and to obtain them by means of mining.

    Generally, it is only done and searched for in the earth, whether it is pure or has a mixture of metals. Metal ores are found in a pure state, for example gold, silver, platinum. In addition, some are mixed with other elements such as carbon, sulfur, phosphorus, silicon, soil and sand.

    The word metal itself comes from the Greek word matallon, which means that a chemical element that is ready to combine to form an ion. Then, it has a metallic bond and is considered a metal similar to the chiton that is below the electron.

    Metalworking Fabrication Techniques

    Metallic Elements

    In the explanation above we already know that metal is a hard chemical element and can melt at a very high boiling point. Metal elements that are widely known include metals, non-metals, and semi-metals. Here is an explanation of the metallic elements.

    1. Metal Elements

    In this element, the material is very shiny and able to be a good conductor of electricity and heat. Metals will generally be solid at normal pressure and temperature unless mercury is used. Basically, metal is very easy to forge this which makes it easy to make various things.

    For types of metal elements such as aluminum (Al), iron (Fe), gold (Au), barium (Ba), calcium (Ca), potassium (K), chromium (Cr), nickel (N), sodium (Na), Manganese (Mn) and Magnesium (Mg).

    2. Non-Metallic Elements

    In this element, metal does not have the slightest metallic properties. Most of these non-metallic elements have physical characteristics and shapes that are different from each other. Generally, non-metallic elements are in the form of gases such as oxygen. Some are liquid like bromine. In addition, when non-metallic elements are solid, the texture is brittle and hard.

    For types of non-metallic elements such as Oxygen (O), Iodine (I), Silicon (Si), Neon (Ne), Nitrogen (N), Carbon (c), Chlorine (Ci), Helium (He), Hydrogen (H) , Phosphorus (P), Fluorine (F), Sulfur (S) and Bromine (Br).

    3. Semi Metal Elements

    There are not only metal and non-metal elements, one other element is semi-metal. This element generally still has some metallic properties known as metalloids. In this element, it usually has semi-conducting properties which cannot conduct electricity at low temperatures. However, it will be very good when it is at a higher temperature.

    For the types of semi-metallic elements themselves, they consist of tellurium (Te), polonium (Po), antimony (Sb), germanium (Ge), arsenic (As), silicon (Si) and boron (B).

    Electroplating Metal Coating Technique with Electricity

    Properties of Metals

    According to their properties, metals are divided into two, namely metals and non-metals. The nature of metals certainly has various special features that have been fundamental except for mercury. According to the electron configuration, the nature of metals tends to give up electrons. In contrast to non-metallic properties that are more likely to capture metals.

    Here are the basic properties of various types of metals such as:

    1. Having Different Levels of Strength and Hardness

    Each type of metal generally has a different level of hardness. Generally, the hardness can be increased by mixing other metals. Be aware that metal is known to be very strong. Just not with mercury.

    2. Easily Available to Forge

    Metals are easy to shape by being forged and stretched. The presence of a valence electron makes the metal easy to move in the crystal. According to its nature, metal can be forged into thin plates and when pulled can also be bent.

    3. Become a Good Electrical Conductor

    Capable of being a good conductor of electricity. When a metal is electrified, its electrons will carry a valence charge throughout the metal. So that it can create an electric current in the metal.

    4. Capable of Transmitting Heat

    Freely moving valence electrons can cause metals to be good conductors of heat. When a type of metal, one side is heated, then the available electrons will receive heat. So that it can cause the metal to become a conductor of electricity. The more the kinetic energy increases and the faster it moves, the better it will be.

    5. Shiny

    All types of metals will certainly shine when exposed to light in their surface. Therefore, in this time, the nature of the metal will re-emit the light energy it gets from certain waves.

    6. High Relative Density

    Known for its relatively high density, a metal property that can determine or show the metal structure.

    • In type a, it shows a simple cube structure. (sc = simple cubic ).
    • Type b, shows a centered structure of the body. (bcc = body centered cubic ).
    • While type c, face centered structure. (fcc = face centered cubic ).

    Classification of Metal Types

    As it is known that metals also consist of many different types. For this reason, many classifications are based on physical characteristics or even basic materials. In its classification, metals are grouped in general and according to their basic material.

    Grouping of Metals in General

    In the general grouping of metals, they are divided into 4 groups based on their type. The following is the discussion:

    1. Heavy Metals

    In the heavy metal group, it is generally derived from metals as a whole. For example, metals in the form of nickel, iron, chrome, tin, copper, zinc, tin, black and white, and there are many others.

    2. Light Metals

    In the light metal group, it is composed of metals that are just not completely composed or it can also be said that the composing metal is light. Examples of these light metals are magnesium, aluminum, titanium, calcium, sodium, barium and potassium.

    3. Refractory Metals

    As for what is meant by fire-resistant metal, this type of metal is able to withstand or be able to withstand fire with a certain temperature range. Examples of these refractory metals are titanium, zirconium, tungsten, and molybdenum.

    4. Precious Metals

    The last is a precious metal, usually this type of metal is often used and used for jewelry or other equipment. not only that, for this type of precious metal, it usually gives quite an expensive price. Examples of these precious metals are gold, platinum, and silver.

    Grouping Metals Based on Their Base Materials

    The grouping of metals from the base material that composes them is divided into two groups, Generally, a type of metal is composed of iron or non-iron. See the explanation below:

    1. Iron Metal (Ferrous)

    A type of metal whose alloy consists of a mixture of carbon and iron. For the type of metal in the form of cast iron, wrought iron, medium and high carbon steel, mild steel and mixed carbon steel.

    2. Non-Ferrous Metals (Non-Ferrous)

    This type of non-ferrous metal has an alloy or mixture containing Fe. Among these metals are aluminum, copper, lead and tin.

    Examples of Types of Metals and Their Functions

    As explained above that metals have many types and also their groupings, then it is not surprising if metals are the elements that have the most amount on earth. But each type of metal has its own uses. The following are some types of metals that are often used in everyday life:

    1. Zinc

    Zinc is a metal that has a bluish white color, which comes from a sphalerite mineral. Usually, zinc is used to coat iron so that it does not easily rust or galvanize. In addition, zinc can also be used for electric batteries.

    2. Copper

    Copper is a metal that has special characteristics with its reddish color. In addition, this metal is very malleable. Generally, it is used to make electric cables, brass alloys, bronze, cupronickel and hot water tanks.

    3. Solder

    Solder is an alloy of tin and lead. Known for its very low melting point. Usually, used to connect cables for an electronic item.

    4. Mercury

    Mercury is a metal that has a liquid form but is also heavy. Mercury has a silvery white color and don’t forget this mercury is a poisonous substance. Mercury is commonly used in a thermometer and some explosives.

    5. Platinum

    Platinum is a metal that has a silvery white color. In addition, platinum is very easy to shape. Platinum is often used to make jewelry, electronic items or can also be a catalyst.

    6. Plutonium

    Furthermore, there is a radioactive metal, namely plutonium, which is produced from a uranium process in a nuclear reactor. Generally, plutonium is used to make a nuclear weapon.

    7. Titanium

    Next is titanium, titanium is included in the type of strong metal, which has the characteristic white color and is very easy to shape. Titanium is highly resistant to corrosion. Typically titanium is used for alloys in spacecraft, bicycle frames and airplanes.

    8. Tin

    Tin is a soft metal, which is very easy to form and has a silvery white color. Tin is often used to gild a steel and stop a corrosion of bronze alloys.

    9. Lead

    Lead is a type of heavy metal that has a whitish blue color and is easy to form. For lead itself including the poisonous type. Typically, lead is used for batteries, roofing, and radiation shielding.

    10. Aluminum

    Aluminum has physical characteristics in the form of a silvery-white color, very light and also resistant to corrosion. This aluminum comes from a bauxite ore obtained from the electrolysis process. Aluminum is often used for electrical cables in the air, ships, airplanes, cars and bottled drinks.

    11. Iron

    Next is iron, this type of metal has physical characteristics in the form of a whitish ash color. Iron is produced from a process of smelting hematite ore. Iron is generally used for building and steel alloys.

    12. Fertilizer

    Steel is a very widely used metal and plays an important role in the industrial sector. This is because the composition of steel consists of an alloy of iron and carbon, both of which are often needed in industry.

    13. Gold

    Gold is a metal that includes precious metals, gold has very soft properties and has a bright yellow color. Certainly Reader already know that gold is often used for jewelry and electronic devices.

    14. Potassium

    Potassium is included in light metals which have physical characteristics in the form of a silvery color and are very reactive with other substances or elements. Potassium is generally used to mix chemical fertilizers and can be used to make glass.

    15. Calcium

    Calcium has a silvery white color and is included in metals that are very easy to form. In its own use, calcium is usually used to make high quality cement or fertilizer.

    16. Magnesium

    Magnesium itself belongs to the category of light metals. Magnesium has a whitish silver color and if burned will give rise to a bright white flame. Magnesium is often used for rescue flares and fireworks.

    17. Chromium

    This metal has a gray color and is very hard. Chromium can be used to create a shiny color. Chromium is also often used to make rust-resistant steel and can coat various other metals.

    18. Cupronickel

    Cupronickel is one type of alloy made of copper and nickel. Cupronickel is used and used to make coins.

    19. Silver

    Silver is a metal that is very easy to form and has a grayish white color. Silver is also capable of being a good conductor of heat and electricity. Silver is also often used to make jewelry and photographic equipment.

    20. Bronze

    Bronze comes from an alloy of copper and tin that has been around since ancient times. Bronze is known for its resistance to corrosion and is very easy to form. Bronze is usually used to make coins of low value.

    21. Brass

    Brass is one type of alloy, which is made of copper and zinc. Brass is usually used for decorative items, musical instruments, nails and screws.

    22. Wolfram

    Wolfram is a hard metal, which has a whitish gray color. Wolfram is also often used for lamp filaments, electronic items or even a sharp cutting tool.

    23. Sodium

    Sodium is a very reactive metal and has soft properties and a silvery white color. Sodium is often used for street lights and used in a chemical industry.

    24. Uranium

    Uranium is one of the metals that has a silvery white color and is included in the radioactive. Uranium itself is widely used for nuclear energy or even nuclear weapons.

    25. Vanadium

    Vanadium is a hard and poisonous metal. Vanadium is often used to increase the hardness of steel alloys. In addition, it is often used as a catalyst for the production of sulfuric acid.

    Principles of Inorganic Chemistry: An Introduction to the Chemistry of Non-Metallic Elements

    Closing

    Well , he Reader an explanation about the meaning of metals , types, and elements and properties of metals. Hopefully all the discussions above are useful and add insight for Reader.

     

  • Understanding Digital Literacy: Components, Benefits, and Improvement Efforts

    Meaning of Digital Literacy – In this age of advanced technology, communication and information can be delivered quickly and easily. Good utilization of technology is actually able to help the development of important areas in the life of the community, such as education and economy. If these fields can experience progress, then the civilization of this nation can also progress.

    Meaning of Digital Literacy

    Then, what is the definition of digital literacy? According to Paul Gilster (2007, in Harjono) said that digital literacy is the ability to understand and use information obtained from various sources.

    Meanwhile, according to Deakin University’s Graduate Learning Outcome 3, it is revealed that digital literacy is an effort to utilize technology in finding, using, and disseminating information in the digital world as it is today.

    Meanwhile, according to Common Sense Media (2009, in Harjono) thinks that digital literacy includes the existence of three abilities in the form of technology utilization competence, interpreting and understanding digital content as well as assessing its credibility, researching and communicating with the right tools.

    So, it can be concluded that digital literacy is an effort that individuals need in a sophisticated era like today to filter information accurately. Another effort to support digital literacy is the use of the right application and an in-depth understanding of the information obtained. Considering the impact on the spread of hoax in society is very worrying.

    Bad literacy turns out to have a bad impact on the psychology of teenagers. This is because teenagers tend to be unstable and often swallow the information they receive raw without finding out the truth and accuracy of the information.

    Components in Digital Literacy

    The nine components are social networking, transliteracy, maintaining privacy, managing identify, creating content, organizing and sharing content, reusing/repurposing content, filtering and selecting content , and self broadcasting .

    In order to better understand the nine components, let’s explain them one by one!

    1. Social Networking

    Nowadays, every individual must have more than one social media account, starting from Meta (Facebook), Twitter, LinkedIn, Instagram, TikTok, and WhatsApp.

    The acquisition of information from social media must also be selected first. However, not everyone is careful in trying to filter the information that is spread.

    The ability to utilize the features found in a social media application is basic knowledge that must be possessed by its users.

    For example, those who work in the academic world make more use of social media in the form of LinkedIn to support their relationships with scholars around the world. Then, those who work in the field of marketing, take advantage of the ‘Shop’ feature in the Instagram platform to promote their products.

    2. Transliteracy

    This component of transliteracy is defined as an effort to utilize various platforms to create content, share it and communicate it. In this component, the ability to communicate with various social media, discussion groups, or other online services is prioritized.

    3. Maintaining Privacy

    Privacy is important in this digital literacy. We as social media users from various platforms must understand cyber crime . Currently, cyber crime has become rampant as the digital world develops.

    What is cyber crime ? Cyber ​​crime is cyber crime that involves illegal activities using computers, digital devices or computer networks.

    Examples of cyber crime that often occur are online theft via credit card ( carding ), hacking via email, to theft of personal information ( phishing ).

    4. Managing Digital Identity

    This fourth component, namely managing digital identity, is related to how we as platform users use identity accurately on the various social media we have.

    5. Creating Content

    Creating content is our skill as a platform user in making or creating content, for example PowToon, blogspot, wordpress, and other platforms .

    6. Organizing and Sharing Content

    Organizing and sharing content is related to how we as platform users organize and share information content so that it can be more easily disseminated to the general public. For example, the use of social bookmarking sites that are judged to facilitate the process of disseminating information and can be accessed by many internet users.

    7. Reusing/ Repurposing Content

    In this component of reusing/repurposing content , prioritizing how we as platform users create or ‘reprocess’ existing content so that it can be reused as needed.

    For example, a teacher creates content on Indonesian language subjects with lecture text material. The content is uploaded on the Slideshare platform , with the aim that many people download and study it.

    After that, the content is ‘processed’ again by others by adding more complete new information or knowledge.

    8. Filtering and Selecting Content

    In this component of filtering and selecting content, we prioritize the ability to find and filter the right information according to our needs through search engines on the internet.

    9. Self Broadcasting

    In this component, it has the purpose of sharing interesting ideas or ideas as well as multimedia content through various platforms , for example through blogs or online forums . This Self Broadcasting can be an effort to participate in the online social community in digital literacy activities.

    Benefits of Digital Literacy

    The ten benefits are saving time, learning faster, saving money, making it safer, acquisition of the latest information, always connected, making better decisions, can make you want to work, be happier, and can influence the world.

    To better understand, let’s listen to the description of the ten benefits!

    1. Save Time

    In an effort to find the information needed faster thanks to this digital literacy. For example, when you get an assignment from your teacher or lecturer to find certain information, through your digital literacy skills you can find out reliable sources of information that can then be used as a reference for your task needs.

    The speed in finding the information can certainly save you time. The benefits are not only felt by students, but also by online services that provide services online so that you do not have to come and visit the service directly.

    2. Learn Faster

    For example, you get an assignment from your teacher or lecturer to search and find definitions of certain terms. It will feel difficult when you have to look for it in a printed glossary.

    Therefore, it will be faster if you take advantage of an online platform that provides definitions of these terms.

    3. Save Money

    In a sophisticated era like now, it is common to find special applications that contain a comparison of discounts on a product. The application when used carefully can certainly save our production in trying to buy the product.

    4. Making it Safer

    The circulation of information from various sources makes it easier for us as internet users to find the right information according to our needs.

    For example, when you want to go abroad, you can find information about your destination country from the internet. Information about what culture is found in your destination country or the history of its tourist attractions.

    5. Acquisition of Latest Information

    Applications that are on our devices often update their versions to be better, thus helping us to obtain the latest information. Through the ability of literacy in digital form, we get the latest information. However, don’t forget to check if the information is accurate or not, yes…

    6. Always Connected

    The existence of the internet network in the use of applications or social media makes us always feel connected to the general public, especially during the communication process. So that when you are feeling desperate, you can quickly communicate with your friend.

    7. Make Better Decisions

    The existence of digital literacy makes us able to search, learn, analyze and compare the information obtained. This can certainly prepare better decisions from the process of analyzing and comparing the information.

    An information can be said to be something valuable if the information can influence us to act to do something.

    8. Can Make You Work

    In this all-digital era, the ability to operate a computer is one of the skills that everyone should have. These skills can actually help us in our daily work. For example, skills in using Microsoft Word, Microsoft Excel, Microsoft Power Point, etc.

    Where can you learn these skills? Of course from the information available on the internet then you read and try to operate it according to the information that has been written.

    9. Be Happier

    The existence of content in the form of pictures, sound, audio-visual (video) that is spread on the internet turns out to be entertaining. Internet users who often access those contents feel happier and have an influence on their happiness.

    However, not all of these contents are entertaining. Sometimes there is also content that makes people sad or even angry. As intelligent internet users, we must be careful in filtering those contents for the “well-being” of our mood.

    10. Influence the World

    As explained in benefit number nine before, the content available on the internet can affect its users. Yes, it’s true, whether the content is in the form of writing, pictures, or audio-visuals, it can clearly influence the thinking of its users.

    The dissemination of content when properly directed can contribute to the development and change in the dynamics of social life.

    When viewed from a larger scope, the dedication of a person’s thoughts spread through the internet becomes a form of expression that can later affect the life of the world, both in the present and in the future.

    Digital Literacy Improvement Efforts

    1. Perpusnas

    The information literacy program has become part of the library service program in Indonesia. From the advancement of technology, digital information resources are becoming more and more abundant due to the large number of sources that provide the information.

    Currently, the government has contributed to efforts to increase digital literacy by launching various programs.

    One of them is the program developed by the National Library of the Republic of Indonesia (PNRI) with e-resources services at http://e-resources.perpusnas.go.id/ .

    Not only that, the National Library of the Republic of Indonesia (PNRI) also provides digital services that of course contain various information sources in the form of journals, e-books , multimedia, manuscripts, and others.

    2. ePerpus

    ePerpus is a digital library service with a B2B (Business to Business) concept carried by Kompas Sinaumedia. ePerpus offers digital library management for schools, companies, institutions, and communities.  https://www.eperpus.com/home/

    3. Digital Sinaumedia

    Sinaumedia Digital is an ebook application with the most complete collection of books, newspapers and magazines from renowned writers and publishers. Sinaumedia Digital can be accessed via an Android or Apple smartphone or tablet. https://ebooks.Sinaumedia.com/

    These efforts are carried out with the aim of making a positive contribution to the improvement of information literacy skills, especially students who are used to searching for information through Google .

    However, these efforts cannot simply stop, they must be developed so that a future generation that is “reliable” in the culture of reading, writing, processing, and evaluating information in this digital era can be realized.

    The Influence of Digital Literacy on Child and Adolescent Psychology

    In Indonesia, the number of internet users is dominated by teenagers, so it is possible that teenagers are the most affected. According to Retnowati (2015, in Pratiwi) good use of the internet can improve the user’s performance, but when it is used badly, it can have negative effects on teenagers.

    Examples that often happen nowadays are cases of defamation, bullying, and even prostitution that definitely trigger adolescent depression. Why can this happen?

    Because they have not fully understood the consequences of the use of digital media. It is true that they (teenagers) have mastered literacy in the form of the ability to read and write, but they do not yet have digital literacy skills.

    In the internet, many users are not shy to insult and even type rude words to other users. That is an example of the negative impact of digital literacy today. The phenomenon, when accepted by teenagers whose psychological conditions are generally not stable, can influence their emotional development in the future.

    The inability of teenagers to understand digital literacy can be seen from their actions who immediately make insulting comments when there is negative information, then when there is positive information they immediately share it on their account.

    So what should be done so that today’s teenagers are not easily depressed when doing digital literacy with social media? Of course, the role of parents is very important. They should be careful to monitor the behavior of teenagers.

    In addition, parents should provide an understanding of digital literacy. Don’t let the advancement of technology, especially the existence of digital literacy, make the psychological state of teenagers disturbed, even to the point of depression. Therefore, let’s be smart internet users! ^^

    So that you understand more about digital literacy in this era of globalization, you can read some books or references that discuss digital literacy. Come on, be an agent of change for the future!

  • The Understanding of Static Electricity and How It Works to Its Benefits!

    Understanding Static Electricity – Power generation or electrical energy is one of the main forms of energy needed by electrical equipment or energy stored in current in amperes (A) and voltage in volts (V), as long as the need consumes electrical energy in watts (W) to move a motor, light a lamp, flow energy to a water heater, cool the ac, or reactivate a mechanical device to produce another form of energy.

    Electrical energy powers household appliances, office equipment, industrial machines, trains, street lights, fireplaces, cooking utensils, and more. The energy produced can come from various sources, such as water, petroleum, coal, wind, geothermal, nuclear, solar and others. The basic unit of electrical energy is Joule, while the other is KWh (Kilowatt Hours). Electricity for industry and households is produced from power plants, such as PLTA, PLTN, PLTD (solar), PLTM, PLTS (solar energy), PLTU and others.

    Electrical energy is an important necessity in everyday life. Various necessities of life require electricity to continue operating. Some household chores such as ironing, washing, and storing food all require electricity.

    For other businesses, such as desks, laptops, computers and printers are often used, which of course are highly dependent on the power produced from electricity. The electricity used comes from the generating station. The electrical energy produced is then transported to homes, schools, factories and offices using conductive cables.

    In the science of physics about energy that comes from electricity, it is known that there are two types of electricity, namely static electricity and dynamic electricity, both of which must have significant differences even though they come from the same energy source. Well, this time we will focus more on discussing static electricity. Further discussion on what is the meaning of static electricity? we will review the definition, working method, and its use in life in the discussion below.

    Understanding Static Electricity

    Static electricity is electricity with a charge in a stationary or static state, unlike electro mobility where the charge is always moving. In a sense, static electricity is an imbalance of electric charge inside or on the surface of things. During this time, the load remains until it disappears when released.

    Electricity comes from the Greek word, specifically electron which means (Amber). The word amber itself comes from a petrified resin tree. The nature of this stone to attract small objects after being rubbed, this was later developed by a Greek scientist named Thales of Miletus with experiments that led to the discovery of electric charge

    In general, the understanding of static electricity is a group of electric charges in a fixed unit, the amount or balance of electric charges in one unit. Just like when you rub a plastic ruler on your hair, it will have a negative charge, and the hair will have a positive charge.

    The release when these two materials are rubbed causes both to be positively charged and negatively charged. Charge is a physical quantity related to electricity and other effects related to matter. Charges that can be neutralized by means of friction show that these charges do not negate each other.

    The amount of charge will depend on the lack or excess of the number of electrons, the more an object the greater the charge. According to electron theory, electrons that move from one atom to another are called free electrons, and things that can transfer electrons freely are called conductors.

    A static charge is generated whenever two surfaces are joined and separated, and at least one of the surfaces has a high resistance to current (and is therefore an insulator). Static electricity effects are already familiar to most people because people can feel, hear, and even see sparks when the excess charge is neutralized when brought close to a large conductor of electricity (eg: Earth).

    The coulomb is a unit of measurement for the magnitude of electric charge. There is negative and positive charge. An excess of electrons in an object makes the object negatively charged, and if the object is positively charged, then the object lacks electrons. If the amount of positive and negative charge on an object is the same, then the object has a neutral charge. 1 electron = -1,6 x 10-19 coulomb 1 proton = -1,6 x 10-19 coulomb.

    History of Static Electricity

    During the cultural era around the Mediterranean Sea, it was discovered that some objects, such as amber sticks, if rubbed with cat fur, could attract light objects such as fur. around 600 BC. a scientist named Thales conducted an experiment on static electricity, where he found that amber is magnetic unlike minerals, so it does not need to be rubbed. At that time, Thales had not really observed the magnetic effect of gravity, until scientific developments proved the relationship between magnetism and electricity.

    The history of the discovery of electricity begins with the research of a Greek philosopher named Thales from Miletus around 600 BC. At that time, Thales discovered a natural stone that was able to attract objects made of iron (now called magnets). He continued experimenting with other stones until he found a point at the conclusion that if amber is rubbed with wool, it can attract fragments of light.

    This happens because amber (in Greek for electron) carries an electrical charge, or static electricity as it is commonly used today. In short, Thales can be called the father of the inventor of static electricity. For the following centuries, electricity remained an interesting topic.

    It was only in 1600 that the English scientist William Gilbert discovered that amber is not the only object capable of attracting light. Gilbert also mentioned this event with a new Latin term, electrius, which was later absorbed into English by electric and electricity.

    Later, scientists such as Otto von Guericke, Robert Boyle, Stephen Gray and CF du Fay also conducted research related to electricity. A new breakthrough finally came in the 18th century, when Benjamin Franklin did extensive research on electricity.

    An American scientist experimented by attaching a metal key to a kite string during a thunderstorm and discovered that electricity was equivalent to lightning. After this historic discovery, people were eager to try harnessing the power of electricity in a very simple way to light their homes.

    How Static Electricity Works

    Understanding Static electricity is the result of the accumulation of electricity that occurs when two non-metallic objects rub against each other. This electrification usually occurs when charged particles move from one place to another. For example, when combing, the hair will not feel like it is lifted towards the comb.

    There are three ways of working to give an energy charge to static electricity, namely, friction, conduction, and induction.

    1. Friction

    Which of the following objects becomes electrified by rubbing with other objects? For example, some things can be statically charged, such as silk and glass. Glass is positively charged while silk is negatively charged. This process occurs when electrons from the glass are transferred to the silk fabric.

    2. Conduction

    The way to make things conduct electricity is by conduction. The definition of conduction is the transfer of electrically charged objects to non-charged objects. In this way, things that previously had no electrical charge will gain charge.

    3. Induction

    Induction is a way of giving an electric charge to things. In a sense, induction separates the charges in the conductor. The trick is to bring a charged object closer to another object that is in a neutral state. This conductive event is often found when we study the charge of an object using an electroscope.

    Static Electricity Formula

    There are several formulas that are commonly used to solve problems involving static electricity. We will describe the formula below:

    1. Coulomb force

    Coulomb force is the magnitude of the electric force that occurs between two electrically charged objects. Different amounts of electric current will attract and the same amount of electric current will repel. Therefore, the magnitude of the pulling or repelling force can be made according to the equation: F = k q1.q2 / r2 Description: F = total force (N) k = coefficient (9 x 109 Nm2 / C2) j = distance between loads (m) q1 and q2 = charge of each particle (C)

    2. Electric field

    An electric field is an area around a charged particle that is subjected to an electric force (Coulomb force). The direction of the electric field is such that the positive charge moves away from the source charge. When the negative charge moves inward. The charger that produces electricity is called the source load. At the same time, another load placed under the influence of the electric field from the source load is called a test load. Here is the formula: E=k Q/r2 or E=F/q Description: E = electric field strength (N/C) F = coulomb force (N) r = distance from the test charge to the charge source (m) Q = source charge (C) q = test load (C)

    3. Potential

    Potential energy is the work per unit charge required to move the charge from one point to another. The formula is: V = k Q / r Description: V = potential (volts) Q = source charge (C) k = coefficient (9 x 109 Nm2 / C2) r = distance to the charge source (m) )

    4. Potential Electricity

    The energy or effort required to move an electrical charge from one point to another. The following formula is: Ep = k q1.q2 / r Description: Ep = potential energy of the test load k = coefficient (9 x 109 Nm2 / C2) r = distance to the source of the load (m) q1 and q2 = electricity product of each particle (c ).

    5. Capacitor

    A capacitor is one of the electrical devices used to store energy in a short time so that it can be released quickly. The formula is: C = ???? oA / d Description: C = capacitance of the capacitor (Farad or f) q = charge between two parts (C) V = potential difference between two parts (voltA = cross-section of the room (m2)? ??? = allowed dielectric of the material

    Example of Static Electricity

    There are several examples of electricity that we can find in everyday life, apart from the friction of a plastic ruler on the head. Whether done consciously or unconsciously, examples of static electricity are as follows.

    Common examples of static electricity in everyday life are:

    1. Lightning

    So what is the relationship between static electricity and lightning? Therefore, lightning can occur due to the transfer of electrons. When the sky is in a state of excess electrons, lightning also appears towards areas with fewer electrons. In order for the excess electrons to be immediately transferred, the lightning finally finds the object closest to the cloud. This is why lightning often strikes large objects. It can be said that lightning is an example of static electricity hazards.

    2. When combing hair

    The hair unconsciously stands up according to the movement of the comb, which can occur due to the strength of the interaction between the comb and the hair.

    3. A silk cloth is rubbed on a glass rod

    This will cause the two objects to attract each other, this is due to the jump of electrons from the glass rod to the silk cloth.

    4. A plastic ruler is rubbed on the woolen cloth

    Both objects are neutrally charged but when rubbed together electrons jump from the cloth to the ruler.

    5. Bring your hand to the TV screen that has just been turned off

    Note that hairs will appear on your arms or hands, this is due to the presence of static electricity.

    6. In the nervous system

    It turns out that electricity also flows in the human body. Evidence of this can be seen from the arrangement of the central nervous system that regulates all activities that occur in the human body. The central nervous system is the body’s coordination system consisting of millions of nerve cells or neurons.

    A neuron is the smallest structure in the nervous system, which functions to transmit electrical charges in the form of ions from dendrites to axons. Thus, it can be concluded that there is electricity in the human body.

    7. Electricity in Animals

    Electrical properties can also be found in certain animals. Where, there are animals that are able to produce electricity and there are also animals that are able to take advantage of the electric current that surrounds them. Examples of animals with electrical properties include electric eels, electric rays, and hammerhead sharks.

    8. Use of Electricity in the Environment

    In our daily life we ​​cannot separate the use of static electricity. This can be seen from several applications that can be applied in human life such as lightning rods, electrostatic precipitators for car paint, photocopiers, laser printers and many others.

    Utilization of Static Electricity in Life

    1. Paint the car

    When the paint is sprayed, the fine paint particles become charged as they rub against the air. The painted vehicle receives a charge opposite to the paint particles, so the paint droplets will be attracted to the vehicle.

    This method is useful if the vehicle has an uneven surface. Because the paint particles will stick and follow the existing electric field.

    As a result, paint drops will cover all parts of the vehicle that may be hidden from the spray layer. Thus, this method will make the paint layer evenly and reach hidden places.

    2. Photocopier

    The photocopier was first designed by an American physicist named Chester F. Carlston. This machine uses the induction load principle as well as the Coulomb force.

    The main part of the photocopier is the photoconductor plate. This panel does not transmit electricity when in a dark room. The new sheet will conduct electricity when exposed to light.

    Initially, the photoconductor plate is induced by moving a negatively charged conductor along its surface. Therefore, a plate is formed with an induced positive charge.

    If the paper to be copied is illuminated, the reflected light will hit the photoconductive plate which already contains an induction charge. As a result, the electric charge formed exactly as it is on the paper is reproduced.

    Negatively charged ink is sprayed onto the plate. The ink is then transferred to another type of paper to make a photocopy. This layer of paper will be heated so that the ink adheres strongly. Static electricity affects some electronic devices.

    3. Inkjet printers

    This printer works by spraying fine ink particles onto the surface of the paper. With several injection points, the material to be printed will show its shape.

    However, to do so, the printer must control the position of the falling ink jet by applying an electrostatic force. Small droplets of ink are charged as they are sprayed through small channels in the print head.

    Then the particle will pass through two metal plates. If both plates receive an electric potential, the ink drop will become charged.

    By adjusting the load on the plate, the printer controls the direction in which the filled ink drops fall. If the ink particles are positively charged, they will be attracted to the negatively charged plate and repelled by the positively charged plate. Thus, the ink drops will be directed upwards.

    4. Smoke collector

    Smoke collectors are useful for reducing air pollution from factory chimneys. The use of this device is achieved by installing two metal with large opposite markings on the installed factory chimney.

    Smoke particles flowing through the chimney will be induced to have an induced charge. The resulting charge is positive and negative.

    These smoke particles will attract each other to form larger and heavier particles. The increased weight will prevent particles from flying with the smoke. Particles will fall to the bottom of the chimney.

    In addition to fusing together, charged smoke particles are also attracted to active metals in the chimney.

    These particles then aggregate on the metal and form larger clumps. Therefore, the mass is easy to clean and can reduce air pollution.

    Conclusion

    A short discussion about the meaning of static electricity Not just the definition, but how the early history of the discovery of static electricity was found, the formula of static electricity, how static electricity works, examples of static electricity and its use in everyday life.

  • Meaning of Economics: Purpose, Field and Principles

    Definition of Economics – Economics as a science that studies the use of limited natural resources in the fulfillment of unlimited human needs. Economics is also a science that studies human efforts in achieving prosperity. See a more complete explanation of Economics starting from its Definition, Purpose, Areas and Principles as follows:

    A. Understanding of Economics

    Economics is the science that examines market financial behavior ranging from interest rates, exchange rates, business cycles, international trade, government policies to the efficiency of natural resource use which you can learn in the book Introduction to Economics below.

    Economics also studies the income of individuals, companies, countries and stock prices to the imbalance of the economy. By studying economics will help a person in understanding how the economic behavior of a certain society, give input in decision-making, give an understanding of the potential and limitations of the economic policy taken, to increase human sensitivity to various economic and global problems.

    Here are other definitions of Economics according to experts:

    1. Alfred Marshall

    Through his book entitled The Principle of Economics, Alfred Marshall thinks that economics is a science that studies human actions both individually and collectively and their connection in the use of material goods.

    2. HJ Davenport

    In the book “Economics of Enterprise” , HJ Davenport reveals economics as a Science that handles various problems from the point of departure of prices. Economics is also a tool that studies how the level of production can be increased so that the standard of living of the community will automatically increase as well.

    3. M. Manullang

    According to M. Manullang, economics is a science that studies how to meet the desires of people or society in order to achieve prosperity or conditions where people can meet their needs, both in the form of goods and services.

    4. Oscar Langen

    Economics according to Oscar Langen is a science that studies the administration of various resources, both small and large resources, which are then analyzed so that they can be reused for human life to the maximum and best.

    5. John Stuart Mill

    According to John Stuart Mill, economics studies the various intricacies of billing and production. Not only that, according to Stuart, economics also discusses various production and wealth distribution activities.

    6. Prof. PA Samuelson

    In the book Economics: An Introductory Analysis Prof. PA Samuelson explained that economics is a study that studies how people make choices by using limited resources which are then further processed to produce various types of goods and services to then be distributed again to various levels of society.

    7. Louis Cantori

    According to Louis Cantori, economics viewed from an Islamic point of view is economics based on various Islamic rules. For example, about the problem that guarantees the rotation of property owned by an individual.

    8. Suherman Rosyidi

    Suherman Rosyidi as a Philosopher of Indonesian origin thinks that economics is a branch of science that provides an understanding of the symptoms that arise in the community in its efforts to meet the needs of life or its efforts to achieve prosperity.

    9. Adam Smith

    Often referred to as classical economic theory. According to Adam Smith Economics as a branch of science that studies human behavior in its efforts to allocate various limited resources to achieve certain goals..

    10. Mankiw

    Mankiw believes that a person who masters Economics will improve his understanding of the various potentials and limitations of economic policy. Economics also studies how an individual then interacts with each other.

    B, Branches of Economics

    Economics as a science that studies various human activities in order to meet all the needs of life. In order to achieve this prosperity, humans will then perform economic activities such as consumption, production, and distribution. This will then give rise to various economic problems, namely the imbalance of unlimited human needs with the increasingly limited amount of goods or production. Here are some divisions of the types of economics that you need to know:

    1. Applied Economics

    Applied economics is a field of economic science that applies economic theory and principles in real situations to predict possible outcomes that focus on the practical use of economic science, especially for individuals in decision-making, policies, guidelines, or certain standards with the aim of overcoming problems that occur. Economics usually uses case studies and statistics. For example in the sphere of enterprise, monetary economy, and banking.

    Monetary Economics is a part of economics that is used to study the nature, function, and influence of money in economic activities that you can learn in the book Monetary Economics: Indonesian Case Study.

    2. Descriptive Economics

    Descriptive economics is an economic science that describes the state of the economy in society at that time. Descriptive economics itself displays data from various facts and phenomena that occur. Economics examines various images, and conditions of the economy. The data collected is variable and can be in the form of numbers, graphics, curves, or other forms of presentation that you can understand the meaning of in the Descriptive Statistics book: Vivi Silvia.

    In Indonesia, this economic science is then used by BPS (Badan Pusat Statistik) to provide an overview of the Indonesian economic conditions both macro and micro. The application of this economic knowledge was also used when dissecting the monetary crisis that occurred in Indonesia in 1998.

    3. Macro Economics

    4. Microeconomics

    Microeconomics is an economic science that studies things that are limited to an economic activity only. Including the base price and the highest price that needs to be set in order to maintain a balance between demand and supply. Because if there is a monopolist in the market then it will narrow the business opportunities of new players, so that the entrepreneurial spirit of the community will also decrease.

    Microeconomics also discusses various aspects of individuals such as the behavior of buyers or consumers as well as the behavior of individual producers. You can learn this in the book Micro Economics An Introduction.

    5. Public Economics

    As in the example of the function of the government through the point of view of the micro economy in the book Public Economy by Bambang Suprayitno.

    6. Monetary Economics

    This knowledge also helps in the implementation of a country’s monetary policy. This knowledge studies a policy issued by the government to regulate the financial stability of a country. Monetary Economics also learns about money, banking, and various other financial institutions. Aspects studied range from inflation, the amount of money in circulation, and bank interest rates.

    It can be concluded that monetary economics talks about how money works which you can learn through the book Monetary Economics: Indonesian Case Study.

    7. Economics of Human Resources

    Human Resource Economics (HR) is an economic science that studies labor production factors, starting from job opportunities, labor quality, and wage determination. Its scope ranges from population dynamics, employment, employment structure, informal-formal sector, population transition, population mobility and migration, labor demand and supply, child labor, workforce planning and population and economic development.

    The Economics of Human Resources book: In the Perspective of Development below can be used as a reference for those of you who want to learn more about economics.

    8. International Economics

    International economics is an economic science that studies the occurrence of economic activities between countries, for example at the World Trade Organization (WTO); International Monetary Fund (IMF); and the United Nations Conference on Trade and Development (UNCTAD).

    This knowledge also has an important role in the international business cycle. In addition, the theory of the international economy itself is progressing and developing according to the book International Economy by Mahyus Ekananda.

    Matters studied in international economics ranging from international trade, international balance of payments and international trade balance. Economics which will then also examine various international political events. Economic activity, and current economic problems, whether it is the latest developments regarding Brexit proposed by the United Kingdom from the European Union or the latest tariff changes in the United States. This discipline also brings together various principles and approaches of macroeconomics and microeconomics.

    9. Regional Economic Science

    Regional economics is an economic science that studies the economic interaction between a region and its development with the aim of increasing the level of the economy in a region. Regional economic knowledge itself can also be used as a medium that will help the regional government to analyze the economic problems that occur and then make policies as a solution.

    You can learn the theory and practice in economics through the book Regional Economics Theory and Practice by Mudrajad Kuncoro.

    10. Industrial Economics

    Some topics related to economics such as market structure, market competition behavior, monopolies-oligopolies can be learned in the book Industrial Economics by Muhammad Teguh.

    12. Economics of Natural Resources

    Economics that studies the problem and allocation of natural resources optimally viewed from an economic point of view covering positive and negative externalities.

    C. Field of Economics

    Economics is divided into two by Samuelson and Nordhaus, namely microeconomics and macroeconomics. Microeconomics is an economy that studies the behavior of companies and their consumers, as well as their relationship in determining prices and goods or services to be traded, and the quantity of input factors.

    Some aspects of analysis in microeconomics include Benefit Analysis, Cost Analysis, Supply Theory, Demand Theory, Elasticity, Production Theory, Price Theory. The scope of this economy examines more about producers and consumers. In addition, microeconomics also plays a role in making policies that are used as a foundation in planning various company policies in the management of their resources, for example price and wage management.

    While according to Mankiw (2014), microeconomics is a science that studies how households and companies make decisions and are able to interact in the market. Samuelson and Nordhaus (2010) explained that macroeconomics first appeared when the revolution titled “General Theory of Employment, Interest and Money” by John Maynard Keynes was published, the theory discussed the impact of the business cycle with high levels of unemployment and inflation. Macro economics helps in determining consumption and total investment, which is how banks then manage their customers’ money and interest.

    D. Principles of Economics

    The principle of economic science is used as a guide to achieve a rational comparison between the sacrifice and the result or in other words get the biggest profit with the smallest sacrifice, or with a certain sacrifice and then get the maximum possible result, the economic principle will also make a person minimize the loss that he suffering Here is a breakdown of the principles of economics that you need to know:

    1. Economic Principles in Production Activities

    2. Economic Principles in Distribution Activities

    3. Economic Principles in Consumption Activities

    E. Economic Theory and Model

    In economics, economic law is a cause-and-effect relationship between various economic activities that are interconnected, for example the law of demand and supply. Economic theory is also used as a basic summary as well as used as a basis for the implementation of various economic policies.

    It is these theories that then eventually form an economic model that helps explain an economic event. One example of the economic model itself is on the production curve that produces various concepts of diminishing returns and opportunity costs that can be applied.

    Economic method as a procedure taken to achieve certain goals is generally used to solve various economic problems based on certain theories. An example is in the decision-making method with deductive and inductive methods (decision-making based on data collected from the reality of human life.

    The reality is then experienced by families, individuals, and local communities. This reality is also studied to find efforts to fulfill needs) Meanwhile, the deductive method works on the basis of provisions, laws, or general principles that have been previously tested for truth. This method determines the steps for solving problems in accordance with the principles, principles, laws, and provisions that apply in economics.

    Actions, Motives, and Economic Principles.

    Economic action refers to every human step to meet his needs. This includes production, consumption, and distribution, while the economic motive is the force that moves people to perform economic actions.

    Not only that in the economic cycle, of course there are also economic principles that are used as thinking to achieve certain goals with the least possible sacrifice. So much information about Economics Starting from the Definition, Purpose, Field to the Principles. Hope it’s useful!

     

  • The Understanding of Dynamic Electricity Up to Its Types

    Definition of dynamic electricity – Human activities mostly depend on electricity. A variety of household furniture mostly requires electricity to be used. Electricity is something charged due to the presence or absence of electrons. It happened as a result of things rubbing against each other.

    While dynamic electricity is one of the classifications in electrical energy. Electricity can be interpreted as a condition of certain subatomic particles, such as protons and electrons that cause attraction and repulsion between the two.

    In general, electricity can be understood as a source of energy channeled through cables. Electric current arises because the electric charge flows from the positive end of the channel or cable to the negative end. Electricity is divided into two types, namely static electricity and dynamic electricity.

    Human needs in terms of electricity show that dynamic electricity is very necessary in our lives. This shows that the phenomenon of dynamic electricity plays an important role in our lives. Equipment such as televisions, refrigerators, rice cookers , computers, radios cannot turn on by themselves without being connected to electricity.

    Other examples can be found in flashlights, wall clocks, or toy cars that use batteries. The energy in the battery is the driving force of the dynamo (electric motor) in cars. While the battery in the flashlight creates a flow of electrons that work to light the lamp inside.

    Dynamic electricity is electrical charges that flow or move. Reported from Circuit Globe , dynamic electricity is electrons that move in one direction or back and forth in a conductor or what is commonly referred to as electric current. Dynamic electricity is a group of electrons that continuously flow from one point to another. The flow of electricity is similar to the flow of a flowing river, so dynamic electricity is called electric current.

    Electric current is the flow of positively charged particles that pass through a conductor or transmitter from a high potential to a low potential. Electric current can be analogized to the flow of water that occurs due to the difference in height. Water can flow from high places to low places. Likewise with dynamic electric currents that can move with potential energy differences.

    Dynamic electricity is electricity that moves or is called electric current. In dynamic electricity, the flow of charged particles in the form of electric current can produce electrical energy. Electric current flows from a point of higher potential to a point of lower potential, when the two points are connected in a closed circuit. This explanation is included in the IPA Class IX Electricity book .

    The formula for electric current is I = Q/t where I is the electric current, Q is the electric charge, and t is time. The largest and smallest unit of electric current is the Ampere (A).

    Quoting from the Automotive Basic Technology book , dynamic electricity can be said to be the state of free electron flow that comes from electrons that have separated from their respective atoms. Electrons will move through an object that has the properties of a conductor.

    When free electrons move in a fixed direction, then this dynamic electricity is called direct current (DC) electricity. When the direction of movement of the amount of current is periodic over time, then this dynamic electricity is called alternating current (AC). Dynamic electricity is electricity that can move or flow in an electrical network. The electric current is the flow of electrical charge that passes through the transmission wire every unit of time.

    Dynamic electricity can also be explained in detail as follows:

    1. Dynamic electricity is the flow of electric charge through a conductor (electric current).
    2. Dynamic electricity is electricity that moves or flows in an electrical network.
    3. Dynamic electricity is produced from a power source or power plant.
    4. Dynamic electricity occurs because of direct current and alternating current.
    5. Electric current can only turn on in a closed electrical circuit.

    Electric Current

    Based on the book Learning Concepts of Electricity and Magnets, electric current is divided into two, namely:

    1. Direct Current (DC)

    Direct current or direct current (DC) is a current whose current is always fixed and constant all the time and has only one direction, which is positive to negative. DC electricity generating sources are divided into two, namely:

    a. Primary Elements

    A primary element is an element that cannot be reloaded when its load is exhausted. When the electrical voltage of the element runs out, it can no longer be used. An example of a primary element is a dry battery.

    b. Secondary Elements

    A secondary element is an element that can be reloaded if its load is exhausted. This causes the electric current to flow back to the element. Examples of secondary elements are accumulators and rechargeable batteries.

    2. Alternating Current (AC)

    Alternating current or alternating current (AC) is a current that in its management moves back and forth, both in direction and magnitude. The source of AC electric current cannot be determined as positive and negative poles even though the electricity also has two ends of the transmitter or two ends of the channel.

    This is because the AC electric current will flow alternately between the two ends, sometimes being in a positive or negative position. Meanwhile, the number of back-and-forth flows traveled in each second is called frequency.

    An example of an AC electric current source is PLN electricity which has a frequency of 60 Hz. That is, in every second, the current has flowed back and forth 60 times. The electricity in the house also includes AC electricity. Other examples of AC power sources are dynamo and electric generator.

    Ohm’s Law

    As explained in the book Things you need to know about Electricity, electric current can flow in an electrical circuit if there is a potential difference in the closed circuit. The relationship between electric current strength and electric potential difference was first studied by Georg Simon Ohm. The results of his research are now known as Ohm’s Law.

    Ohm’s law explains that the connection between the potential difference or voltage of a current source, the strength of the electric current, and the resistance of a network. Ohm’s law states that if the voltage in a circuit is increased, then the current will increase, and vice versa. For example, when the voltage is doubled, the current will also double.

    That is, the current is proportional to the voltage. If the voltage remains constant, then a smaller conductor resistance will produce a larger current because the strength of the current is inversely proportional to the electrical resistance. Based on Ohm’s Law, the formula for electric current strength is I = V/R . I is the current, V is the voltage, and R is the resistance.

    V is the symbol of the potential difference with the unit of Volts, R is the resistance with the unit of Ohm (Ω), and I is the current strength with the unit of Ampere.

    Types of Dynamic Electric Currents

    As reported by Solar Energy , electric current is divided into two, namely direct current (DC) and alternating current (AC).

    Direct Current

    Direct current (DC) is a type of electric current when electrons flow in only one direction. An example of the type of dynamic electric current is the current produced by photovoltaic panels.

    Alternating Electric Current

    Alternating current (AC) is when electrons change direction repeatedly, starting from positive to negative. Alternating current or AC is a type of electricity that is often used in the homes we live in.

    Dynamic Electrical Characteristics

    1. Dynamic electricity consists of electric charge that moves to produce an electric current.
    2. To keep the load flowing, agents are needed to do the work needed to keep the load moving.
    3. In the International System of Units, charge is measured in coulombs (C) and current in coulombs/second, a unit called ampere (A). A current of 1 A means that the cross-sectional area of ​​the conductor flows 1 C every second.
    4. Electric current needs a closed path to maintain its flow. This strip is called a circuit and must be closed, if the current flowing through the strip is open, it will stop.
    5. All moving charges produce a magnetic field, including current-carrying wires.
    6. In principle, the direction of the current is the movement followed by the electrons in the conductor leaving the negative pole of the battery and going towards the positive.

    Example of Dynamic Electricity Application

    Every electrical energy, be it dynamic electricity or static electricity has a role in our daily life. Here are some examples of the application of dynamic electricity according to the Read Physics website , among which are:

    1. Electrical Network

    Dynamic electricity is present in the current that circulates in any electrical circuit, for example in things around us, such as flashlights, electric stoves, telephones, and all types of equipment that we use.

    2. Electric Transmission System

    The electrical energy transmission system uses dynamic electrical energy in the form of alternating current, because it is easier to conduct over long distances.

    3. Atmospheric Electricity

    Electric current is produced in the earth’s atmosphere, especially in the ionosphere, ultraviolet radiation from the sun comes from charged particles that flow in large circuits of electric current at high altitudes.

    4. Terrestrial Electricity

    Electric current also circulates in the earth’s crust as a result of chemical reactions that occur in the soil layer. Earth has its own magnetic field.

    One of them is that the flow of molten iron in the core of the planet produces an electric current, and this is responsible for creating the earth’s magnetic field.

    5. Aurora in the Polar Regions

    The polar aurora is a region of the night sky with bright and beautiful colors, which appears near the poles. This phenomenon is caused by dynamic electricity, because the flow of charged particles continuously comes from the sun, which is known as the solar wind.

    When these particles approach the Earth, this magnetic field deflects them, thus emitting light and creating a luminous effect called an aurora.

    6. Functions of the Nervous System

    The electric current in our body can process stimulation from the outside so that it can be received by the five senses and then transformed into information through the nervous system and travels to the brain with electrical impulses.

    In this case, a small electric current in our body is needed to carry information. In the same way, muscle movement depends on electrical impulses that run from the brain that carry movement orders to our body.

    7. Defibrillator

    Dynamic electricity can be very damaging to the human body, a current of 1 A can be fatal. But if used correctly, electric current helps save lives, as in the case of defibrillators.

    A defibrillator is a device that passes through a large capacitor, then conducts dynamic electricity to the heart, to help restore rhythm after a heart attack.

    8. Battery Use on Laptops

    A laptop can turn on and work because there is a battery inside the laptop. The flow of electrons from the battery moves to the laptop, this flow of electrons will stop flowing until the laptop battery is used up and finally the laptop dies and does not work.

    9. Use of Batteries to Light a Flashlight

    A lamp connected to a battery with a conductor wire. This causes the flow of electrons from the battery to move to the lamp through the conductor wire and cause the lamp to light up brightly.

    10. Use of Electric Bells

    An electric bell that is connected to the battery also with a conductor wire. The appearance of the flow of electrons from the battery moving to the bell through the transmission wire can cause the electric bell to ring. Batteries have a positive pole and a negative pole.

    The positive pole is the end of the battery with a small protrusion. The negative pole is the flat end of the battery. When the two poles are connected with a cable, it will produce electrons flowing from the positive pole to the negative pole.

    11. Use of Power Bank

    The phenomenon of dynamic electricity can actually be found in a power bank. Through the power storage device, electricity will flow to the cell phone battery. At that moment, there was an electric current.

    12. Use of Batteries to Move Cars

    Another example of dynamic electricity is the use of batteries to move cars. Similar to the working principle of batteries in other types of goods, electricity will flow when the switch on cars is turned on. Both ends of the battery that contains electricity will be connected to the electric motor, so that the cars can move.

    Benefits of Dynamic Electricity

    Dynamic electricity is a type of electricity that is often found in everyday life. However, not a few question the use of dynamic electricity to support various activities. Collected from the same source, here are four benefits of dynamic electricity for everyday life.

    1. As a source of energy

    Electricity is known as a source of energy. Because electricity is an energy producer. Therefore, electricity is often used as an energy source for various types of household appliances that use electricity.

    2. Light Producer

    Electricity through lamps can function as a light producer. Because, there is a change in electrical energy into light.

    3. Heat Producer

    Adapted from the book Getting to Know Electrical Safety by Andi Tiara, dynamic electricity can also be used as a heat generator and applied to devices that use heating elements. As for how it works, electric current flows through the nickel to produce heat.

    4. Motion Generator

    Electricity in general is also useful for producing motion on some specific types of things. The way it works is the flow of electricity is directed to the driving motor that produces movement.

    Basically, the electricity we use today has many benefits. In fact, it can be said that almost all life in this world depends on electricity. Thus the discussion about the meaning of dynamic electricity , hopefully all the discussions that have been explained above can provide benefits for Reader.

     

  • Meaning of License and Types of License in the Business World

    Meaning of License – In the business world we have often heard the term license. Whether it’s a business in the form of selling goods or offering a service, licensing is so important. Why is it so important to have a license in the business world?

    Simply put, a license can protect the business you run. So that you will also better understand what a license is. Then you can read the explanation in this article.

    This article will explain everything related to the license. Ranging from the meaning of the license, benefits to the types of the license itself.

    Definition of License

    Before going into a deeper discussion, of course the first thing we will discuss first is the meaning of the license itself. A license is the granting of permission to carry out a production process, both in the form of goods and services.

    Where the product or service has previously been patented by its creator for the first time. In addition, licenses are often referred to as the granting of permission to intellectual property. Where later the licensor will give a permit (license) to the recipient in order to be able to use it for production or service needs.

    In the license there is also a term license agreement. A license agreement can be done for two or more parties. Where later one party will be the licensor and the other party will be the recipient of the license.

    Later, the licensee can easily take advantage of the permission to produce goods or services legally. The licensor is usually referred to as the licensor. While the license recipient is referred to as the licensee.

    Types of Licenses

    Once you know the meaning of license. Then the next is an explanation about the types of licenses. Where actually licenses are divided into several types. Each type of license always has its own importance.

    Therefore, for those of you who want to make a license, it’s best to know the types of licenses first so that you don’t make a mistake in making the license.

    1. HKI License (Intellectual Property Rights)

    The first type of license is HKI or intellectual property rights license. Among other types of licenses. Maybe you will also hear this type of license more often.

    In this type of IPR license there are some rules that apply. For example, such as the territory of use, renewal and some other rules that have previously been determined by the owner of the license.

    A simple example is a license to computer software. Where later the licensor can grant rights to the user of their software.

    2. Bulk License

    Next there is a type of mass license, most of this type of license will be easier to find on computer software. In detail, the type of mass license written on computer software is UELA or End User License Agreement.

    Simply put, the type of mass license is the granting of a license from the licensee to an individual in order to be able to use the computer software.

    3. License of Goods and Services

    Further there is a license for goods and services. Those who hold this license can grant permits or licenses to individuals and other companies. The purpose of doing this is so that individuals or other companies can sell products and services that are under the license holder.

    Both individuals and companies can sell products or services from the main licensee without having to fear any legal claims.

    4. License of Artwork or Character

    The same is the case with goods and services licenses. This type of license for artwork or characters can also be given to other parties in order to be able to sell a product that has artwork or characters in it.

    5. Education License

    Finally there is a license in the field of education. This type of license is usually in the form of an academic degree. For example, a university is a licensee. The university can give its license to its students so that they can gain knowledge in a certain period of time at the university. In addition, a license in the field of education can also be given in the form of an award.

    Well those are some types of licenses that you often find in everyday life. Further, Reader can learn more about the advantages of having a license.

    Licensing Advantages

    It should be known that having a license also has some advantages, you know. Both for goods and services and other types of licenses have their own advantages. Well, if indeed you don’t really know what the advantages of the license are. Then the explanation below can help you.

    1. Those who receive a license can use the trademark legally.
    2. The licensor will get a royalty that has previously been agreed upon the amount to be paid.
    3. Licensors no longer need to incur additional costs in order to commercialize their products.
    4. The licensee will find it easier to gain trust from consumers. Especially if the brand they use is already famous.

    Lack of License

    Licensing does not only have advantages. But the license also has some drawbacks. Well, so that you can also better understand what are the shortcomings of the license. Here is a complete explanation about it.

    1. When the license has been sold, then the previous license owner has lost complete control over the product.
    2. Those who receive a license also have the risk of product sales.
    3. Although you can get royalties, everything takes time.
    4. When the agreement has been violated by those who received the license. So there is a high possibility of a competition. Of course, this can also threaten the legitimacy of the license owner’s trademark.

    License Legal Policy

    License also has its own legal basis. In 2018, in July to be exact, the government issued new regulations related to license agreements, namely Government Regulation No. 36 of 2018 on the Registration of Intellectual Property License Agreements (PP 36/2018).

    This license has been regulated by other legal regulations that are included in the field of intellectual property rights. It has also been mentioned in Article 2 paragraph (1) of PP 36/2018 that registration of licenses can be done on intellectual property objects in several areas such as:

    1. Copyright and related rights
    2. Patent
    3. Brand
    4. Industrial design
    5. Integrated circuit layout design
    6. Trade secret
    7. Plant varieties

    Prohibitions Contained in the License Agreement

    In the license agreement there are several prohibitions as explained in Article 6 PP 36/2018. Where in the license agreement it is not allowed to do or have the content of some things like the explanation below.

    1. License agreements made can harm Indonesia’s economy as well as Indonesia’s national interests.
    2. Licensing agreements can create restrictions that may hinder the ability of Indonesians to transfer, master and develop technology.
    3. The license agreement may result in unfair competition.
    4. A license agreement that is made contrary to legal regulations, religious values, morality and public order.

    From the explanation of some points above, you can make sure again before making a license agreement. Rechecking the contents of the license agreement file will make it easier for you to avoid various risks of violations.

    Creation of License Agreement

    The first thing you must know before making a license agreement is the expiration date of the Intellectual Property Rights. Where it is very important because you cannot make or accept a license agreement as long as the Intellectual Property Rights that have been licensed have expired and have been deleted.

    In addition, the process of making a license agreement must be in Indonesian. Then what if a license agreement is made with a foreign party? License agreements can still be done with foreign parties as long as the foreign language used also has an Indonesian translation. This has also been regulated in Article 4 paragraph (2) PP 36/2018.

    In Article 7 paragraph (2) PP 36/2018 has also provided a guide related to the contents of the license agreement. Some of the contents that should be contained in the license are as follows.

    1. Date, month, year, and place the agreement was signed.
    2. Name and address of licensor and licensee.
    3. Object of the license agreement.
    4. The terms of the license, whether exclusive or non-exclusive, including sublicense.
    5. Duration of the license agreement.
    6. Territory of validity of the license agreement.
    7. The party that pays the annual fee for the patent.

    Registration of License Agreement

    Making a license agreement is arguably not as simple as when you make a cooperation agreement that only requires signatures from both parties. However, the creation of a license agreement requires several processes first.

    In Article 10 paragraph (1) of PP 36/2018 it has been explained that in making a license agreement you must submit a written application to the Minister through the Directorate General of Intellectual Property using Indonesian.

    Later, the application can be made through electronic or non-electronic media. In addition, in order for the submitted application to be stronger, there are also some requirements that must be completed first.

    Some of the requirements to complete the application for making a license agreement are as follows.

    1. Copy of License Agreement;
    2. Official Citation of Patent Certificate, Trademark Certificate, Industrial Design Certificate, Integrated Circuit Layout Design Certificate, proof of ownership of Inventions or Related Rights, or proof of ownership of licensed Trade Secrets;
    3. Power of Attorney, if the application is submitted by Power of Attorney; and
    4. Proof of payment of fees.

    Term of License Agreement

    As in the form of an agreement in general that has a valid period. The license agreement also has a validity period. The period of validity of the license agreement depends on the period of the license agreement that has been agreed upon by the parties concerned.

    According to Article 17 paragraph (2) of PP 36/2018, when the validity period of the license agreement has ended. Then you can apply for re-registration as long as the license agreement will also be renewed or followed up during its validity.

    The difference between a license and a franchise

    Although it looks the same between license and franchise. However, the two actually have differences that are quite prominent. Compared to license, maybe you hear the term franchise more.

    However, for the difference between the two, either license or franchise, you can read the full explanation below.

    1. Definition of License and Franchise

    From the meaning, both license and franchise have differences. Franchise itself is an agreement or bond between two or more parties. Where later one of the parties can grant a benefit right and use the right from the existing intellectual property.

    Simply put, a franchise is a grant of authority for a brand or product so that it can be resold according to an agreement or agreement that has been made previously. In addition, the franchise process cannot be done casually. There must be a notary and have approval from the Ministry of Law and Human Rights.

    As for the license itself, it is the granting of a permit so that production actions can be carried out both for products and services. Which products and services have been patented by the first inventor.

    From the explanation above it can be concluded that franchise is more towards consumption. As for the license itself, it is more directed to the production process.

    2. License and Franchise Legal Policy

    Next, in terms of legal basis, both licenses and franchises have different legal bases. The legal basis of franchise is article 5 of government regulation 42/2007. Where the content is to regulate the personal data of the parties, types of intellectual property rights, business activities, rights and obligations of each party, facilities to marketing provided by the franchisor to the recipient, the duration of the agreement, compensation payment procedures, up to extension and termination procedures agreement.

    Then for the basis of license law is government regulation 36/2018. Where the rules used have content about the recording of intellectual property license agreements. The content regulates copyright and related rights, patents, trademarks, industrial designs and layouts, and trade secrets.

    3. Rights and Obligations

    Both franchise and license both have different rights and obligations. In franchise there is the term franchisor which is used for the owner or franchisor. While the term franchisee is the term given to those franchisees.

    Those who become franchisors have an obligation to provide names, recipes, products and various matters related to the sale of franchises in accordance with the agreement that has been made previously.

    While those who receive a franchise have the authority to use brands, products and recipes from the grantor in order to get results. Then for the obligation on the part of the franchisee is to provide the company so that the franchise agreement can take place.

    Then for the license itself there is a term licensor or creator is a person or a group who discovers or creates a product that has special properties. Creations from the licensor have various forms. Starting from art, the field of science, literature that is born from inspiration, ability, thought to imagination that is created in real form.

    Then there is also the term licensee or copyright holder. Where the licensee is the party that legally receives the copyright from the licensor. Simply put, the obligation of the licensor is to grant a license to the licensee in order to be able to produce a product or service.

    Which standards and quality have been determined by the licensor. Then for the licensee himself, he must produce and sell using copyrighted brand products and give royalties in accordance with the previous agreement.

    That’s some explanation about the meaning of the license and other things related to the license that you can read in full above. At least by reading the explanation above, it will be easier for you to make a license agreement. 

  • Understanding Organic Waste, Types, Characteristics, and How to Process It

    Definition of Organic Waste, Types, Characteristics, and examples of organic waste – Waste is one of the big problems in every country. In fact, over time, the amount of waste has not decreased, especially organic waste. Do you know what organic waste actually is? 

    Organic waste is material waste or garbage that can be recycled and comes from living things, such as food waste, waste from living things, or plant waste.

    In other words, organic waste is waste material or garbage obtained from production processes or activities, both activities in the household and industrial fields. This organic waste is waste or garbage that is easily decomposed through several natural processes.

    Why can it be easily decomposed?

    That’s because organic waste contains chemical substances that can be said to be stable so that this organic waste will be more easily buried or settled in the ground, lakes, rivers, even the sea.

    This type of organic waste decomposes faster in a short period of time until it finally decomposes into a small substance, but does not cause an odor. However, organic waste will cause unpleasant odors, even diseases if not managed properly.

    For that reason, often the manufacture of fertilizer utilizes material from organic waste to be used as compost.

    When viewed from the type, organic waste is divided into two, namely wet organic waste and dry organic waste. For a complete explanation, the following will be explained regarding wet organic waste and dry organic waste.

    Types of Organic Waste

    Organic waste is divided into two types, namely wet organic waste and dry organic waste. Here is the explanation.

    1. Wet Organic Waste

    Wet organic waste is one of the types of organic waste in which water content is stored at a high and abundant rate. Typically, wet organic waste has a low level of hardness or can be said to be softer so that bacteria are also easier to process and destroy waste or garbage.

    There are some examples of wet organic waste that you need to know and understand, among them.

    Examples of wet organic waste: food waste

    Wet organic waste from food waste, namely vegetable waste, corn husks, rotting fruit waste, onion skins, seeds, banana skins, straw and the like. The rest of the ingredients that have been mentioned, we often find them for cooking ingredients in the kitchen.

    That type of organic waste must be separated from other waste because we can still use it and process it again, for example, it can be processed into compost, or it can also be processed into something interesting (of course a drying process is required first).

    Examples of wet organic waste: excreta of living things

    Wet organic waste from the excrement of living things can be recycled to be used as manure that can be beneficial for plants at home. Usually, manure is produced from animal excrement such as chicken excrement, cow excrement, or goat excrement.

    Maybe you will ask, why should it be processed into manure? That is because manure contains micro and macro nutrients that are good for the soil so that when it is used for plantations, the plants will flourish.

    Organic fertilizers that have been tested for their superiority, are not only useful for fertilizing plants, but also for improving nutrients and restoring soil fertility.

    You can process your own environmentally friendly non-chemical fertilizers by making use of agricultural waste, animal husbandry waste, and even household waste.

    This book completely explains how to make solid and liquid organic fertilizers, as well as their application for agriculture, animal husbandry, and fisheries.

    2. Dry Organic Waste

    In contrast to wet organic waste, dry organic waste generally keeps water content at a rate that tends to be small. This causes dry organic waste to take longer to break down so that it can be recycled.

    Here are some examples of dry organic waste that is difficult to decompose, among them.

    Examples of dry organic waste: logs

    Typically, logs are sourced from felled trees. As we know that logs are very difficult to destroy, it even takes a long time, even though we have piled or buried them at the bottom of the ground. An effective way to make the process of destroying logs faster is to cut the logs into smaller sizes.

    Examples of dry organic waste: eggshells

    Eggshells become one of the household food wastes that belong to dry organic waste. That is because the eggshell has a material that is hard enough to cause the recycling process to take a long time. That way, even in its processing it needs better caution.

    Examples of dry organic waste: coconut shells

    No wonder when coconut shells are included in dry organic waste. That is because the coconut shell has very little water content, then the texture is also very hard. Then, the coconut shell also takes a long time to disintegrate.

    That can be proven when you are visiting a beach, then see a coconut shell that is very dry, but the shell is still very hard and not completely destroyed.

    There are various types of fertilizers that make farmers and garden operators have many options in determining which fertilizer is the cheapest or the easiest. However, due to the large variety of fertilizers, sometimes farmers and garden operators find it difficult to decide which fertilizer to use because they do not know it for sure.

    So through this book will be discussed and introduced about solid organic fertilizer and how to make it.

    Characteristics of Organic Waste

    There is an easy way to distinguish which is organic waste and which is not, namely by recognizing and understanding its characteristics or characteristics. The following will briefly explain the characteristics of organic waste.

    1. Generally, organic waste has a high water content. During the decomposition process, the water content found in the waste will evaporate until it finally dries up.
    2. Organic waste comes from the waste of natural materials which, when it is the result of human processing, does not go through a long process and contains many chemical substances.
    3. Waste tends to decompose easily, without having to go through various processing processes. That can be proven when you find waste or garbage that is about to be destroyed even though it is only left for a few periods without undergoing various processes.
    4. Microbes or decomposing germs that are in or at the bottom of the soil are able to destroy waste or garbage. In other words, when burying or burying organic waste in the ground in the right way, the condition inside or the bottom of the soil will not be contaminated.

    Benefits of Organic Waste

    Maybe you have thought that waste or garbage has absolutely no use or benefit. That thought is not accurate. That is because garbage or organic waste certainly has many benefits that can be used as a source of income when it is processed into a useful form or product.

    What’s more, the utilization can minimize the amount of waste in landfills or final disposal sites. Still don’t believe it? See the following explanation regarding some of the benefits of organic waste.

    1. Organic Waste can be Processed into Organic Fertilizer or Compost

    If you have a hobby of gardening and planting plants in your yard, you can use organic waste that has been processed into compost as a fertilizer for your plants.

    Make use of organic waste, such as vegetable waste, fruit waste which is then processed into compost. For the process of making this compost or organic fertilizer, it is not complicated.

    2. Organic Waste as Soil Fertilizer

    In addition to being used for the manufacture of organic fertilizers or compost, organic waste can be used as a soil fertilizer. How to do it? You just plant or bury garbage or organic waste in the ground.

    Later, the organic waste will decompose and provide nutrients that can fertilize the soil so that the plants you have also grow healthier.

    3. Organic Waste as Animal Feed

    Organic waste can also be used for animal feed. You can directly use waste or organic waste as animal feed, for example, goat, buffalo or cow feed.

    In addition to being used as animal feed, it turns out that organic waste can also be used and processed into pellets for chicken and fish feed. The high nutrients in organic waste can make livestock grow healthier.

    4. Organic waste becomes a source of electricity and biogas

    Furthermore, the benefit of organic waste is that it can be processed into a source of electricity and biogas. Organic waste that can be forgiven as a source of electricity and biogas material, among them the excrement of living creatures, tofu, and tempeh.

    How to do it? The trick is to prepare a media or a closed container to be used as a reservoir for the gas that has been added to water, then stir the two mixtures so that the manufacturing or processing process can run smoothly and quickly.

    5. Organic waste can be processed into handicrafts

    Some people, including you, may think that what can be processed into handicrafts is only inorganic waste. Although, organic waste can also be used, lol.

    Organic waste of a type of hyacinth plant can be dried and burned which is then processed into a beautiful bag. Not only that, coconut shells can also be processed and used for tableware, such as small bowls, cups, and others.

    This book will discuss step by step how to make your own liquid organic fertilizer with existing ingredients, and of course with a lighter cost than having to keep buying artificial fertilizer.

    How to Process Organic Waste

    After knowing some of the benefits of organic waste, it’s time to find out how to process it. The following will briefly explain how to process organic waste that you can follow at home.

    How to Process Organic Waste into Compost Fertilizer

    Before entering the manufacturing stage, prepare the necessary tools and materials first, namely media or a large container with a lid (you can use a bucket or a large barrel), gloves, household waste (you can use vegetable or other food waste), soil , enough water, chaff charcoal, agricultural lime, and EM4 fertilizer liquid for additional ingredients.

    Now, enter the stage of making organic waste into compost. First, prepare organic waste or household waste to be processed into compost or organic fertilizer. Then, separate organic waste, such as vegetable or food waste and plastic waste. That is because it is the organic waste that is to be used to make compost.

    Next, prepare the large container or media that was prepared earlier. Remember, the container or media to be used must have a lid. That is so that the fertilizer to be made will not be contaminated with outside air. Then, put enough soil into the container, make sure the container has also been filled with organic waste. For the thickness itself, you can adjust it to the media or container as well as the amount of organic waste used.

    Pour and flush the surface of the soil with water, just enough. Add the organic waste that has been mixed with husk charcoal (this is only optional), and agricultural lime into the container or media earlier.

    Try to make sure that the waste is stored evenly. In other words, the thickness between the litter and the soil should be equal. Then, pour and flush with water that has been mixed with EM4. then, add more soil to the container. The soil here serves as a garbage cover. Finally, close the container tightly and let it sit for approximately 21 days or three weeks.

    However, there are some things to be aware of when you make compost or organic fertilizer yourself at home. First, make sure that the container for making compost is not contaminated by rainwater and other animals. Then, do not leave the container exposed to sunlight.

    Well, when all that is done, you can immediately use the compost or organic fertilizer that you have made to cultivate various types of plants or plants in your yard.

    How to Process Organic Waste into Biogas

    Biogas is produced from the decomposition of organic matter by anaerobic bacteria, ie bacteria or germs that live and grow in dense air. Typically, all types of organic matter managed will produce biogas. However, only solid and homogeneous liquid organic matter is capable of producing biogas.

    There are three types of materials that promise to be managed as household biogas raw materials in Indonesia, among them organic waste, animal or human excrement, and liquid waste. The following will be explained related to the process of making household biogas.

    First, mix organic waste with water, the ratio is 1:1. Then, put the biogas material into the reactor through the filling point of 2,000 liters, then there will be a biogas production process inside the reactor.

    After approximately 10 days the biogas reactor and biogas container will expand and harden. That is because of the biogas produced. Biogas can be used as fuel and biogas stoves can be used.

    Then, don’t forget to shake the biogas reactor occasionally so that complete decomposition occurs and the gas at the bottom will rise to the top. Do the same at each reactor filling.

    For the next filling of biogas material can be done every day, ie every morning and afternoon as much as 40 liters. As for the waste from the processing of biogas material in the form of mud, it will come out by itself or spontaneously every time the biogas material is filled. Finally, the waste from the processing of the biogas material can finally be used directly as organic fertilizer. That way, biogas can be used for household needs.

    That is the information about Organic Waste, ranging from types, characteristics, benefits to how to process organic waste. If Reader is interested and wants to expand knowledge related to organic waste processing or the like, of course you can find, buy, and read the book on Sinaumedia.com and Sinaumedia Digital because Sinaumedia is always a #SahabatTanpaBatas for those of you who want to gain knowledge.

    Hopefully this article can add to your insight, yes!

    This book provides an introduction to organic farming and organic pesticides that can be made by yourself, the ingredients are simple and available around us. In addition to being environmentally friendly, organic pesticides can also be a business opportunity. A hassle-free way to make it can be practiced anytime and anywhere.

  • Definition of Domestic Waste & Examples of Domestic Waste

    Definition of Domestic Waste & Examples of Domestic Waste – Waste has become one of the long-lasting problems and is quite difficult to overcome because it will continue to exist following the development of human life. Humans will produce waste from their various activities. Starting from industrial activities, agricultural activities, to daily activities that humans do will produce waste. The waste that is currently the most produced by humans is domestic waste. Domestic waste is part of the waste or waste produced from various human activities. Domestic waste can come from households, schools, accommodation, restaurants, offices, markets, malls, and other similar facilities.

    Types and Examples of Domestic Waste

    Domestic waste is classified into two types, namely liquid waste and solid waste. Here is the explanation.

    1. Domestic Liquid Waste

    Domestic liquid waste comes from various human activities or daily needs, such as water used for bathing, water used for washing clothes, water used for washing tableware, liquid food waste, and human excrement. The disposal of domestic liquid waste needs to be well managed because not a few of these types of waste contain chemicals, such as detergents, bath soap, and oil, so they can cause damage to the environment.

    2. Domestic Solid Waste

    Domestic solid waste comes from various materials or items that are left over and are no longer needed. Solid waste that is disposed of carelessly will cause pollution and damage to the environment. Domestic solid waste is divided into two types, namely organic waste and inorganic waste.

    Here is an ebook about creative creations using used paper and newspapers.

    1) Domestic Organic Waste

    Organic waste is waste that comes from garbage or food waste, such as fruit, vegetables, chicken, and rice. Discarded organic waste will undergo decay and decompose by itself.

    2) Domestic Inorganic Waste

    Inorganic waste is waste that comes from materials or goods that are difficult or even cannot be decomposed through biological processes, such as iron, bottles, plastic, glass, household appliances, and electronic equipment. Inorganic waste that is piled up and disposed of carelessly will have a bad impact by polluting and disturbing the scenery and comfort of the environment.

    Impact of Domestic Waste

    If domestic waste is disposed of without prior management, it can cause various adverse effects on the environment and surrounding communities. Here are some of the negative impacts that can be caused by domestic waste disposal.

    1. Impact of Domestic Waste on health

    Disposing of domestic waste without prior management can have a negative impact on human health. Solid waste that is thrown carelessly on the surface of the ground will undergo decay. Waste that undergoes decay can produce poisonous gases, such as methane, sulfuric acid, and ammonia. This type of waste can also cause pollution to water and the environment if it is dumped in waters, such as rivers or seas. This type of domestic waste can cause various health disorders, such as diarrhea, itching, to kidney and liver disorders.

    In addition, domestic waste water originating from toilets can also cause various diseases, such as diarrhea, cholera, and typhus, because it contains E. Coli bacteria. This toilet waste water needs to be managed well. The distance between the well and the septic tank must be far enough because otherwise, waste water can absorb into the well. Well water contaminated by waste water will contain bacteria that can spread if used for bathing, brushing teeth, washing dishes, and other activities that use well water without going through the cooking process.

    2. The Impact of Domestic Waste on the Environment

    Disposing of domestic waste without prior management can cause pollution and damage to the environment. The disposal of domestic waste containing chemicals, such as detergents, on the soil surface can affect the level of acidity/pH of the soil which will affect the absorption of nutrients and plant growth. Waste with chemical content dumped in the river will damage or even kill the plants and animals that live in the river. This happens because the wastewater that contains domestic chemicals will reduce the amount of oxygen in the river water, thus damaging the quality of the river water. This situation will affect the damage to the ecosystem in the river in the long term.

    3. The impact of Domestic Waste on aesthetics

    The disposal of domestic waste without prior management can cause unpleasant odors or foul odors that will disturb the sense of smell. Indiscriminate disposal of waste will also cause the environment to become shabby and dirty so that it is not pleasant to look at.

    How to Reduce Domestic Waste

    Domestic waste has various adverse effects on the environment and human life. Therefore, there is a need for efforts to reduce the amount of domestic waste. Here are some ways that can be done to reduce the amount of domestic waste.

    1. Reduce Electricity Consumption

    Reducing the use or saving electricity can reduce the amount of domestic waste produced by electronic goods. Ways to save electricity can be done by always turning off electronic items that are not in use, turning off lights during the day by taking advantage of sunlight, and using more energy-efficient electronic items, such as LED lights.

    2. Reducing the Use of Air Conditioning

    Reducing the use of air conditioning or AC can reduce the amount of domestic waste because this device can produce waste in the form of freon or CFC substances, which can cause environmental pollution and result in the depletion of the ozone layer. The use of air conditioning can be reduced by taking advantage of natural air from windows and air ventilation in the house.

    4. Quit Using Plastic Bags

    Plastic is one of the most common domestic wastes. Plastic waste, as inorganic waste that is very difficult to decompose, can cause environmental damage. Therefore, replacing the use of plastic bags with shopping bags that are more environmentally friendly, such as shopping bags made of cloth and canvas, is very necessary to reduce the amount of domestic plastic waste.

    Domestic Waste Management

    Efforts to manage domestic waste accurately are very necessary to overcome the impact of pollution and environmental damage. Domestic waste management can be done according to each type. The following is an explanation of domestic waste management.

    1. Domestic Liquid Waste Management

    One form of management that can be done to reduce pollution from domestic liquid waste is to use a Bio Septic Tank . Bio septic tanks can be used to accommodate domestic liquid waste so that it can reduce environmental pollution. Bio Septic Tank has a large enough capacity and is equipped with a filtering device that can reduce the smell of dirt and avoid soil pollution. Bio septic tank is made of thick fiber so that it is able to prevent leakage from the waste stored in it.

    Another way that can be done to manage domestic liquid waste is to manage greywater. Greywater is a domestic liquid waste that comes from several liquid wastes, other than toilet waste. Greywater can be produced from used shower water, used water for washing clothes, used water for washing equipment, and others. Greywater Processingcan be done by making an organic filter tank so that domestic liquid waste is not wasted directly on the ground or waterways. The filter tank can be filled with sand, soil, and filtering plants, such as water hyacinth, kangkung, and marigold, which will purify and reduce water pollution. The channeling of water used for bathing and washing to the filter tank is done gradually. The water used to wash the tableware will go into the grease trap first. Greywater can reduce environmental pollution and can be used as an alternative water source to overcome the problem of the amount of water that continues to decrease in urban areas. Water produced by management greywater managementcan be used for needs other than eating and drinking, such as cleaning toilets, washing toilets, and watering plants.

    Here is an ebook on domestic waste water management.

    2. Domestic Solid Waste Management

    Domestic solid waste management can be done with the following processes.

    1) Sorting

    Sorting is one of the most common methods of solid waste management. This method is done by sorting or separating organic waste (wet waste) and inorganic waste (dry waste). Organic waste (wet waste) can be processed into organic fertilizer or compost. Meanwhile, inorganic waste (dry waste) can be sorted back to be given to scavengers or recycled to produce valuable goods.

    Here is an ebook on easy ways to make organic fertilizer.

    2) Container

    Containerization is a temporary waste storage activity independently before being transported or transferred to a Temporary Storage Site (TPS) or a Final Processing Site (TPA). Containment is done by providing a container to separate inorganic waste based on its type or material,

    3) Collection

    The process of collecting solid waste is carried out by sanitation workers who come to each place to transport or transfer waste to the Temporary Storage Place (TPS). The solid waste collection process can also be done in another way, namely through direct communal. Direct communal is the process of collecting solid waste at each communal point to be directly transported to the Final Processing Site (TPA) without being moved first.

    4) Transportation

    The process of transporting solid waste in direct communal collection is done by using transport vehicles such as compactor trucks and arm roll trucks . Each vehicle has a capacity of 6 m3 and 4 m3. Compactor trucks have the advantage of compressing solid waste so that it can increase its carrying capacity. These two solid waste transport vehicles are equipped with hydraulic pull arms so that the loading or unloading of solid waste can be done more easily without direct contact with the waste.

    5) Temporary Shelter (TPS)

    Solid waste that has previously been collected and transported will be taken to the Temporary Storage Site (TPS). TPS is a storage place before the waste is moved back to the processing and recycling site or Final Processing Site (TPA).

    6) Final Processing Site (TLP)

    Solid waste that has reached the Final Processing Site (TPA) will be isolated or safely piled up so as not to cause disturbance to the environment. In addition to isolating or accumulating waste, TPA will also process waste by sorting waste, recycling inorganic waste, and composting organic waste.

  • The Understanding of Liquidity Until Its Role in Investment

    Understanding Liquidity – Liquidity is one of the important factors in the sustainability of a business. Of course, a company must have enough funds to meet its financial obligations aka debt. Therefore, we certainly need to have cash. Even so, too much cash will dilute the opportunity to invest and support the growth of the company.

    Related to that, we need to understand the meaning of liquidity, because measuring liquidity can help to find the right balance and monitor the financial “health” of a company. As a result, our business can be helped and grow even more.

    Not only that basic thing, liquidity is also important when we apply for a funding or loan. Because, banks and investors will pay close attention to the liquidity ratio when considering the ability of a company to repay its debt.

    This is certainly a good reason for us to immediately learn liquidity, starting from the basics. But before that, what is the theoretical meaning of liquidity? Let’s take a look at the discussion below related to the meaning of liquidity to examples and its role in investment!

    Definition of Liquidity

    The notion of liquidity in general actually has two meanings. In a company, liquidity is one of the important factors to determine the condition or sustainability. Therefore, many business actors use liquidity as a yardstick or benchmark to assess the company’s ability to finance the needs or operational activities of the company.

    As we know, the notion of liquidity in accounting and financial analysis is a measure of how easy and possible it is for a company to meet short-term obligations, such as business debts, dividends, taxes, and others, by using current assets.

    For example, we may see that there is still enough cash to cover current and future bills as we expect. Or, we may need to take advantage of investments and other assets that can be converted into cash. The easier it is to convert an asset into cash, the more liquid the asset is.

    For example, there is a shop that sells collectible stamps. The shop may reserve its inventory for the right buyer to get the best price, meaning the stamp is not very liquid. However, if the same stamp shop owns stocks or bonds, both can be sold quickly so that the investment is considered liquid.

    In financial markets, this term refers to how quickly an investment can be sold without causing a negative impact on its price. If we know that an investment is more liquid, it means that the investment can be sold faster, and vice versa.

    With the availability of liquidity, it is possible that assets that are assessed as more liquid will be traded at a higher price because of the profit they carry. Meanwhile, illiquid assets are traded at lower prices.

    Be aware, companies use assets to run their business, including producing goods or creating value in other ways. Assets can include things like equipment or intellectual property. Meanwhile, supplies or products sold by companies to generate income are usually considered current assets because they will usually be sold within one year.

    For an asset to be considered liquid, it needs to be in an established market with many interested buyers. Moreover, the asset must also have the ability to transfer ownership easily and quickly.

    The information we need to check liquidity can be found in the company’s balance sheet. Because assets are usually listed in the order of how quickly they can be converted into cash. So, at the top of the balance sheet is cash, the most liquid asset.

    In this balance sheet, the liabilities or debts of our company are also listed. Obligations are listed in the order of when they will fall due. Bills that must be paid first are listed at the top.

    Comparing short-term liabilities with cash and other liquid assets can help us better understand the financial position of the business. Afterwards, we can increase the company’s liquidity with certain ratio numbers, such as current ratio, quick ratio, and cash ratio.

    Liquidity Function

    In short, a company’s high liquidity can trigger investor attraction. They will consider it as something positive, that our company is financially healthy and has a small risk of loss. Even in the stock market, companies with these characteristics are called blue chip stocks .

    Judging from various sources, these are the various functions of the company’s liquidity.

    • Become an anticipator of funds when the company is faced with sudden needs.
    • Measuring the availability of cash and cash equivalents to meet short-term debt obligations.
    • As a matter of consideration regarding the eligibility of a company in receiving an injection of funds from capitalists.
    • Supporting the running of daily business activities.
    • Facilitate the withdrawal of customer funds on behalf of the bank.
    • Can help company management in overseeing capital efficiency.
    • As an aid in analyzing and interpreting the company’s short-term financial position.
    • Act as a trigger for the company in improving the work of its employees.

    Types of Liquidity Ratios

    Ratio, in terms of accounting, is the relationship between two financial variables that are systematically related to each other. Therefore, the analysis of the ratio obtained from the calculation process and the results of the ratio can be used as material to make a decision on the agreement of a company.

    As for the three most important ratios to measure liquidity, namely:

    1. Smooth Ratio

    The current ratio is a number used to show how large the company’s ability to meet its current obligations by using current assets. In addition, this ratio can be used as a comparison between current assets and current liabilities.

    The method used to find out the level of the company’s current ratio alias current ratio is quite simple, namely by observing the amount of the company’s current assets such as cash, receivables, supplies and other current assets.

    If current assets have a larger amount than current liabilities, then the company has a high current ratio. The higher the current ratio, then it can be ensured that the company has the ability to pay off its debts or obligations.

    This ratio calculates the company’s current assets against its current liabilities. This determines whether the company can pay off all its short-term debts with the money received from the sale of assets.

    Formula used: Current Ratio = Current Assets/Liabilities or Current Debt

    2. Quick Ratio

    The quick ratio is a ratio that shows how large the company’s ability to pay off its short-term debt without including the value of the company’s inventory. A special feature of this quick ratio is that it only uses cash and other cash equivalents for its calculation.

    It should be noted that the quick ratio is a ratio that shows how large the company’s ability to pay off its short-term debt by using current assets without including the value of the company’s inventory.

    This is because inventory takes a relatively long time to be converted into an asset, so the company sets aside inventory first. The calculation of the liquidity level with the quick ratio only uses tangible assets such as cash and securities as the main component.

    If the quick ratio is at the top, then the financial condition should be in a stable condition. This shows that it will be easier for the company to pay off its short-term debt with good financial conditions. Similar to the current ratio, only this quick ratio only considers receivables, cash, and bonds or stocks as assets.

    This is the formula: Current Assets = Current Liquid Assets/Total Liabilities

    3. Cash Ratio

    This cash ratio is equal to cash divided by current liabilities. The calculation of this ratio will be useful when the company can only use its money to pay off debt. If the cash ratio is 1 or greater, it means that the business has a lot of liquidity and may not face problems in paying its debts.

    The formula is Cash Ratio = (Cash and Cash Equivalents + Short-Term Investments)/Liabilities or Current Debt

    4. Cash Turnover Ratio

    This cash turnover ratio is used to give an overview of the amount of profit a company gets from working capital expenditure. As for the cash turnover ratio, it can show a relative figure which is the result of the total sales of products and working capital. The calculation of cash turnover ratio can be seen from the division of product sales figures with net working capital.

    The result of this cash turnover ratio is the profit that the company has achieved from the amount of products sold and its working capital. The amount of this revenue should be greater than the debt to obtain good liquidity.

    Formula: Cash Turnover = Sales/Average Cash and Cash Equivalents

    5. Working Capital Ratio

    Enterprises must be related to working capital. Therefore, in a company, the working capital ratio will be needed to know the picture of their liquidity level. This ratio is seen through assets and working capital positions that can finance the company’s operations.

    The calculation of the working capital ratio is done by comparing the company’s total assets with its liabilities. Then, divided by the total assets

    The Importance of Liquidity in Business

    At this stage, we certainly already know that liquidity is one of the most important factors in the sustainability of a business. However, there are still some things we need to understand about the importance of this liquidity. Let’s watch together!

    Good liquidity can be a way to bring together businessmen with the right investors or short-term borrowers. The company will be able to present their efforts with a good effect if they have high liquidity.

    Internally, the company also knows their financial status, is it good or bad, risky or not?

    The Role of Liquidity in Investments

    Besides in business, liquidity is also very important in investing, Reader. We certainly don’t want to give funds to unreliable companies, right? Consideration about their liquidity needs to be done to ensure that our investment is not wasted, especially for the long term.

    Here are some focus on the role of liquidity in financial planning:

    1. As a Deviation for Cash Proposal

    We are advised to set aside a small amount of cash for emergencies, regardless of our total investment in non-liquid assets. Although the amount of this small reserve varies for each person depending on their short-term needs, the general advice is to save three months’ worth of income for this.

    2. Balancer between Liquid and Illiquid Investments

    Ideally, liquid assets such as mutual funds, shares, bonds, and other alternatives should be properly allocated while the rest is deployed for non-liquid assets. As we know, liquid assets can be converted into cash precisely. This is exactly what we need in saving some wealth.

    Even if we don’t invest, we definitely need a cash reserve . So, it is necessary to consider having liquid assets that can be saved depending on our monthly budget and various other factors.

    Examples of Liquid Assets and Liquidity Ratio Application

    Reader, now we understand about liquidity. However, it certainly feels less if we don’t know real examples in the field. This time, let’s discuss an example of an asset that is liquid and the application of the liquidity ratio in its calculation!

    Examples of liquid and illiquid assets

    1. Cash or Cash

    Cash is the most liquid asset because in relation to liquidity, all other assets are valued for their ease of conversion into cash aka cash.

    2. Restricted Cash ( Restricted Cash )

    Restricted cash is a cash deposit as a deviation made by the company for future obligations. This amount of cash is also significant. Even so, these deposits are considered illiquid if they are legally restricted such as compensation for loans.

    3. Valuable Letters

    These are financial instruments that can be traded in the public market. The liquidity of the securities is related to the daily trading volume of the securities. Government bonds with high trading volumes are considered almost as liquid as cash. Meanwhile, securities with a small value are considered illiquid.

    4. Cash Equivalent

    Cash equivalents include securities and instruments that can be exchanged for cash such as bills and commercial paper.

    5. Credit

    Unused credit such as lines of credit can help entities to achieve liquidity. Even so, such facilities may be subject to requirements that make them far less reliable than cash in a liquidity crisis. For example, in the event of a global financial crisis, banks may have an incentive to withdraw credit lines.

    6. Assets (Illiquid)

    Assets such as inventory, receivables, equipment, vehicles, and real estate are not considered liquid because they require months to be converted into cash. In the event of financial stress, the asset may be difficult to convert into cash at all.

    Examples of Liquidity Ratio Application

    S&S Company has received building materials and other supplies from vendors to complete a project. This vendor certainly hopes that S&S can pay in full after the project is completed. At some point after S&S is close to completing the project, the company must ensure that they have enough money to pay off the loan from the vendor.

    Unfortunately, S&S realized that their income was not enough to pay the vendors, so they decided to liquidate some of their current assets. Meanwhile, the ratio used to calculate their ability to repay vendors is the quick ratio.

    S&S found that they have current liabilities of USD400 thousand, USD100 thousand in cash, USD100 thousand in securities, and USD300 thousand in receivables. Here’s how to calculate it:

    Current Assets = Current Liquid Assets/Total Liabilities
    = Cash + securities + receivables/current liabilities
    = 100,000 + 100,000 + 300,000/400,000
    = 500,000/400,000

    With this calculation, S&S can know if their company can still liquidate assets to match and pay off their current debt.

    Conclusion

    Reader, liquidity is very important, isn’t it, in the smooth operation of the company? Not only liquidity, other accounting concepts are of course also needed. Not only in the aspect of business, everyday life even the law will require the concept of accounting in some of its activities!

  • The Meaning of Liberalism: Philosophy, and the Early History of the Ideology of Liberalism

    Etymology, Philosophy, and Early History of Liberalism Ideology – Liberalism is a political and moral philosophical view based on freedom, consent from the governed and equality before the law. Liberals support a variety of views depending on their understanding of these principles, but generally they support individual rights (including civil and human rights), democracy, secularism, freedom of speech, freedom of the press, freedom of religion and market economy.

    Liberalism became one of the main movements in the Age of Enlightenment and became popular among Western philosophers and economists. Liberalism seeks to replace the norms of hereditary privilege, state religion, absolute monarchy, divine right of kings and traditional conservatism with representative democracy and the rule of law. The liberals also ended mercantilist policies, government monopolies and other trade barriers. This is meant to promote free trade and marketization.

    Philosopher John Locke is often considered the founder of liberalism, a tradition based on the social contract, arguing that everyone has a natural right to life, liberty and property and that the government cannot violate these rights. If the British liberal tradition emphasizes the expansion of democracy, French liberalism emphasizes the rejection of authoritarianism and is related to the development of the nation.

    The leaders in the Great British Revolution of 1688, the American Revolution of 1776 and the French Revolution of 1789 used liberal philosophy to overthrow the absolute sovereignty of the government by arms. Liberalism began to spread rapidly, especially after the French Revolution. In the 19th century, many liberal governments were established in most countries in Europe and South America. This coincides with the establishment of republicanism in the United States.

    Liberalism in Victorian England was used to criticize established political institutions, referring to science and common sense in the name of the people. During the 19th and early 20th centuries, liberalism in the Ottoman Empire and the Middle East influenced reform periods such as the Tanzimat and Al-Nahda and the emergence of constitutionalism, nationalism, and secularism.

    Before 1920, the main ideological opponents of liberalism were communism, conservatism, and socialism. However, liberalism then faced major ideological challenges from fascism and Marxism-Leninism as a new opponent. During the 20th century, liberal ideas spread further, especially in Western Europe, when liberal democracy emerged victorious in both world wars.

    The formation of social liberalism (often called moderate liberalism in the United States) in Europe and North America became an important element in the expansion of the welfare state. Today, many liberal parties hold power and influence around the world. The fundamental elements of contemporary society have liberal roots.

    The early wave of liberalism popularized economic individualism while expanding constitutional government and parliamentary authority. Liberals seek and establish a constitutional order that values ​​important individual freedoms, such as freedom of speech and freedom of association; freedom of religion, independent courts, public trials by jury; and the abolition of aristocratic privileges.

    The wave of modern liberal thought and struggle has been strongly influenced by the need to expand civil rights. Liberals often support gender equality and racial equality in their efforts to promote civil rights. The global civil rights movement in the 20th century aimed to achieve these goals. Other goals often promoted by liberals include universal suffrage and universal access to education.

     

    Etymology and Meaning of Liberalism

    Words like liberal, liberty, libertarian , and libertine all have historical roots to the Latin liber , meaning “free.” One of the first recorded examples of the use of the word liberal occurred in 1375, when it was used to describe the liberal arts in the context of education desired for free people.

    The early connection of the word with the classical education of medieval universities paved the way for the emergence of different denotations and connotations. Liberal can refer to “free to bestow” as early as 1387, “made free of duty” in 1433, “freely permitted” in 1530 and “free from restraint”—often as a derogatory comment—in the 16th and 20th centuries. -17.

    In 16th century England, liberal could have a positive or negative attribute in referring to someone’s generosity or recklessness. In Much Ado About Nothing , William Shakespeare writes of “a liberal villain” who “has […] acknowledged his vile meeting”. With the advent of the Age of Enlightenment, the word liberal acquired a more positive meaning which was defined as “free from narrow prejudice” in 1781 and “free from bigotry” in 1823.

    In 1815, the first use of the word “liberalism” appeared in the English language. In Spain, the liberals, the first group to use the liberal label in a political context, fought for several decades to implement the Constitution of 1812. From 1820 to 1823 during the Trienio Liberal , King Ferdinand VII was forced by the liberals to swear to uphold the Constitution. In the mid-19th century, the word liberal was used as a political term for parties and movements around the world.

    As time went by, the meaning of the word liberalism started to become different in various parts of the world. According to Encyclopædia Britannica : “In the United States, liberalism is associated with welfare state policies from the New Deal program of the Democratic administration of Pres. Franklin D. Roosevelt, while in Europe it is more often associated with limited government commitment and laissez-faire economic policy .

    As a result, in the United States the ideas of individualism and laissez-faire economics that were previously associated with classical liberalism became the basis for the emergence of libertarian thought and are an important part of American conservatism.

    In Europe and Latin America, the word liberalism means a moderate form of classical liberalism, unlike in North America. This term includes center-right conservative liberalism (right liberalism) and center-left social liberalism (left liberalism).

    Unlike Europe and Latin America, the word liberalism in North America almost exclusively refers to social liberalism (left liberalism). The dominant Canadian party is the Liberal Party and the Democratic Party is usually considered liberal in the United States. In the United States, conservative liberals are usually called conservatives in a broad sense.

    Philosophy of Liberalism

    Liberalism—both as a political current and as an intellectual tradition—is largely a modern phenomenon that began in the 17th century, although some liberal philosophical ideas had antecedents in classical times and in Imperial China. The Roman Emperor Marcus Aurelius praised, “the idea of ​​government which is organized with regard to equal rights and the same freedom of speech, and the idea of ​​government which respects almost all the liberties of the governed”.

    Scholars recognize a number of principles common to contemporary liberals in the works of several Sophists and in the Funeral Oration by Pericles. Liberal philosophy represents a broad intellectual tradition that has examined and popularized some of the most important and controversial principles in the modern world. Its extraordinary scientific and academic output is considered to have “richness and diversity”, but that diversity often means that liberalism comes in different formulations and presents a challenge for anyone to find the right definition.

    Continental European liberalism is divided between moderates and progressives, with moderates tending to elitism and progressives supporting the universalization of fundamental institutions such as universal suffrage, universal education and the expansion of property rights. Over time, moderates replaced progressives as the main guardians of continental European liberalism.

    History of Liberalism

    John Locke was the first to develop liberal philosophy, including the right to private property and the consent of the governed.

    Isolated liberal thought has existed in Western philosophy since Ancient Greece and in Eastern philosophy since the Song and Ming periods. These ideas were first brought together and systematized as different ideologies by the English philosopher John Locke, who is generally regarded as the father of modern liberalism.

    The first major signs of liberal politics appeared in modern times. These ideas began to coalesce during the English Civil War. During the war, the Levellers, a radical political movement, called for religious freedom and equality before the law. The influence of these ideas continued to grow during the 17th century in England, culminating in the Great Revolution of 1688, which enshrined parliamentary sovereignty and revolutionary rights and was influential in the formation of what many consider to be the first modern liberal state.

    The development of liberalism continued throughout the 18th century with the development of Enlightenment ideals at that time. During this time, intellectuals questioned the old traditions and influenced the conduct of several European monarchies throughout the 18th century. Political tension between England and the American colonies occurred after 1765 and the Seven Years’ War due to the problem of taxation without representation, which culminated in the new republic’s Declaration of Independence, and the American Revolutionary War which was fought to defend that independence.

    After the war, leaders debated how to move forward. The Articles of Confederation, written in 1776, now seem inadequate to provide security, or even functional government. The Confederate Congress called the Constitutional Convention in 1787 resulted in the writing of a new United States Constitution to form a federal government. In these periods, the Constitution was a republican and liberal document. The United States Constitution remains the oldest liberal governing document in force in the world.

    In Europe, liberalism has a long tradition, especially since the 17th century. The French Revolution began in 1789. Two important events that marked the victory of liberalism were the abolition of feudalism in France on the night of August 4, 1789, which marked the collapse of traditional feudal rights and special rights and the limitation of power with the ratification of the Declaration of the Rights of Man and Citizen on the month of August.

    During the Napoleonic Wars, the French influenced the countries of Western Europe with the abolition of the feudal system, the liberalization of property laws, the end of seigneurial dues, the abolition of unions, the legalization of divorce, the disintegration of the Jewish ghetto, the collapse of the Inquisition, the collapse of the Holy Roman Empire, the abolition of church courts and authorities religion in the public sphere, the formation of a metric system, and the recognition of legal equality for all people.

    One of the most enduring French influences, the Civil Code, has been adopted in many countries around the world”, but also perpetuates further discrimination against women under the concept of “natural order”.

    The development of classical liberalism occurred before and after the French Revolution in England. Adam Smith’s work, The Wealth of Nations , published in 1776, provided most of the economic ideas at least until the publication of John Stuart Mill’s Principles of Political Economy in 1848.

    Smith discussed the motivation of economic activities, the causes of prices and distribution of wealth and policies that the country should follow to maximize wealth. The radical liberal movement began in the 1790s in England and concentrated on parliamentary and electoral reform, emphasizing natural rights and people’s sovereignty. Radicals such as Richard Price and Joseph Priestley saw parliamentary reform as the first step to address many of their grievances, including the treatment of Protestant Dissenters, the slave trade, high prices and high taxes.

    In Latin America, liberal unrest began in the 18th century, when liberal agitation in Latin America led to independence from the Spanish and Portuguese imperial powers. These new regimes were generally liberal in their political views and used the philosophy of positivism, which emphasized the truth of modern science, to support their positions.

    In the United States, the great civil war resulted in the abolition of slavery in the South. Historian Don Doyle argues that the Union’s victory in the American Civil War (1861–1865) gave a great impetus to the path of liberalism.

    During the 19th and early 20th centuries in the Ottoman Empire and the Middle East, liberalism influenced reform periods such as the Tanzimat and Al-Nahda; the rise of secularism, constitutionalism and nationalism; and the emergence of different intellectual and religious groups and movements, such as the Young Ottomans and Islamic Modernism.

    Prominent figures at that time were Rifa’a al-Tahtawi, Namık Kemal and Brahim Inasi. However, reformist ideas and trends did not succeed in reaching the general public because books, magazines, and newspapers were only accessible to intellectuals and segments of the emerging middle class, while many Muslims saw it as a foreign influence in the Islamic world.

    That perception complicates reformist efforts in Middle Eastern countries. These changes, along with other factors, created a sense of crisis in Islam, which continues to this day. This also led to the rise of Islamism.

    Abolitionist and suffrage movements spread, along with ideals of representation and democracy. France established the third republic in the 1870s. However, nationalism also spread rapidly after 1815. A mixture of liberal and nationalist sentiments in Italy and Germany led to the unification of the two countries at the end of the 19th century.

    A liberal regime came to power in Italy and ended the power of the Popes. However, the Vatican launched a crusade against liberalism. Pope Pius IX issued the Syllabus of Errors in 1864 which condemned liberalism in all its forms. In many countries, liberal forces responded by expelling the Jesuit order.

    At the end of the nineteenth century, the principles of classical liberalism were increasingly opposed and the ideal of the independent individual seemed increasingly to be considered absurd. Victorian English writers such as Charles Dickens, Thomas Carlyle and Matthew Arnold were early influential critics of social injustice.

    As a liberal nationalist, KJ Ståhlberg (1865–1952), President of Finland, anchored the country in liberal democracy, maintained the rule of law, and initiated internal reforms.

    Liberalism gained momentum in the early 20th century. The bastion of autocracy, the Tsar of Russia, was overthrown in the first phase of the Russian Revolution. The victory of the Allies in the First World War and the fall of the four kingdoms seemed to mark the triumph of liberalism across the European continent. Not only among the victorious allied countries, but also in Germany and the newly formed Eastern European countries.

    Militarism, as symbolized by Germany, was defeated and discredited. As Blinkhorn puts it, liberal themes are very influential in terms of “cultural pluralism, religious and ethnic tolerance, national self-determination, free market economy, representative and responsible government, free trade, trade unions, and the peaceful settlement of international disputes through a new way, the League of Nations”.

    Color photo of Franklin D. Roosevelt as Time’s Man of the Year in January 1933.

    In the United States, modern liberalism began with the popular presidency of Franklin D. Roosevelt, who initiated the New Deal in response to the Great Depression and won an unprecedented four elections. The New Deal coalition established by Roosevelt left a legacy that defined and influenced many future American presidents, including John F. Kennedy.

    Meanwhile, the definitive liberal response to the Great Depression was given by British economist John Maynard Keynes, who had begun a theoretical work examining the relationship between unemployment, money, and prices in the 1920s. The Great Depression around the world, beginning in 1929, accelerated the discrediting of liberal economics and strengthened calls for state control over economic affairs. Economic woes led to widespread unrest in European politics, leading to the rise of fascism as an ideology and movement opposed to liberalism and communism, especially in Nazi Germany and Italy.

    The rise of fascism in the 1930s eventually culminated in World War II, one of the deadliest conflicts in human history. The Allied Bloc won the war in 1945 and their victory started a new chapter for the Cold War between the Communist Eastern Bloc and the liberal Western Bloc.

    In Iran, liberalism enjoyed wide popularity. In April 1951, the National Front became the governing coalition when a democratically elected politician, Mohammad Mosaddegh, a liberal nationalist, became Prime Minister. However, his way of governing was against Western interests and he was removed from power through a coup on August 19, 1953. The coup ended the dominance of liberalism in the country’s politics.

    Among various regional and national movements, the civil rights movement in the United States during the 1960s highlighted liberal efforts to create equal rights. The Great Society project launched by President Lyndon B. Johnson oversaw the creation of Medicare and Medicaid, the creation of Head Start and the Job Corps as part of the War on Poverty and the ratification of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, a series of events that some historians have dubbed “the Liberal Hour.  “.

    The 2017 Russian protests were organized by Russia’s liberal opposition.

    The Cold War featured extensive ideological rivalry and several proxy wars, but the feared World War III between the Soviet Union and the United States never occurred. While communist countries and liberal democracies competed with each other, the economic crisis of the 1970s inspired a move away from Keynesian economics, especially under Margaret Thatcher in England and Ronald Reagan in the United States.

    This trend, known as neoliberalism, is a paradigm shift from the post-war Keynesian consensus that lasted from 1945 to 1980. Meanwhile, towards the end of the 20th century, the communist countries of Eastern Europe collapsed drastically. This made liberal democracy the only major form of government in the West.

    At the beginning of World War II, the number of democracies around the world was about the same as it had been forty years earlier. After 1945, liberal democracy spread very quickly, but then suffered a setback. In The Spirit of Democracy , Larry Diamond argued that in 1974 “dictatorship, not democracy, is the way of the world” and that “almost a quarter of independent nations choose their government through competitive, free, and fair elections”. Diamond further said that democracy rose again and in 1995 the world became “very democratic”.

     

  • Understanding Liability and Its Benefits For Enterprises

    Definition of Liability – In the business world, one thing and another usually have a relationship with one another. One of them is assets and liabilities that have a high relationship with the smoothness of the travel process of a business. In doing business activities, a company will definitely need assets.

    While liability is a risk that should be taken by the company to develop the business that is being carried out. Even so, liability does not only exist in the form of debt or loan money. There are various forms of liability that Reader needs to be aware of. Compared to just guessing and assuming, Reader should read this article until it is finished to know the form of liability in detail.

    Definition of Liability

    Liability is an obligation that must be paid by a company to the relevant party by issuing a certain amount of funds or economic resources of the company. Generally, companies will take on liabilities to support all operational activities in their business.

    That way, the expansion and development of a company can be done in a relatively faster time. When the company insists on not taking a risk by going into debt. Especially for companies that don’t have a lot of assets. So the development of the company has the potential to be hindered and not optimal.

    As for the other meaning of a simpler liability, it is an obligation that is calculated equal to the value of money and must be paid by the company to the concerned party. The parties referred to here can be companies, individuals, cooperatives, banks, and other financial institutions. The point is, if according to accounting records, liability is a debt. Where in the accounting equation, liability is abbreviated as ALE by accountants.

    The abbreviation has the abbreviation Assets, Liabilities, and Equity. Those three things are interrelated with each other. From that, there is an accounting equation that shows that assets come from the summation of liabilities and equity. Why does a company have a liability? It is related to the amount of assets owned by a company.

    If all enterprises have few assets. So it is recommended to take responsibility. The purpose of that is as an effort so that the company can develop maximally. Because, when surviving with existing assets, it will automatically be difficult for the company to progress or grow. Reader needs to know that liability is not just in the form of money. But it can also be in the form of services, goods, or economic benefits in other forms. In addition, liability can also originate from various types of transactions. For example, from the exchange of assets, business relationships, and various transactions that can provide benefits for the company’s economy in the future.

    In the science of financial accounting, liability is considered as an entity’s obligation that arises from a transaction or event in the past. The obligation in question is explained through the following characteristics:

    1. Obligations are all types of debt or loans from banks or individuals aimed at increasing the company’s income.

    2. In addition, an obligation is a responsibility from another party that requires settlement through the delivery of assets in the form of providing services and other transactions in the future and producing an economic benefit.

    3. Obligation is a duty and responsibility on the related parties, whether to leave little or even not at all a policy in order to avoid settlement.

    4. Lastly, an obligation is an event and transaction that has occurred and gives rise to the entity’s responsibility.

    Difference between Liability and Burden

    Liability and burden are often categorized as the same thing. But actually the two are very different. Liabilities are usually in the form of debt used by companies to obtain assets for operational needs. For example, when a company buys tools for production that are used in the manufacture of products. Then the payment is made using a loan, then the transaction is classified as a liability.

    As for the burden, which includes ongoing payments for something that has no real value and is used to get profit or income. One example that can be used as an illustration is the cost incurred to pay for advertising with the aim of attracting customers. In addition, burdens and liabilities are generally listed in different places in the financial statements. Where liabilities are usually written on the financial balance sheet, while burdens are written on the profit and loss statement.

    Types of Liability

    In general, liabilities will appear and be recorded in the balance sheet of the financial statement written at the end of the period. The purpose is to identify the financial condition of a company during that period. Usually, put the liabilities in the financial statements in the right column along with the equity entries. Where in the recording, liabilities are in the order that has been determined. The following are 2 types of liability that Reader needs to know about in the financial report of a company or business. Watch until it’s finished.

    1. Long Term Liability

    The first type of liability is long-term liability. That means, the period determined for the payment of the obligation is expected to last for more than one year. Examples of long-term liabilities are debts in the form of mortgages, debt obligations and cash loans.

    2. Short Term Liability

    The second type of liability is short-term liability. This type of liability is often referred to as current liability. This can be interpreted as an obligation that is expected to be resolved within a short period of time or no more than a year. The following are some examples of short-term liabilities:

    a. Sales Tax Obligations

    Sales tax liability is also included in debt or liability. Where it is the accumulation of sales tax that can be obtained from consumers and held until the due date before it is paid to taxation.

    b. Income Tax Liability

    Of course we know that there are some companies that cut their employees’ salaries to be used as income tax. The deduction will usually be collected and stored until the time is deposited to the state taxation.

    c. Mortgage Debt and Loan Fund

    If previously the two debts were included in the example of long-term liability, then now they are present as an example of the type of short-term liability. This can happen when the payment is made in installments per month. That way, payments under 12 months will be categorized as short-term liabilities.

    Apart from the 2 types of liabilities that have been mentioned above, there are actually still other types, namely capital. Capital is a type of liability that comes from the difference between assets and debts owned by a company. Capital is also included in the type of contingency liability. That means, whether or not there is an obligation depends on the events that will happen in the future. Therefore, the maturity of a liability of this type will never be predictable. So it is not surprising if there are not many company owners who take this type of liability. For example, the type of liability includes, among others, a warranty for a product, lawsuits through legal channels, and others.

    Characteristics of Liability Is

    For Reader who have been struggling in the business field for a long time or who have just started a business, they will certainly be very familiar with the term liability. This is because of the characteristics it has. Here are some characteristics of liability that need to be understood:

    1. All loans used to increase personal or company income, be it from banks, individuals, or others must be paid at the same time when it is due.

    2. All kinds of obligations that must be paid to other parties, whether it is the exchange of assets, cash transfers, the provision of services or services, and other activities that provide economic benefits in a period that has been determined in accordance with an agreement or at the time of a certain business event.

    3. Business events or transactions that have already taken place and require the entity.

    4. A form of entity’s responsibility to other parties, either those who abandon a policy or those who do not avoid settlement efforts.

     

    How to Analyze Business Liability

    Having a liability report on a company can also be used as one of the indicators of the company’s financial health. Therefore, writing and recording must be detailed and detailed, neat, and structured. The following are two ways that can be used to analyze liabilities in a company:

    1. Through the Ratio of Debt to Assets Owned by a Company

    When Reader uses this one method, then what needs to be ascertained is how many assets the company owns that can be used to meet and cover the obligations or liabilities. We can calculate by using the percentage of the total amount of debt and make sure that the total or amount is less than 50%. If the total of all debts owned can be covered by using the total business assets owned by a company. So it is most likely that the company will still be able to operate.

    2. Using the Debt to Equity Ratio

    The second way is to use the debt to equity ratio. Here we have to calculate the whole of the debt with the equity owned by the company. Make sure that the result of the ratio of debt to equity is not more than 50%. However, if the reality is more than 50%, then that is when the company should reduce the amount of liabilities or debts owned. So, liability is not something bad for a company or business. There was a time when it actually became one of the ways to achieve success.

    As for the thing that needs to be understood, that is to keep control of the amount of liability so that it does not exceed the limit of the company’s ability to pay it. Because, the main purpose of using liability is to be able to develop a company or business, not to make it bankrupt due to a lot of debt.

    Therefore, make neat, detailed, and structured notes for all liabilities owned. With these records, we can monitor and pay attention to the business position and also the company’s financial condition. In addition, liability can also give us the opportunity to develop our business to the maximum. However, we must ensure that the company can pay the obligation on time. So that when we need more liability, it will be easier to get it.

    Examples of Liability

    So that Reader gets a clear picture of what liability is. The following is an example of a liability case in a company:

    Let’s just say, Andi is an employee at PT Maju Jaya. In May 2021, He received a salary of Rp. 7,000,000, then a child allowance of Rp. 800,000, and an allowance for transportation of Rp. 1,500,000. Not only that, to take care of Andi’s well-being, PT Maju Jaya also has to pay accident insurance amounting to Rp. 250,000, death insurance amounting to Rp. 100,000, and also an old age allowance of Rp. 300,000. So that the gross salary that Andi will receive is Rp. 9,950,000.

    After that, Andi’s salary was cut by Rp. 400,000 to be used as a pension fund, Rp. 200,000 for zakat needs, Rp. 2,500,000 to pay the house installment to the Bank, and Rp. 425,000 PPh 21. Thus, Andi’s net salary in May 2021 is Rp. 6,425,000.

    From the analysis above, the obligation that must be given to Andi and applies as long as Andi is still working at PT Maju Jaya is Rp. 9,950,000.

    From the explanation above, we can conclude that liability is one of the things that can be used or used by a company to develop their company to the maximum. Company owners who insist on not taking liability can potentially hinder the growth and development of their own company and become suboptimal.

    However, it should be understood that liability is different from burden as explained above. Where liabilities are usually used to acquire assets to meet operational needs. While burden is usually used for something that has no real value but has the potential to increase income.

    From the explanation above, liabilities have 3 types which are categorized based on the time of payment. The first is Short Term Liabilities that mature in less than one year. The second is Long Term Liabilities that mature in more than one year. The third is Contingency Liability, this is an extraordinary debt that is done under special conditions only.

    Calculation of liabilities using the ratio of debt to assets and to equity can make companies feel overwhelmed when done manually. Especially if the company takes many types of liability. In order to minimize mistakes, the company needs a special application as a supporter of online disability.

    Well, that’s an explanation of what liability is in a company and what its benefits are for business development. For Reader who are struggling in the business field, the explanation above will certainly be very helpful in understanding the various ways to make the company and business more advanced.

     

  • Meaning of Social Board: Functions, Features, Types, Types and Examples

    Definition of Social Board – A social board is an institution that has members and is made up of people who come together as one because they have a common vision and mission. Every member who joins the social institution will be bound by the rules that have been made and must be obeyed. So that some social institutions have a regulatory nature.

    However, what exactly is the meaning of social institutions? What are the characteristics, types and types? The following article will discuss briefly about social institutions. Read to the end of the article!

    A. Meaning of Social Board

    In general, social institutions that exist in community life are always different from one institution to another. The difference from the social institution occurs because of the process and background that underlies the formation of the social institution.

    Some members also expressed their opinions on the meaning of social institutions:

    1. Major Polak

    According to Polak, a social institution is a social system related to complex rules with various customs to be able to maintain all important values ​​in community life.

    2.W. Hamilton

    W. Hamilton thinks that social institutions are a procedure and a way of life carried out by every group of society and if there is a violation, then the violator will be sanctioned according to the rules that he violated.

    3. Koentjaraningrat

    Koentjaraningrat also expressed his opinion. According to Koentjaraningrat, social institutions are a system with codes of conduct and relationships that have a center on social activities to be able to meet specific needs in community life.

    4. Soerjono Soekanto

    Soerjono Soekanto has a different opinion from Koentjaraningrat about the meaning of social institutions. According to Soerjono, social institutions are a set of norms at all levels that revolve around a basic need in social life.

    5. Peter L Berger

    In a different view from other experts, Peter L Berger expressed his opinion that social institutions are procedures that can cause human actions to be suppressed by a certain pattern and forced to move on a path that is considered to be in accordance with the wishes of society.

    From the opinion on the meaning of social institution according to the experts, it can be concluded that social institution is a social system created through customs and adapted to each region that functions to regulate patterns and a series of procedures in order to create a social relationship that has one main purpose.

    B. Functions of the Social Board

    Social institutions that exist and are formed in society have the following functions.

    1. The social board functions to provide guidelines to community members on how each individual should behave in facing problems that appear and develop in the community.
    2. Social institutions function to maintain the integrity of the interrelated or concerned society.
    3. The social board functions to give instructions to the community to be able to establish a social control system such as a community supervision system for its members.
    4. That is a brief explanation about social institutions, Reader can learn more and dig deeper about the material of these social institutions.

    C. Features of Social Board

    Social institutions have several characteristics that Reader need to know in order to be able to determine and distinguish each type and type of social institution that will be explained later. Here are some of the characteristics of social institutions.

    1. Social institutions have a certain permanence that lasts a long time. This is due to the assumption that this social institution contains a set of norms that must be maintained by the members in it and these norms are like life and relationships in a family.
    2. Generally, social institutions have one or more specific goals that each member wants to achieve. For example, such as educational institutions that have the goal of being able to provide values, norms and knowledge to the next generation.
    3. The social board has a number of devices that work to achieve the goals that have been set by the previous members. For example, such as flags, banners in political institutions and money as a medium of exchange in economic institutions and others.
    4. The social board is a structured and relatively permanent organization.
    5. The norms found in social institutions are taken through a long process until they can be recognized by the local community.
    6. Social institutions have binding sanctions or punishments on how a person behaves and behaves.
    7. To achieve the goals that have been formulated before, social institutions have written and unwritten rules.
    8. Having certain complementary tools in the form of symbols and signs that can be used to represent the social institution along with the goals that the social institution wants to achieve.

    D. Types of Social Boards

    Social institutions are categorized based on five criteria, the following are the types of social institutions based on the five criteria.

    1. Social Board Based on its Values

    Social institutions based on their value criteria can be divided into two, namely primary and secondary.

    a. Primary Social Institutions or Basic Social Institutions

    Primary social institutions are social institutions that are basic and basic. Mainly this primary social institution is to regulate community life because it has high social rules to regulate community relations.

    Social justice in this primary social institution exists in the community and is divided into four according to its rules.

    • Religious rules , regulating the relationship between individuals and God based on all the teachings and prohibitions of God to shape people’s behavior to be useful to others.
    • Code of Ethics, this code comes from within the individual himself. If the process of internalization as well as values ​​and norms succeeds well and maximally, then the individual can follow the rules of morality in society. Examples include being honest, responsible and disciplined.
    • The Code of Politeness is a rule that has a relationship with socialization and interaction formed through social relationships that occur in the community. For example, mutual respect.
    • Law , is a set of regulations made by the authorities and is written and forces its citizens to implement the order that has been included in the law.

    Examples of primary social institutions in society are such as family institutions, educational institutions, legal institutions, economic institutions, religious institutions and health institutions.

    b. Secondary Social Institutions or Subsidiary Social Institutions

    The type of secondary social institution means that this social institution is secondary, the value of this social institution is considered unimportant by some people. Secondary social institutions need to be carried out compactly by all levels of society, because if they are not carried out and are not fulfilled then these secondary social institutions will not have a great influence on community life.

    But on the other hand, when secondary social institutions are established and fulfilled then this institution is only considered as an adder or added value. Based on the context of space and time does not exclude the possibility that the community will consider secondary social institutions as a primary need according to them. An example of a secondary social institution is a tourism institution.

    Primary social institutions can change over time into secondary social institutions due to changing mindsets in society that continues to grow. For example, traditional people think that formal education is not very important.

    The assumption will make the educational institution as a primary social institution change into a secondary social institution for the traditional society that considers that formal education is not too important.

    2. Social Board based on its Development

    Based on the development of social institutions, the following are the types of social institutions that are divided into two.

    a. Growing Social Institutions

    Crescive social institutions are social institutions that accidentally grow and develop in society. This social institution is formed based on community behavior patterns that have experienced strong integration in the lives of community members.

    The pattern of behavior over time and without realizing it will develop and become a custom. It is these customs that then become the next stage to form a good institution. Examples are marriage institutions, religious institutions, property rights institutions.

    b. Enacted Social Institutions

    Enacted social institutions are institutions that are deliberately formed to achieve a purpose. This institution originates from crescive social institutions that are equipped with structures and social systems in them. For example, such as economic institutions that have the function of regulating various forms of activities such as production and consumption activities in society.

    3. Based on the Angle of Acceptance by Society

    a. Approved or Socially Sanctioned Institutions

    Approve socially sanctioned institutions are social institutions that are accepted and recognized for their existence by the local community. Examples are health agencies, transportation agencies and trade agencies.

    b. Unsanctioned Social Institutions

    Unsanctioned social board is the opposite of approved. This unsanctioned social institution is not recognized for its existence by the community because it is considered disturbing to members of the community. Examples are terrorism networks or groups that threaten society.

    4. Social Board based on its Function

    a. Operative Social Institutions are institutions that have the task of gathering patterns and ways to achieve the goals of an institution. Examples are agricultural boards, industrial boards and educational boards.

    b. Regulative Social Institutions, are social institutions that have the task of overseeing customs in the community, for example, the court and the prosecutor’s office.

    5. Social Board based on its Distribution

    a. General Social Institutions

    is a social institution that exists in almost all societies so that its nature is universal or comprehensive. This board can be accepted by the wider community and has a high value to be able to meet the needs of all elements in the community. For example, such as religious institutions.

    b. Restricted Social Institutions

    This restricted social institution is formed based on the interests of certain groups, classes and groups which can then develop a special characteristic and cannot be applied to other groups, groups or classes. An example is an institution that is a reflection of local wisdom in a region in customs such as the irrigation organization in Bali.

    Still confused by the types of social institutions? Reader can also learn more about social institutions including their types through books available on Sinaumedia.com such as the IPS Premium Interest Book which presents material about these social institutions.

    E. Types of Social Boards

    Social institutions are divided into six types according to their respective functions. Here is a complete explanation.

    1. Family Board

    The family institution is the smallest social institution and is formed on the basis of marriage and blood relations between individuals. Although the family institution is the smallest institution, this family institution has a very large role in community life and is included in the primary social institution.

    2. Board of Education

    The education board is also a primary social institution that is recognized by the community and has a great influence on the life of the community. An educational institution is an institution where the educational process takes place with the aim of changing individual behavior for the better.

    Educational institutions themselves are then divided into three, namely formal education, non-formal education and informal education. Copy that, the educational institution can also be said to be an extension institution after the family institution.

    3. Economic Board

    As with the previous two types of social institutions, economic institutions are institutions that have activities in the economic field to achieve the goal of meeting the needs of society. This economic institution is included in the social institution because it regulates the relationship between people in meeting basic needs.

    4. Religious Board

    A religious institution is an institution that regulates human life in religion, a religious institution is a system of beliefs and religious practices carried out by people who believe in the belief.

    Religion is an important thing in human life to be able to balance human life between this world and the hereafter. Religious institutions are also primary social institutions that are recognized and can support the basic needs of the community.

    5. Political Board

    A political institution is an institution that has a form of activity in community groups with the process of its formation and the distribution of power determined by the community itself. The political body can be in the form of a government that has the role of maintaining peace and order and serving and protecting the community.

    6. Cultural Board

    A cultural institution is a public institution that exists in a country and plays a role in the development of culture, art, environment, science and education in society in a region or a country.

    Cultural institutions in the form of non-governmental organizations or NGOs, associations, workshops are elements that have a role in the preservation of art and culture in the region or country.

    F. Examples of Social Boards in Indonesia

    Here are some examples of social institutions based on the types that have been explained before.

    1. Social Board in the Field of Education

    • Kindergarten (TK)
    • Elementary School (SD)
    • Junior High School (SMP)
    • Senior High School (SMA)
    • Madrasah Aliyah
    • Vocational High School
    • Playgroup (KB)
    • Special Board

    2. Social Board in the Economic Field

    • Market
    • Ministry of Commerce
    • Ministry of Agriculture
    • Ministry of Fisheries
    • State Ministry of Cooperatives and UKM

    3. Social Board in the Field of Culture

    • Nusantara Culture Board Foundation
    • Coal Art Care Board
    • Board of Indonesian Muslim Cultural Artists
    • Betawi Cultural Board
    • LKN

    4. Social Board in the Religious Field

    • Council of Indonesian Scholars
    • Federation of Indonesian Churches
    • Indonesian Confucian High Council
    • Indonesian Hindu Dharma Council
    • Representative of Indonesian Buddhists

    5. Social Board in the Political Field

    • President and Vice President
    • DPR
    • MPR
    • CPC
    • M.A
    • MK
    • KY

    6. Family Board

    • KUA
    • Religious Court
    • Child Protection Board
    • KPAI
    • National Population and Family Planning Agency
    • PKK
    • Integrated Service Post
    • Junior Band

    Those are some examples of social institutions according to the types of social institutions. 

  • Definition of Financial Board, Functions, Types, and Benefits

    Definition of Financial Board – Reader friends, what comes to your mind when you hear the term Financial Board? Banks must be one of the financial institutions that come to mind, right?

    More than that, do you know that the Financial Board is actually not only limited to banks. However, there are also various other forms.

    The financial institution itself includes various business operations in the financial services sector which include banks, trust companies, insurance companies, brokerage companies, and investment traders.

    In Indonesia, the Financial Board is divided into two groups. First, there are Bank Financial Institutions and the second group is Non-Bank Financial Institutions, such as insurance, pawnshops, pension funds, mutual funds, and stock exchanges.

    In general, the Financial Board is very necessary in the modern economy because of its function as a mediator between groups of people who have excess funds and those who need funds. The Financial Board can serve many people in various ways.

    Because financial operations are an important part of any economy. Both individuals and companies rely on the Financial Board to conduct transactions and investments.

    Therefore, the government considers it important to supervise and regulate Banks and other Financial Institutions. Because the role of the Financial Board is very important and is an integral part of the economy. Historically, the bankruptcy of a Financial Institution can also cause panic.

    In the Financial Board, we can find a wide range of product and service offerings for individuals and businesses. The specific services offered vary greatly among the various types of Financial Institutions available.

    Of course, the most famous Financial Institution is the Bank, which is the first group of Financial Institutions to accept deposits, offer giro account services, make business, personal, and mortgage loans. In addition, the Bank offers basic financial products, such as certificates of deposit (CD) and savings accounts for individuals and small businesses. Banks are where many people do their banking activities.

    Meanwhile, among other Non-Bank Financial Institutions. One of the most well-known institutions is an insurance company. Insurance is also available for individuals and corporations. Insurance itself is one of the oldest financial services in Indonesia.

    Let us understand more about the Financial Board. Let’s take a look at the article below. Starting from its meaning according to experts, the function of the Financial Board, to its role in the economy.

    Definition of Financial Board

    The Financial Board is a business or institution in the field of financial services that operates by providing financial service facilities, collecting funds from the community, and channeling them back for funding to various financial activities that affect the way the economy runs. Not only that, the Financial Board also needs to rotate the flow of money in the economy by obtaining profit in the form of interest or percentage.

    Business activities in the Financial Board are various, such as providing financial services, providing loans, capital participation, and so on. However, in its operations, the Financial Board only carries out one or two business activities at once.

    Examples of fund collection processes carried out by Financial Institutions that are fairly conventional include, among others, the provision of fund storage services (savings) and examples of fund distribution process activities, namely the provision of loan (credit) services.

    The establishment of a Financial Board must also follow the procedure according to the applicable Law. The Financial Services Authority and other institutions need to supervise the activities of various Financial Institutions. Strict supervision and regulation is required to create a healthy financial services business for the community.

    However, there is still a lot more to understand from the Financial Board itself, you know. Here is the definition of Financial Board according to the experts.

    The meaning of the Financial Board according to the Members

    1. Law No. 14 of 1967 article 1 (replaced by Law No. 7/1992) on Banking

    Based on the Law, the definition of the Financial Board is a business entity whose activities collect funds from the community and channel them back to the community.

    2. SK Minister of Finance RI No. 792 of 1990

    Meanwhile, the meaning of the Financial Board according to the Decree of the Minister of Finance is all bodies whose activities are in the field of finance, collecting and disbursing funds to the community. Mainly to finance corporate investment.

    3. Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI)

    In KBBI, the Financial Board is a body in the financial field that is tasked with attracting money and distributing it to the community.

    4. Financial Services Authority (OJK)

    According to OJK, the Financial Board is an institution that collects funds from the public and invests them in the form of other financial assets. For example, credit, securities, giro, and other productive assets that are included in Bank Financial Institutions and Non-Bank Financial Institutions.

    5. Abdulkadir Muhammad

    The Financial Board is a business entity that has wealth in the form of financial assets. The wealth is then used to run businesses in the field of financial services, both providing funds to finance productive businesses and consumptive needs, as well as non-financing financial services.

    Functions of the Financial Board

    The Financial Board has various functions that are closely related to the daily life of the community. His presence has a good impact on community life, so it becomes more quality.

    However, the function of the Financial Board itself is quite different, depending on the type of institution. Even so, here are some functions of the Financial Board in general. Both Bank and Non-Bank Financial Institutions.

    1. Provide a security guarantee for money storage

    The Financial Board that stands under Indonesian law, of course all its activities will be supervised and its business activities must be in accordance with existing rules. One of the rules is to provide moral and legal guarantees to customers so that they feel safe and believe that their funds are kept intact. It will then be returned when the due date arrives, for example for savings deposits.

    2. Provide information to customers

    People who use the services of the Financial Board must obtain complete information about the financial products they use. Through the Financial Board, customers can receive information that has been provided and knowledge as clearly as possible for their interests.

    For example, when a customer wants to take out a KPR product, the bank must provide information about the KPR product from A to Z. So that the customer understands how the KPR system applies there and can follow it properly.

    3. Launch the exchange of products that use credit and cash

    The Financial Board also functions to launch product exchange services that include goods and services using credit or cash systems. For example, customers who want to own a house can make payments through KPR through the Bank.

    4. As a transaction tool for all activities

    The Financial Board also serves to provide transaction tools that can be used anywhere for a variety of needs. For example, such as inter-bank transfers, daily bill payments, up to payments for shopping.

    5. Provide financing for businesses and consumptive needs

    In this regard, the Financial Board functions to collect community funds and then rotate them back, through loan products available for financing according to customer needs.

    The community can use this financing service as needed and must meet certain conditions first. For example, customers who want to make their business bigger, apply for a productive loan at the Bank.

    Types of Financial Institutions

    Based on their type, Financial Institutions in Indonesia are divided into two types, namely Bank and Non-Bank Financial Institutions.

    To find out more about the types of financial institutions, Reader can read the book Banks and Other Financial Institutions by clicking the following link.

    1. Bank Finance Board

    Bank Financial Institution ( depository financial institution ) is a Financial Institution that provides banking facilities and services for the community. Good in storage, payment, and giving of funds.

    Simply put, the Bank Financial Board is a financial intermediary institution established with the authority to receive and collect money deposits, lend money, and issue banknotes.

    2. Non-Bank Financial Board

    Non-Bank Financial Institutions ( non-depository financial institutions ) or Non-Bank Financial Institutions (LKBB) are financial institutions that carry out the process of raising funds by issuing securities.

    In addition, the Non-Bank Board also provides various financial services and withdraws funds from the community either as a deposit or indirectly.

    Some examples of Financial Institutions that are not Banks, among others are leasing companies , insurance companies, venture capital companies, pension fund companies, securities exchanges, pawnshops, mutual funds, and others.

    Examples of Bank Financial Boards

    1. Central Bank

    The Central Bank is responsible for stabilizing the monetary system in a country. Each country has a Central Bank. In Indonesia, the Central Bank that is relied upon is Bank Indonesia. Of course, Bank Indonesia must always ensure the value of the Rupiah currency is stable, in order to provide stability to the community’s economy as well.

    2. Commercial Bank (General Bank)

    Commercial Banks are also known as Public Banks, which are business entities that provide banking services to the community conventionally or with the Sharia system. Commercial banks provide financial services, such as savings, deposits, giro, mortgages, multi-purpose credit, and others.

    3. People’s Credit Bank (BPR)

    BPR is a bank that accepts savings in the form of term deposits, provides loans and other financial services to communities in remote areas. Therefore, BPR is usually in rural areas and other locations that are far from the center.

    Examples of Non-Bank Financial Institutions

    In addition to bank financial institutions, the following are examples of non-bank financial institutions that Reader can read more about in the book Banks and Non-Bank Financial Institutions (Theory and Application) by clicking the following link.

    1. Insurance Company

    In insurance companies, of course, they provide protection services to their customers. In order to get that protection, the customer is required to pay the premium according to the provisions. Customers can also get various kinds of protection, starting from soul protection, health-related protection, protection when traveling, and others.

    2. Pawnshop

    Pawnshops are Non-Bank Financial Institutions that provide credit with guarantees. People can get loans on the condition that they guarantee their property. Examples of property that can be guaranteed are jewelry, electronic devices, motor vehicles, and others.

    3. Capital Market (Stock Exchange)

    The capital market is also one of the main types of Non-Bank Financial Institutions. Through the capital market, customers can transact using securities, such as shares, bonds or bonds, to mutual funds.

    From that transaction, the customer will later be able to reap abundant profits. To be able to enter it, customers must first register through securities or investment managers.

    4. Savings and Loan Cooperatives

    Cooperatives are Non-Bank Financial Institutions that provide savings and loan services to their members with relatively low interest, thus freeing the community from loan sharks and being able to manage money more productively.

    Financial Board Benefits

    From the several examples of Financial Boards above, of course all Boards that operate in the financial field have benefits for society and the economy.

    1. Simplify transactions by being cross payment

    The most important benefit of Financial Institutions is to provide convenience and security in financial transactions. For example, to cross daily bill payments, inter-bank transfers, money transfers abroad, to shopping transactions. Even the public can now make transactions easily through the banking application, so there is no need to come to the office directly.

    2. Providing cash with ATM withdrawal

    One of the benefits of the Financial Institution for the next community, namely the benefit of liquidity which means providing cash and guaranteed authenticity. The withdrawal of cash can be done at the nearest ATM.

    3. Transferring assets for profit

    The Financial Board is a body that can transfer financial assets for specific needs. For example, giving loans to other customers. The funds will always be rotated so that the Financial Board can survive or make a profit.

    4. Relocation of income for use in the future

    The Financial Board becomes a safe place for the relocation of customers’ income. Customers can also use funds at certain Financial Institutions for the future. For example, saved for retirement preparations or for children’s education.

    The role of the Financial Board in the Economy

    As an integral or inseparable part of the economy. Here is the important role of the Financial Board.

    1. Financial institutions such as the Central Bank have a role as printers of rupiah money which is used as a legal means of payment, with the aim of facilitating financial transactions between people in the macro economy of a country.
    2. The Financial Board of Commercial Banks has the duty to issue checks that are useful to facilitate transactions made by customers.
    3. The Financial Board can also act as a broker, broker, or dealer tasked to increase efficiency between both parties and customers.
    4. The Financial Board also plays a role in helping the channeling of funds from the household sector to borrowers, unlimitedly and without the knowledge of the fund owner. Transaction costs and information costs themselves are lower, compared to if the borrower has to search and do the transaction directly.
    5. The Financial Board also has a role to reduce the risk of loss that may be experienced by fund owners or savers. The loss in question is not paying back the customer’s savings, where this will not happen due to the Financial Board’s strategy in arranging various fund allocations.

    Conclusion

    From the explanation above, we can simply conclude that the Financial Board is a body that provides financial services that we need every day. Reader friends can also choose it according to their needs. In choosing a Financial Board, make sure to choose the best and legal one to facilitate various financial activities Teman Reader yes.

    This is a commentary on the meaning of financial institutions , their functions, types, and benefits. 

  • Meaning of Law Board, Functions, and Application Examples!

    Definition of the Legal Authority – When we hear the word law, our thoughts immediately lead to illegal actions that result in the perpetrator having to deal with the authorities. There is no harm in thinking that way, because the law was created to regulate the life of the community and must be obeyed. The consequences of breaking the law are various, some of which are so avoided by the people around them that they end up behind bars.

    In organizing and making legal regulations, it cannot be done individually and establish them unilaterally, but it is necessary to participate from several parties who finally express a joint decision in the formation of the legal regulations.

    Law enforcement itself therefore creates a legal institution that has the main task of maintaining legal stability in a country. The legal body functions so that each individual is not arbitrary in acting because all actions performed have legal rewards according to the level of crime committed.

    Well, for Reader friends wherever you are, the importance of a legal institution in regulating legal stability in a country is very important, for that it is very important to know what legal institutions exist in Indonesia and what authority they have in deciding a law.

    Further discussion on the meaning of legal institutions can be seen below!

    Meaning of Law Board

    A legal institution is an institution that has the power of law and is tasked with upholding legal justice in court. There are many law enforcement agencies. It must be emphasized again that compliance with the law means objectivity and inaccuracy. All groups of people are equal before the law. Unlike those who only run for office because they have the opportunity to break the law. The following is the Indonesian legal system.

    The legal system in the Indonesian Language Dictionary (KBBI) is a pattern of human behavior formed that consists of structured social interaction within a framework of meaningful values. While customary rules or laws are considered officially binding and approved by public or government authorities; Laws, procedures, etc. organizing social life in the community; Benchmarks (rules, regulations) for certain events (nature, etc.); the decision (deliberation) of the judge (in court); Evaluation.

    Therefore, the legal institution is a social institution whose duty is to fulfill the rules of order for members of society, both written and unwritten, so that it is considered as a centralistic institution and applies universally. Legal institutions were created to fulfill society’s expectations for justice. Because the judiciary can provide certainty and justice and guarantee the community a peaceful and secure life.

    Therefore, legal institutions are considered capable of meeting the social system related to social norms that are directly related to procedures or the importance of certain values ​​to meet the basic needs of society. Because the existence of this judicial institution is able to present facilities for the community in carrying out various activities in their lives.

    Functions of the Law Board

    Social institutions related to law have roles and functions including:

    • Protection of community members, judicial authorities protect members of the community and the possibility of crime. Protection of the community can be done with the help of various regulations. The protection of legal institutions can be preventive and repressive to create social order.
    • The maintenance of the rule of law by the legal institution as a social institution has its own rules of the game that must be implemented. The purpose is for the legal institution to remain strong in society.
    • In order to organize sanctions so that society obeys the law, social control is needed. Legal institutions as a tool of social control play a role in preventing the spread of deviant behavior in society.
    • Giving guidance about community behavior, in Indonesia one type of legal institution is the police, which has the power to enforce rules, for example in this case traffic regulations, which play a role in giving guidance about community traffic. With this guide you can create order and peace together.
    • As a tool to change society’s behavior Another task of the judiciary is to change society’s behavior that is not appropriate through good means (persuasion) or violence. The expected behavior is behavior that is in accordance with the legal norms that implement the social order.

    Dimensions of Law Enforcement

    There are three dimensions that must be observed in law enforcement, including:

    • The application of law is considered as a normative system (standard system), that is, the application of law that reflects the social values ​​that all witnesses to criminal acts are imbued with.
    • Law enforcement should be seen as an administrative system that includes interaction between various police agencies, which is a subsystem of the judiciary mentioned above.
    • The application of criminal law is a social system in the sense that the definition of a crime must take into account the differences of opinion that apply to all levels of society.

    Law Enforcement Factors

    The factors that affect law enforcement, according to Soerjono Soekanto are as follows:

    1. Legal Factors

    In the field of criminal prosecution, there are sometimes conflicts about legal certainty and justice, because the concept of law is an abstract formulation, while legal certainty is a normatively determined process.

    Therefore, a policy or action that is not entirely based on the law is allowed as long as the policy or action does not violate the law. Therefore, law enforcement does not only include law enforcement, but also peace, because law enforcement is a process of forming values ​​and behavior to build peace.

    2. Law Enforcement Factors

    An important role is played by the mind or personality of the official in the implementation of the law, if the rules are good, but the quality of the official is not good, the problem is clearly not solved. Therefore, one of the keys to the success of the police is the mindset and personality of the law.

    3. Institutional factors and supporting services

    Supporting means and facilities include software and hardware, for example software is training. The training received by police officers currently tends to be routine, so that many police officers encounter obstacles to achieving their goals, including knowledge of computer crimes and specific crimes that are currently included in the scope of the prosecution.

    Because the policy is technically and legally incompetent and not ready. Although it is known that the duties that the police must perform are very broad and diverse.

    4. Community Factors

    Law enforcement of course comes from within the community and strives to create and promote peace in the community. Every person or group at least has an awareness of the law, the next problem that arises is the level of compliance ie. high, moderate and poor adherence. There is a level of law enforcement itself. And this is an indication of the effectiveness of the relevant law.

    5. Cultural factors

    According to Soerjono Soekanto, culture has such a great task for society, which is to organize so that people know how to act, act and determine their attitude towards others. Therefore, culture is the basic line of behavior that establishes rules about what should be done and what is prohibited.

    Indonesian law enforcement agencies based on law

    In addition to the term “law enforcement” in the Advocate Law, there are other terms related to the term “law enforcement”. Law enforcement agencies and their responsibilities are found among others in the following regulations.

    • Article 2 of UU 2/2002 states that the duty of the police is one of the duties of state administrators in the field of maintaining public order and security, law enforcement, protection, protection, and service to the community.
    • According to Article 101(6) UU 8/1995, Bapepam (Capital Market Authority) can request assistance from law enforcement agencies, the police, the Immigration Service and the Ministry in connection with the implementation of its investigative powers. prosecutors and prosecutors.
    • Article 49(3)(i) of the OJK Law states that Financial Services Authority officials have the authority to request assistance from law enforcement agencies. Then what is meant by “other law enforcement agencies” is the prosecutor’s office and the police. and the court. Article 2 of the Constitutional Court Law states that the Constitutional Court is one of the state institutions that exercise independent jurisdiction in the administration of justice to strengthen law and justice.
    • PP 16/2018 paragraph 1 item 2 explains that the State Servant Policy (Pol PP) is a member of the Satpol PP as a regional government unit that has an office and gets duties, responsibilities, and authority in accordance with the laws and regulations in the administration of government. district regulations and district director. Order, enforcement of public order and peace and community protection.

    Examples of the Law Board in Indonesia

    A legal institution is an institution that has the power of law and is tasked with upholding legal justice in court. There are many law enforcement agencies. It must be emphasized again that compliance with the law means objectivity and inaccuracy. All groups of people are equal before the law. Unlike those who only run for office because they have the opportunity to break the law.

    The following are Indonesian legal institutions:

    1. National Police of the Republic of Indonesia

    One of the members of the muspika is the police, this first institution is recognized by the city government. Its existence is directly related to the community within the National Police of the Republic of Indonesia, there are many units. For example, the Cybercrime Unit that protects the public from illegal crimes in the cyber world, and SATLANTAS (Traffic Unit) that regulates traffic on public roads.

    The government decided to hand over police duties. This means that its existence is also guaranteed by the government. Law No. 2 of 2002 about the National Police of the Republic of Indonesia:

    Stated: “The duty of the police is one of the duties of the national government in maintaining the security and order of the community, policing, protection, protection, and service to the community.”

    Polri also usually participates in the continuity of other national institutions. For example, assisting the Financial Services Authority (OJK) and other General Managers who need legal advice. The presence of police is widespread from the central level to the districts.

    There is a police unit in the area, commonly called Satpol PP (Pamong Praja Police Unit). This unit usually destroys law and order in the community to keep community life in a safe and peaceful area. PP Satpol actions which are often taken over by illegal Street Vendors (PKL) and GePeng (vagrants and beggars) who destroy urban planning and public facilities often attract media attention.

    2. Constitutional Court

    MK or the Constitutional Court adjudicates legal cases at the court table. This board holds a very important role in law enforcement. The reason is simple, the judiciary is the boss who decides how to proceed with matters, especially in disputes where there is no jurisprudence.

    The existence of the Constitutional Court was confirmed in 2003 by including articles about the Constitutional Court into the law. Law Number 24 of 2003, ratified in August of the same year, regulates the Constitutional Court. To understand who the Constitutional Court is dealing with, read the following description:

    1. Constitutional judge

    A judge is a person who has the authority to adjudicate a matter. Constitutional Court judges can serve for two terms of office, each term of office is five years (Read:

    jurisdiction of the Constitutional Court). There are 9 constitutional judges, each consisting of:

    • 3 people are elected by the Supreme Court
    • 3 people are elected by the House of Representatives (DPR).
    • 3 people are chosen by the President

    2. Head of the Constitutional Court

    • The Chief of the Constitutional Court is the person who leads the Constitutional Court.
    • The constitutional judge elects the Chief of the Constitutional Court for a term of three years

    3. Supreme Court

    The Supreme Court has a high position in the Indonesian legal system. The Supreme Court deals with cases at the Supreme Court level. The duties and functions of the Supreme Court are also different according to the law. Meanwhile, there are several levels of justice as follows:

    • first level: in the state court
    • Second level: to be dealt with by the high court
    • third level: to be dealt with by the Supreme Court

    The jurisdiction of the Supreme Court covers several areas. From the scope of common law to the military. Because of its jurisdiction over cassation, the Supreme Court also has the authority to advise the president on amnesty and rehabilitation. The composition of the Supreme Court is as follows:

    • Supreme Court Candidate: Supreme Court candidate is a candidate submitted to the DPR by the Judicial Commission (KY). However, confirmation is done by the President.
    • Supreme Court Judges: This has a maximum of 60 members who can be selected based on their legal career or academic expertise.
    • Chief Justice of the Supreme Court: The Chief Justice of the Supreme Court is just one of the judges of the Supreme Court. In addition, the head position can also be directly proposed by the president based on their career and experience in law.

    4. Military High Court

    There are several levels of military justice. In fact, the military court represents the judicial authority in the armed forces. His position is considered on the basis of national security. The military justice environment is also classified according to its level as follows:

    • There is a basic military court in the city where KODAM is located
    • The Class B Military Court is located in the city where KOREM is located

    Meanwhile, military justice graduates have the following hierarchy:

    1. High Military Court

    The defendants in this trial are soldiers with the rank of major. In this process, 5 people will be judges.

    • 1 leader
    • 2 members
    • 1 senior military inspector (the prosecutor has the same functions and duties as the prosecutor in the field of prosecution)
    • 1 clerk

    2. Main General Court

    Cases appearing before the military high court and on appeal are dealt with here. In short, the court under the Supreme Court is a continuation of the Military High Court. The location is also in the capital of Indonesia. The composition of the members is as follows:

    • 1 Chief (minimum rank of Brigadier General or Marshal and First Admiral)
    • 2 members (minimum rank of colonel)
    • 1 officer (major rank – colonel)

    Conclusion

    So much for a short discussion about the definition from the legal institution. This discussion does not only discuss the definition of legal institutions but also discusses further the functions, dimensions, laws that regulate legal institutions, law enforcement factors, as well as examples of legal institutions in Indonesia.

    Understanding the meaning of legal institutions gives us additional knowledge about various legal institutions in Indonesia as well as knowing their functional role in maintaining legal stability.

    Such is the commentary on the meaning of legal institutions. 

  • Understanding Ecology: Kinds, Scope and Benefits

    Understanding Ecology

    If you discuss about natural science, surely you must know about ecosystems, right? Well, in addition to the ecosystem, you too have certainly heard of ecology, right? Yes, ecology is one part of the branch of science that studies the interaction of living things with their environment.

    The term from ecology itself is often considered as a foreign term and rarely heard by the community. In fact, there are some people who think that ecology and ecosystem are different meanings.

    Ecology was first introduced by a German biologist named Ernst Heinrich Philipp August Haeckel. Long name, isn’t it? Yep, you can call him Ernst Haeckel.

    If viewed epistemologically (science), the word ecology comes from the Greek language, namely oikos and logos. The word Oikos has the meaning of habitat, while the word logos has the meaning of knowledge.

    So, if studied further, ecology has the meaning as one of the sciences that studies the relationship between organisms (living things) and their environment. The meaning is very diverse according to how experts interpret it.

    Yep, as explained before, that ecology is one of the branches of science in biology. According to the historical records, for the first time the science of ecology was used by a German biologist named Ernst Haeckel in 1896. Since then, the discussion about ecology began to be widely discussed in the world of education.

    Anthony van Leeuwenhoek is one example of a figure known for his studies of food chains and population regulation. In addition, it turns out that since thousands of years ago famous figures such as Hippocrates, Aristotle, and also other Greek philosophers have written some material that is now included in the field of ecology. 

    In some books, ecology itself has been interpreted as a science that studies the relationship in the form of interaction between an organism and nature or can also be with the surrounding environment.

    Ecology itself has its own scope and what is included in the scope of ecology is population, community, ecosystem, up to the biosphere. As explained earlier, that ecology is one of the biological sciences that studies the interaction between organisms and nature and the surrounding environment. 

    Therefore, ecology is also closely related to ecosystems. In the Big Indonesian Dictionary or KBBI, there is the term ecosystem ecology which has the meaning as an analysis that is viewed from a structural and also functional point of view, and includes the relationship between biotic and abiotic. 

    Meanwhile, as reported by The Ecological Society of America, ecology is a science that seeks to study and explain the importance of the relationship between living things and the surrounding environment, including the benefits of ecosystems for living things. 

    From the explanation that has been presented above, it can be concluded that ecology is a science that studies the relationship between living things (judging from their interactions) with their environment. Ecology also has an important role in aspects of human life.

    Why? Because ecology has a scope that also includes ecosystems. Therefore, this article will discuss in more detail about the scope of ecology. Here is the explanation.

    Scope of Ecological Science

    Ecology in general studies the interaction of organisms with the living environment around them. The scope of ecology is basically limited to several things, such as individuals, populations, communities, ecosystems, and the biosphere.

    1. Individuals

    The first scope of ecology is the Individual. Yes, as you know that an individual is a unit of organism of each type or even a certain species that exists in an environment. How about an example from an individual? Examples are humans, a bird, a deer, and others.

    2. Population

    The second scope is population. Where the population is a group of individuals of the same type that exist in a certain place and at a certain time. The simple language can be explained as a combination of several individuals of the same type that are in one place.

    What is the sample from the population? For example, the population is the population of humans, the population of birds, the population of grass, and there are many other populations that you can find in your surroundings.

    3. Community

    Community is one of the scope of ecology. Community is understood as a group of living beings that consists of several populations in it and interact with each other in a certain place and time.

    An example of a community, for example, is a grassland community. In grassland communities there are various types of populations. There are grass populations, grasshopper populations, bird populations, snake populations, and various other populations.

    4. Ecosystem

    The scope of the fourth ecology is the ecosystem. Well, if you previously knew the ecosystem as ecology. It means you are wrong. Why? Because ecosystems are part of the scope of ecology.

    Ecosystem itself is understood as a condition where there is a reciprocal relationship and also an interdependent relationship between a living being and its environment. 

    For example, the easiest ecosystems for you to know are forests and seawater ecosystems. All individuals in the forest and also the sea interact with each other and depend on each other.

    5. Biosphere

    Maybe you rarely hear the word biosphere. However, at the level of biological organization, the biosphere is the largest level and also contains all life on earth. 

    In the biosphere there are also all the interactions between the physical environment as a whole.

    6. Landscape

    The sixth scope of ecology is landscape or commonly known as landscape ecology. This landscape has a focus on the factors that control the circulation of energy, matter, and also organisms in an ecosystem.

    7. Global

    The global scope relies on a regional energy exchange and also the influence of matter on function, as well as the distribution of organisms at the highest level, namely the biosphere.

    Aspects & Principles of Ecology

    After knowing the meaning and also the scope of ecology, then in this discussion you will be informed about the aspects and principles of ecology that must be observed. 

    Without further ado, let’s check out the explanation below.

    Key Aspects of Ecology

    Some important aspects in studying ecology are as follows.

    • The study of the relationship between organisms or groups of organisms with their environment.
    • The study of the interaction of organisms or groups of organisms with their environment.
    • Study about the structure and function of nature.

    Key Principles of Ecology

    As for the main principles of ecology. Principles in ecology include the following.

    • There is an interaction
    • There is an attitude of mutual dependence ( interdependence )
    • There is diversity in it ( diversity )
    • There is a harmony
    • The existence of sustainable capabilities ( sustainability )

    Ecological Benefits

    Ecology itself has benefits for the environment. In this discussion is an explanation of the benefits of ecology for the environment. Let’s read and understand the explanation below.

    1. Know Biodiversity

    Ecological science also provides benefits to humans as a way to understand various living things as well as the relationship between living things and their environment.

    For example, ecology helps humans to understand how a camel can survive in a very dry and high temperature environment. Another example is that humans can understand how a penguin can survive in an environment that has very low temperatures such as the poles.

    2. Knowing the Behavior of Living Beings

    If the previous benefit is to know biodiversity. Therefore, the science of ecology also provides benefits to humans to be able to recognize the behavior of living beings and how they relate or interact with the environment. 

    What is an example of the benefits of knowing the behavior of living beings? An example is a sonar system on submarines that mimics the senses of bats and dolphins.

    By imitating the behavior of the two animals, humans can take advantage of that and develop it as technology from submarines that function to determine targets or locations.

    3. Knowing the Role of Humans on the Environment

    The third benefit is a benefit that can be said to be one of the reflection materials of human actions and discoveries. Ecology also makes people more aware of the role of humans in their environment. 

    As an example is DDT products. This product is used for the purpose of eradicating pests, it turns out that this product can even pollute the human environment and also other organisms. With the help of ecological science, people can know about products that are useful for them, but also know the impact.

    4. Food Consumption Mapping

    Ecology is also useful for mapping food consumption and knowing the structure and scale of food from every living creature on this earth. For example, plants as creatures are categorized as producers and herbivores as level I consumers.

    In addition, there are carnivorous animals that rank as level II consumers and also humans as level III consumers. After that, there are still more decomposers and also the results of the decomposition are consumed again by producers as one of the energy sources.

    This is commonly referred to as the life cycle and food chain. You know, right?

    5. Solutions to Agricultural Problems

    Ecological knowledge can also solve various problems in the world of agriculture. A farmer apparently needs some microbes that can produce nitrates and also ammonium to maintain soil fertility. Well, this is the result of knowledge from ecological science. Isn’t it amazing? 

    6. Solution to Energy Problems

    Ecological knowledge is also useful to help humans to ensure the availability of energy that works to support their lives. For example is the use of alternative energy from solar energy that has the purpose of producing electricity.

    7. Solutions to Health Problems

    The last benefit of ecological science is to help people solve various problems related to health. Through ecology, humans can learn about various diseases that have never been discovered before. One of them is dengue or dengue fever.

    Ecology found that dengue or dengue fever is caused by the Aedes Aegypti mosquito. This condition can certainly be overcome with certain handling methods. One of them is by draining the water reservoir.

    This is done so that there is no nest for mosquitoes to breed by not laying eggs in puddles.

    Ecological Type

    After discussing the benefits that have been revealed about ecological science on human life, it turns out that ecological science has several types. In this discussion, we will look at the types of ecology. 

    Without further ado, let’s take a look and pay attention to the explanation of the types of ecology below.

    There are several types of ecological science that have been applied in various aspects of human life, namely:

    • Human ecology is a branch of ecology that has a focus on learning about human environmental conditions.
    • Plant ecology is a branch of ecological science that studies plants as an organism and also centers the plant itself as a main focus, ignoring animals and humans.
    • Animal ecology is a branch of ecology that has a central focus on animals as an organism, and ignores humans and plants.
    • Aquatic ecology, which is one of the branches of ecological science that studies and finds out the relationship between organisms and the aquatic environment, such as rivers, reservoirs, estuaries, and even the sea.
    • Habitat ecology is a branch of ecological science that focuses on discussing the nature of a habitat.
    • Population ecology is a branch of ecology that focuses on studying various relationships between groups of organisms and the number of individuals. Population ecology also studies and finds out about the factors that determine the size of a population and its spread.
    • Social ecology is a branch of ecological science that studies and finds out about the relationship between humans and the natural environment as well as the technology around them.
    • Language ecology is an ecological science that studies and also conducts research on a relationship between language and the human environment.
    • Space ecology is an ecological science that studies the ecosystems that can support all human life during space flight.

       

       

    Well, that’s it from this article. It turns out that ecology is a very extraordinary science. Proven from the various benefits that can help people in their daily lives and also for the needs of the environment.

    Hopefully by reading this article, you will have a better understanding of the ecological science that has been discussed above. Hopefully, with this article, you will be able to distinguish between ecosystem and ecology.

    This is an article that discusses ecology, starting from the meaning, aspects and principles, scope, benefits, and also the types of ecology.

    If you want to find other articles and discuss about knowledge that you have not yet understood, you can find it on the Sinaumedia site. Just visit www.Sinaumedia.com . You can get a variety of interesting information.

    So, don’t forget to read it, Reader #SahabatTanpaBatas! Start from simple things so that you can get used to reading and can improve literacy in Indonesia. 

    Oh yes, by reading, you can improve and train your imagination. In addition, you can also add a lot of interesting and cool new vocabulary. So, let’s get used to always reading. Happy reading for all Reader.

     

  • Meaning of Legislation Along with Duties and Authority

    Legislative Understanding – In the process of forming a country, the founders or founding fathers tried to find a standard form for the government system. This is done with the aim of developing and developing the quality of the country. We can conclude that the country must meet the components that have high potential to build the integrity of the country. Usually, it is the basic components that have the function as a foundation to build a country. The components are the form of the country, the form of government, and also the government system.

    The process in this government system has various uses and functions for the country. This government system has a very important role in a country. Without a government system, the country will be in chaos, because the country has not determined who will be the leader of the country, who will hold the highest power, and the country has not yet known who will be the representative of the people, and so on. The self-government system is divided into three, among others the executive, legislative, and judiciary. In this article, we will explain the meaning of legislation in more depth.

    Legislative Meaning

    The legislative body is a government body that has a general function in making laws. Where this legislative body has several functions, namely the function of legislation and also the function of control. In Indonesia itself, the legislative body is the House of Representatives or DPR and also the House of District Representatives or DPD.

    1. DPR or House of Representatives

    Generally, DPR members come from political parties that are directly elected by the people through the election process. This DPR is located at the central level, while those at the provincial and regency/city level are the DPRD or the District House of Representatives. The following are some of the duties and authorities that must be performed by DPR members, as follows:

    a. Forming laws that have been discussed together with the President
    b. Giving consent on district regulations replacing Law
    c. Receive and also discuss the problems of the Bill or Draft Law submitted by the DPD
    d. Considering the DPD on the draft APBN Law related to taxes, education, and also religion
    e. Setting the APBN or the National Income and Expenditure Budget together with the President by taking into account considerations from the DPD
    f. Select members of the Financial Inspection Body with consideration from the DPD
    g. Select three candidates for constitutional judges and submit them to the President and others

    In carrying out their duties and also their authority, DPR members also have certain rights, among others:

    a. Interpellation Right, which is the right to ask the President for information.
    b. Questionnaire Rights, which is the right used to submit Draft Laws to the government.
    c. The Right of Initiative, which is the right to submit a Draft Law to the government.
    d. Amendment Right, which is the right to make changes to the Draft Law.
    e. Budget Right, which is the right used to submit the RAPBN or National Income and Expenditure Budget Plan.
    f. The right to Petition, which is the right used to ask questions about government policy.

    Meanwhile, in Article 20A of the 1945 Constitution, DPR holds the highest power in forming legislation. Therefore, DPR has 3 important functions, among others:

    a. Legislative function, namely DPR as a law maker together with the President.
    b. Budget function, namely the DPR as the holder of power in determining the APBN proposed by the President.
    c. Oversight function, namely the House of Representatives supervises the running of the government.

    The DPR conducts a session at least once a year.

    2. District Representative House or DPD

    DPD members are made up of representatives from the provinces who have been selected through the election process. The membership of the DPD is formalized by the President’s decision and is located in the electoral district. Where DPD members do not come from political parties, but from community organizations. The tenure of DPD members is five years.

    Based on Article 22D of the 1945 Constitution, DPD members have the following authority, among others:

    1. Submitting Draft Laws to the DPR related to regional autonomy, regional central relations, formation, expansion, and regional mergers, natural resource management, as well as regional central finance.
    2. Give consideration to members of the DPR on the Draft APBN Law and also the Bill related to taxes, education, and also religion.
    3. Supervise the implementation of those matters and report them to DPR.

    Functions of the National Board: Executive and Judiciary

    The following is an explanation of the functions of state institutions other than legislative institutions, namely the executive and also the judiciary. Below is a complete explanation.

    1. Executive Board

    This executive board is a board that functions to implement the laws that have been set by the legislative board. In countries that adhere to a democratic government system, generally the executive board consists of the head of state, be it the king or the president, accompanied by his ministers. In Indonesia itself, the members of the executive board are the MPR or the People’s Consultative Assembly, the President, and also the Vice President, as well as the ministers.

    a. MPR or People’s Consultative Assembly

    Before the 1945 Constitutional Amendment, the sovereignty in the hands of the people was fully exercised by the MPR. Therefore, the MPR is often referred to as the highest institution of the country with authority under the Constitution. However, after the 1945 Constitutional Amendment, people’s sovereignty is no longer exercised by the MPR, but is exercised according to the Basic Law.

    MPR members are a combination of members of the DPR or House of Representatives and also the DPD or District House of Representatives who are elected by the people directly through the election process. The provisions regarding the number of members are regulated in the law. The MPR holds a session at least once in five years. The MPR’s most visible authority is appointing the President and Vice President who have been elected by the people through elections.

    Based on Article 3 paragraph 1 in the 1945 Constitution, the MPR has the following duties and authorities:

    a. Change and establish legislation
    b. Appoint the president and vice president
    c. Dismiss the president and also the vice president during their term of office according to the Basic Law

    Members of the MPR, in carrying out their duties and authority, have certain rights, namely:

    a. Submitting motions related to changes in articles in legislation
    b. Determine the attitude and also the choice in the decision-making process
    c. Choosing and being chosen
    d. Defending himself
    e. Immunity or the right to continue to carry out his duties and authority without being sued from court
    f. Protocol or the right to obtain respect in respect of his office
    g. Financial and also administrative

    b. President

    Before the 1945 Constitutional Amendment, the president and his representative were elected by the MPR. However, after the 1945 Constitutional Amendment, the president and his representative were elected by the people directly through the election process. The president and vice president will serve for five years and can be re-elected only once in the next general election. The president is the head of state and also the head of government. As a head of state, the president has the duties and authority set out in the 1945 Constitution, among others:

    a. Making agreements with other countries with the approval of the DPR or House of Representatives
    b. Appointing ambassadors and consuls to be placed in the capital of other countries and also in Indonesia
    c. Receiving ambassadors from other countries
    d. Giving titles, marks of service, and also marks of honor to nationals, whether they are Indonesian nationals or foreign nationals who have already served.

    While as the head of government that runs the country’s government, the President has the following rights and obligations:

    a. Holding government power based on the 1945 Constitution
    b. Submitting Draft Laws to DPR
    c. Set government regulations
    d. Upholding and implementing the Basic Law
    e. Granting pardon or forgiveness to convicts and also rehabilitation or restoration of the good name of an accused person based on the consideration of the Supreme Court: MA
    f. Granting amnesty or reduction of convicts’ sentences as well as abolition or cancellation of criminal charges based on the DPR’s consideration.

    In addition to serving and acting as the head of state and also the head of government, the president is also the supreme commander in the armed forces. So as to have the following authority:

    a. Declaring war and also making peace with other countries on the basis of DPR approval
    b. Making international agreements based on DPR approval
    c. Declaring the state of danger to a condition and also a situation that is taking place in the country.

    2. Judicial Board

    This judicial body is a government body that has the authority to interpret the content of the law and also to sanction violations of its implementation. In its implementation, this one board must be free from interference from the executive board. This is intended so that the enforcement of law and justice is not one-sided or too partisan.

    1. Supreme Court or MA

    The Board of the Supreme Court or MA is one of the holders of the highest judicial authority from all judicial circles. Where the MA board is headed by the Chief Justice who is assisted by several other judges. The Supreme Judge was proposed by the DPR from the Judicial Commission. This MA board has several obligations and also its own authority, among others:

    1. Judging at the level of cassation, testing legal regulations, and also other authority given by the Law.
    2. Nominate three members of the constitutional judge.
    3. Give consideration to rehabilitation and also pardon proposed by the President.

    2. Constitutional Court or MK

    The Board of the Supreme Court has the authority to exercise judicial power in the sphere of general justice, military, religion, and also the administration of the State. The Constitutional Court has the authority to adjudicate at the first and last level. In the MK, there are nine constitutional judges who have been appointed by the President. The following are the duties and functions of the Constitutional Court, among others:

    1. Test the law on the Basic Law
    2. Decide on disputes over the authority of national institutions whose authority is given by the Basic Law
    3. Decide on the dissolution of political parties
    4. Decide on disputes about election results

    3. Judicial Commission or KY

    The Judicial Commission Board was formed to oversee the behavior of judges and also dirty practices in the judicial administration process. In the 1945 Constitution as amended, the position of the Judicial Commission is independent and its existence is formed and dismissed by the President with the approval of the DPR.

    Such is the explanation of the meaning of the legislature and other national institutions in Indonesia. Hopefully useful.

     

  • Understanding Relay Running: History, Race Types and Techniques

    Meaning of Relay Running – Relay running is one of the friendly sports branches in the community. This relay race is often done in physical education lessons at school. Students will practice and even run a relay race.

    In doing so, high concentration is required. In addition, running speed should also be considered because it is an important thing. As well as requiring excellent team coordination between one runner and another runner who is a teammate. This is done to obtain maximum results.

    Previously, what is the meaning of relay running? This article will discuss the sport of relay running. Starting from the understanding of relay running, history, types of races to the techniques needed.

    Meaning of Relay Run

    What is the meaning of relay running? Relay runs are also often referred to as relay runs. The reason is that relay runs are done in a continuous manner.

    Therefore, a relay race is a race that is done in groups. Generally there can be 2 to 4 people in the group. Everyone in the group will get a turn to finish.

    Then, what is the meaning of relay running? Relay running is one of the sports of running. Relay running is one of the athletic branches.

    As explained earlier, the relay runs will be played alternately. Therefore, this relay race requires a team. Teams or groups are used to pass the baton, from one runner to the next.

    In the relay race number, there is a specificity. The specificity will not be found in other birth numbers. That is to move the stick while running quickly.

    The baton transfer will happen to the next runner from the previous runner. In a big competition, generally team members or groups consist of 4 people. This relay running sport looks easy if we observe it.

    However, actually not only technique is needed in relay running. However, there are some other things that should also be considered. Such as the speed between runners, agility and skill.

    Those things are certainly important in giving or receiving a stick. The place or zone used to move the stick has also been determined. The adjustment between distance and speed should also be noted by every runner.

    The Meaning of Relay According to the Experts

    The following is the meaning of relay running according to some experts:

    1. KBBI (Big Indonesian Dictionary)

    In KBBI, the word relay goes into the athletic category. The meaning of the relay is a double race by dividing the distance between the participants. At the end of the part, each person hands over an object (for example a stick or a flag) to the next participant.

    2. Guthrie (2008)

    The meaning of relay running is a run that combines two things. It is a combination of speed coordination with the cooperation of the runner team. The purpose is to help complete the tasks that have been given. The task of this is a stick.

    3. Irwansyah (2006)

    According to Irwansyah, the meaning of a relay race is a run performed by four athletes. Relay runs are used using batons. Relay sticks used in relay races are generally made of fiberglass or wood.

    4. Moh. Crazy(2007)

    The meaning of relay running according to Moh. Gilang is one of the numbers in the running race. At the athletic competition should be done alternately or alternately. In a relay team, there are four runners.

    The four runners are runner 1, runner 2, runner 3, and runner 4. They will move sticks to each other while running. It starts from the first runner, until the next runner.

    History of Relay Running

    After knowing the meaning of relay running, the history of relay running will be discussed further. Apparently, relay running has been around for a long time. The relay running movements have been done before.

    Some of the movements in the relay race include walking, running, throwing, catching and jumping. The movement is of course often performed by humans in their daily activities.

    The year this sport started is not certain. However, this relay sport started because it was inspired by the story of the 3 tribes. The tribes are the Aztecs, the Incas and the Maya.

    The movements are performed by the tribes in completing a mission. The three bangs aini tribes use a technique, namely the continuous running technique. The purpose is to convey an important news that has been known for a long time.

    The relay race is inspired by how to complete those missions. The people of the Ancient Greeks also used objects in the form of torches that were given continuously. It was done during the ancestral worship ritual.

    In addition, also continue the sacred fire to his new jurisdiction. Since there is a ritual tradition that uses torch fire as a relay, the Ancient Greeks began to recognize it as a sport. In addition, the Ancient Greeks also had a competition or Olympics about the relay, they called it the Olympic flame.

    In a race, Olympics or championship, the type of relay running that is often done is the 4 x 100 meter relay. In addition, the 4 x 400 meter category is also contested quite often. However, there are also some who organize relay races more than that.

    The Olympics or the 4 x 100 meter category relay race and the 4 x 400 meter category were first held in 1992. Held in Stockholm, Sweden. However, at that time the race was only reserved for men.

    The relay race for women started in 1928. Then in 1972, it was held again. The race was held for the 4 x 100 meter category and the 4 x 400 meter category.

    Baton Relay

    This relay baton will later be given in turn from one runner to the next runner in a group. This stick will later be carried until it reaches the finish line. The size of this relay running stick also has its own provisions.

    Like the size that should fit and fit the grip of runners in general. Then, what are the other provisions of the relay baton? Here is the explanation:

    1.       Relay running sticks have a length of around 29 cm to 30 cm
    2.       The relay running stick has a diameter of 3.81 cm for adult size. As for children, the diameter is around 2.54 cm.
    3.       The maximum weight of this stick is 50 grams.
    4.       Relay running sticks are generally made of several materials. Such as fine pipes, metal, wood, and other materials that have a hole in the middle.
    5.       Relay batons must be colored. The purpose is to be easily seen by runners from afar when carried by other runners.

    Field for Relay Run

    The number of strips is around 6 to 10 pieces. As for the indoor field field , the track length is around 200 meters. Consists of a total of 4 to 8 strips. The shape of the field is round like an egg.

    The zone used for changeovers in the relay run is only 10 meters in front of the start line . In addition, there is also 10 meters behind the start line .

    Types of Relay Races

    What are the types of relay races? Here is the explanation:

    1. Run a long distance relay

    Long-distance relay running is currently gaining popularity. This race was also followed by many runners from various levels. Like at the amateur level, beginners to professionals.

    The length of this long-distance relay race can reach tens of kilometers. This relay race generally has 5 to 36 stages or legs. Each stage or leg has a distance between members of 5 and 10 km.

    2. Run a relay between countries

    Relay races between countries have also been held. In 2017, the IAAF World Cross Country Championships were held. At this championship, a relay race was held from various countries.

    This competition will pit teams or groups between countries. Contestants also consist of a mixture of men and women. The distance used in this race is 4 x 2 km or 2 km for each runner.

    3. Medley relay

    This type of relay running championship has different distances for each runner. The distance of 4 stages or legs in a long distance medley relay race consists of several distances. Namely 1200 meters, 400 meters, 800 meters and 1,600 meters.

    Whereas the short distance medley relay usually consists of 4 stages or legs. Stage or leg distance varies. That is 400 meters, 200 meters, 800 meters. Other variants consist of 200 meters, 100 meters and 400 meters.

    Techniques in Relay Running

    Relay technique

    This relay race generally starts with a squat. After starting, the runners will run away from the starting line line . However, there are other things that should be noted.

    In addition to running speed, runners should also pay attention to technique in giving and receiving sticks. And pay attention to how the replacement process is.

    1. Stick holding technique

    In holding the baton, there is a technique that must be understood. Techniques like this are useful so that the stick does not fall easily. In this technique, the stick will be held at the end, only half of it. Half of the baton will be left to be held by the recipient of the next relay baton, in the form of another runner.

    2. The technique of handing over and receiving the cane

    In a race, a special area is needed to hand over and receive the baton. Sticks should be done in that specific area. the area is called wishel. The length of the wissel area is only about 20 meters.

    Runners should be able to take advantage of the area. It is used for changing sticks. The change of cane should also be done as quickly and accurately as possible.

    Runners who hand over the baton outside the switch will be disqualified, for breaking the rules. As for the stick handover technique, there are three types of techniques. The technique consists of downsweep, upsweep, and push pass. Here is the explanation:

    a. Downsweep technique

    The downsweep submission technique is a stick submission technique performed from above. This technique is performed when the recipient’s palm is facing upwards. The runner who will give the baton must hand over the baton from the side of the first runner.

    The purpose is to make it easier to see and receive the stick. The cane recipient’s thumb should be positioned open. And the other fingers close together.

    The cane receiver can receive the cane by turning his back. In addition, it can also be done without seeing when the baton is being handed over by the previous runner.

    b. Upsweep technique

    In this technique, handing the stick will be done from the bottom up. This is done when the recipient’s palm is facing downwards. When receiving the cane, it must be ensured that the thumb is wide open.

    In addition, the other finger positions will be closed. It is the same as in the previous technique. The cane recipient is also welcome to turn towards the back. However, not looking back is also not a problem.

    c. Push pass technique

    This one technique will be done by lifting the arm towards the back. The way is with the palm to the side, then the thumb will point downwards. The runner will hand over the baton by holding it vertically. Then push it with the palm of your hand.

    That is a brief review on the meaning of relay running, the history of relay running, the types of races and the techniques that runners should do. 

  • Understanding Report, Functions, Features, Types, Structure, & Manufacturing Steps

    Meaning of Report – Report is a general term that is often used in everyday life. Not only in the work environment, but also at the school level and even RT or RW. However, do you know what the report actually means?

    In the academic world, there is often overlapping information about the meaning of report and essay. The two words are sometimes used interchangeably.

    In general, reports are more needed for business, scientific, technical subjects, and in the workplace. Reports concentrate on facts, while essays present arguments and reasoning.

    In order to better understand the report, here is a complete explanation. Starting from the meaning of reports according to experts, functions, benefits, characteristics, structure, types, to things that need to be observed in making reports.

    Meaning of Report

    The word report in Indonesian is the meaning of the word report in English. However, the word report itself originally comes from two Latin words, namely the word re which means loaded or backward and the word portare which has the meaning of carrying or conveying.

    The two words were combined to form the word reportare which means to convey complete information from what has been obtained before. Meanwhile, in the Indonesian Language Dictionary (KBBI), the word report has the meaning of everything that is reported or a piece of news.

    The report itself is a reflection of 5W1H. Contains about what ( what ) happened, where ( where ) the event took place, when ( when ) the event happened, why ( why ) it could happen, and who ( who ) is responsible for something that has happened , as well as how it happened.

    In carrying out the activities of an organization or company, reports are of course very important. Because, reports can be one of the official tools to convey information in a simple and objective manner, about all relevant problems.

    In simple terms, a report is a form of information delivery that contains facts about a matter, both verbally and in writing. The information conveyed through the report can also have various contents, depending on the needs. Starting from news information, information, notifications, to accountability.

    The facts presented in the report are of course based on objective conditions that have been experienced by the person in charge of making the report. Especially when he is doing a job or activity.

    The Meaning of the Report According to the Experts

    The definition of a report can also vary, depending on the person making it. Here are some meanings of the report according to the experts.

    1. Himstreet (1998)

    A report is a message delivered systematically and objectively. It is used to convey information from one division of the organization to another department or other institution, to help make decisions or solve problems.

    2. JC Denyern

    A report is a communication tool where the writer presents information in an organized format, which is in the form of some conclusions about the situation that has been investigated for a specific audience and with a specific purpose.

    3. Dr. Prejudi Atmosudirjo

    A report is any writing that contains the results of processing data and information in the form of a short, sharp, and concise document for a specific purpose and audience.

    4. Alawites

    A report is information made by an officer or official to be given to other officials in an administrative system.

    5. Mulyadi

    Reports are accounting information in the form of computer printouts. The data is stored neatly in the computer.

    6. Craft (2001)

    A report is a means of communication carried out by the report maker in conveying information to a person or business entity that is responsible for receiving the report made.

    7. Rama & Jones

    A report is a group of data that has been arranged in such a way with a good format, so that it is easy to understand.

    8. Soegito

    A report is an information whose content is in accordance with the facts that happened, supported by complete data, and arranged in an organized manner.

    9. Beautiful

    A report is a document that contains information in the form of narrative, graphics, or tables, which are arranged repeatedly and regularly. Reports can refer to a specific time period, event, event, or subject, and can be displayed or presented in verbal or text form.

    10. Moekijat

    A report is one type of document written by an individual or a group of people, to announce the results of research or something to the authority.

    11. Oxford English Dictionary

    A report is a statement of the results of an investigation of any problem that requires definite information, and is made to help others.

    Report function

    Well, that was some definition of the report according to the experts. Now, let’s talk about the function of a report, let’s go.

    1. As a material in decision-making

    In certain situations or circumstances, a manager or company leader sometimes has to make important decisions in a short time. In such conditions, authentic sources are needed to obtain clear information, so that the best decision can be taken. Well, those decision-making materials are reports.

    2. As analysis material

    Reports are also a very important resource. Because, every time there is a problem in the company. So their team should try to find the cause and make detailed information about the problem in the form of writing a report.

    3. As a monitoring tool and evaluation material

    In companies based on a large scale and involved in many different activities. It is not possible for management to supervise everyone in the company. Therefore, reports are very necessary to monitor the actions of each department and individual.

    4. As a matter of accountability

    Through reports, a fact can be revealed or known after there is accurate data and/or evidence that accompanies it. Of course, those facts should be written in the report, so that they can be used as material for accountability.

    5. As a tool to convey information

    Although the meaning of report is quite diverse, basically the report contains a topic that is explained, both in written and oral form. Reports can cover a variety of topics, but usually focus on delivering information with a clear purpose to a specific audience. A good report is accurate, objective, and complete, so that the report becomes a tool to convey information.

    Report Benefits

    Earlier we discussed about the function of the report. Well, here are the benefits of having a report.

    1. The report can guide improvements in planning further activities.
    2. Assist in policy setting quickly.
    3. Reports are all sources of information.
    4. Helps to know the process and progress of improving an activity.
    5. Assist in recording documentation.
    6. Help solve problems.

    Report Features

    Next, let’s get to know the characteristics of a report. Here are six features of the report.

    1. Brief

    In writing a report, we only need to present the main points. However, of course we write all of that in brief and must be related to what we are going to report, so that the recipient of the report will later be able to easily find out what the actual problem is from the report that we have made.

    2. A report should be logical

    A report will be considered logical when the information presented can be traced with reasonable reasons.

    3. The report should also be complete

    As people who are in charge of making reports, we must also include information as complete as possible in certain points related to our reporting.

    If it is incomplete, then it is not a report anymore. Our report can also be more perfect when equipped with sources of results or bibliography.

    4. Reports are written systematically

    A report will be considered systematic when the written information is arranged in interrelated units and sequentially.

    5. The report should be oriented towards objectivity

    Because reports are often used to help make decisions or solve problems, then reports must be made objectively.

    6. Even if there is a report that can be seen by the general public

    In reality, the initial report was only prepared for a limited number of people. That is, the report is not for everyone to read, but only those who have authority in the organization and then it is decided to publish it or not.

    Report Structure

    Before we write a report, we must know the structure or framework of the report we will write. So that our reports can later be organized in an orderly and good manner. Here is the structure of the report that you must understand.

    1. Introduction

    In the introduction, we can include the meaning and purpose of writing the report, the main problem reported, as well as the systematics of the report.

    2. Fill

    In the content section of the report, we can write down the data and facts of the implementation of the activity. In addition, it is also about the suitability of the implementation with the planning, the problems that occur, and the discussion of the problems.

    3. Closing

    Then in the closing part as the end of the report. We also need to write down the conclusions from the report we made along with suggestions that will later be read by the recipient of the report.

    Things to Consider in Making a Report

    After knowing the structure of the report. It is good that we also need to pay attention to the following things in making a report.

    1. Reports should be clear and concise.
    2. The report should be complete.
    3. Contains the value of objectivity.
    4. Directly on the target or to the point .
    5. Accompanied by some suggestions.
    6. Consistent and firm in his explanation.
    7. On time, that is not long from the specified reporting time.
    8. Delivered to the right person or audience at the right address and purpose.

    Steps to Make a Report

    After understanding what a report is, its functions, benefits, features and structure. Now we learn the steps to make a report in general.

    1. First, we should define the problem to be reported. We can certainly get that problem from the observations we have made during the activity. In addition, we can also catch a problem from whatever is being observed and related to the activity.
    2. After finding the problem. We need to gather material for the report which is data and facts.
    3. Next, we continue by classifying the data we have already obtained.
    4. Then evaluate and process the data.
    5. Then enter the data that has been processed into the report by creating a report structure or framework first.

    Types of Reports

    Friends Reader, up to this point we have studied and understood all kinds of reports. In fact, until the way it is made in general.

    However, to make it easier for us in making reports. Here are the types of reports you should know, so that Reader can write a more specific report.

    1. Reports based on Time

    Reports based on time are divided into two specific reports, namely incidental reports and periodic reports.

    1. Incidental report, which is a report made if needed. For example, an unexpected problem occurs and for its solution there must be detailed information about the problem. In order for it to be completed immediately, the incident report should also be made immediately.
    2. Meanwhile, a periodic report is a report that is compiled routinely or periodically in a certain period of time. For example, such as daily reports, weekly reports, monthly reports and annual reports.

    For example, employee activity reports every month. This activity report refers to a summary of activities carried out by employees during a certain period of time (one week or one month). This kind of report provides details about employee performance, the number of projects that have been successfully completed and are being dealt with, income and expenditure, the number of clients or customers, and so on.

    This type of report is compiled based on summary data from the weekly report. Sometimes, the monthly report not only contains this month’s report, but also the previous month.

    2. Reports based on Properties

    Reports based on attributes are also divided into two types. There are normal reports and important reports.

    1. A normal report is a report whose content is normal and non-confidential, so that when the report is read by others it will not cause a negative impact.
    2. The opposite of the usual report. This important report is of course a report that contains important and confidential matters, so this type of report can only be known by certain people who are the purpose of the report.

    3. Reports based on Submissions

    Different from the previous two types of reports. This type of report is more focused on the way it is disclosed. There are three types of reports based on their presentation.

    1. An oral report is a report delivered orally or directly.
    2. A written report is a report delivered in writing such as memos, letters, and manuscripts.
    3. A visual report is a report delivered through vision. An example of a visual report is a report through power point media in a presentation.

    4. Report based on Form

    Although impressed similar to the type of report based on the presentation. This type of report focuses on the form of the report itself. There are three types of reports based on their form.

    1. A report in the form of a memo is a report written using a memo. Because it is in the form of a memo, the content of the report is of course very short. Usually this report is used for internal interests and is done between leaders or officials.
    2. A report in the form of a letter is a report made in writing in the form of a letter. The content of this report is in the form of a letter, which is between one and four pages. An example of a report in the form of a letter, for example a report on the number of students who leave school.
    3. A written report is a report delivered in the form of a manuscript, either in the form of a short or long manuscript. Examples of written reports are meeting minutes or committee activity reports.

    5. Report based on Content

    Aside from time, nature, delivery, and form. Because the report is a source of information from many things. Of course, there are also types of reports based on their content, which are divided into five types.

    1. An informative report is a report that only contains information.
    2. An analysis report is a report that contains the results of an in-depth analysis.
    3. A qualification report is a report that contains the results of the selection, which is the best or as a qualification determination.
    4. Accountability report is a report that contains the responsibility for the tasks of a person or a group to the superior who gave the assignment.
    5. A recommendation report is a report whose content is a cursory assessment, without further discussion.

    Those are the five types of reports, each of which is also divided into several more types. Well, now Reader can be more specific in making reports, right?

  • Meaning of Lithospheric Layers, Functions, & Composition Materials

    Edutore.com – The lithosphere is the outermost layer of the earth’s crust. It can also be said that the lithosphere is a layer of the earth’s skin because it is at the top or outermost. The lithosphere itself is classified into two types namely Continental and Oceanic Lithosphere. See a more complete explanation of the Lithosphere below, Reader:

    Definition of Lithosphere

    The word lithosphere comes from the Greek lithos meaning rock, and sphera meaning layer.

    The lithosphere is the outermost layer of the earth’s crust and consists of rocks with an average thickness of 1200 km. The lithosphere is the uppermost layer of the earth’s crust that consists of rocks, generally this layer is formed from chemical compounds rich in SO2.

    That is why the lithosphere layer is often called the silicate layer. According to Klarke and Washington, rocks or lithosphere on the surface of the earth is almost 75% composed of silicon oxide and aluminum oxide. The lithosphere is the outermost layer of the earth’s crust made up of rocks and minerals. The rocks that make up the lithosphere are igneous rocks, sedimentary rocks, and metamorphic rocks. The parent of all these rocks is magma. The earth’s crust is divided into two types, namely the sial layer at the top and the sima layer at the bottom.

    The sial layer is the upper crust which consists of two types of crust, namely oceanic crust and continental crust. The main constituents of the lithosphere are rocks consisting of a mixture of similar or dissimilar minerals that are loosely or densely bound together. The parent rock that forms the lithosphere is magma, which is molten molten rock that has a very high temperature and is found under the earth’s crust. Magma will undergo several change processes until it becomes igneous rock, sedimentary rock and metamorphic rock.

    The lithosphere plays an important role in plant life. Soil is formed when rocks on the surface of the lithosphere undergo degradation, erosion and other physical processes into small rocks to sand. Further, this part is mixed with the input of organic components of living things which then form soil that can be used as a place for organisms to live. Soil is a source of various types of minerals for living things.

    In their original form, these minerals are in the form of rocks that are layered on the surface of the earth. Through the process of erosion, minerals that are a source of food for living things are often carried by rivers to the sea and deposited on the seabed.

    Learn more about the structure of the earth’s layers including the atmosphere through the Smart Encyclopedia: Our Earth book which also explains various other important information for Reader to know about our earth.

    Functions of the Lithosphere

    The lithosphere is a part of the earth that directly affects life and has a very large benefit for life on earth. The upper lithosphere is where humans, animals and plants live. Humans perform activities on the lithosphere. Furthermore, the lower lithosphere contains mineral materials that are very beneficial for humans. Minerals or minerals that come from the lower lithosphere include petroleum and gas, gold, coal, iron, nickel and tin.

    Discussions about atmospheric layers, and much more Reader can find in the book Super Fun Encyclopedia: Hello, Earth! Hemma’s work.

    As explained above, the lithosphere is the uppermost layer of the earth’s crust. Therefore, the lithosphere is a layer that can be inhabited by humans. In the lithosphere, humans live and grow. Carrying out all activities in his life. The lithosphere also provides the materials needed by humans to meet their needs. In this layer, humans can build shelters, grow crops, make agricultural land, plantations and others.

    • Serves as a place for living things to live their lives
    • The rocks that make up the lithosphere can be used in various fields (most industrial fields)
    • The compiler can also be used as a source of energy as well as the fulfillment of other human needs.
    • The minerals that make up the lithosphere can be used for many things such as building materials, household appliances, the electronics industry, jewelry, and so on.

    Layer Structure of the Earth’s Skin (Lithosphere)

    Rocks are not only hard things in the form of stones in everyday life, but also in the form of clay, volcanic ash, sand, gravel and so on. The thickness of the earth’s crust is uneven, the crust of the earth on the continent or land is thicker than under the ocean. The earth is made up of several layers, namely:

    • The barosphere is the core layer of the earth which is a solid material made up of the nife layer (niccolum = nickel and ferrum = iron) of the barispheric radius ± 3,470 km.
    • The intermediate layer is the layer found above the 1700 km thick nife. This layer is also called asthenosphere mautle/mautel, is a liquid material with high temperature and glowing. Its specific weight is 5 gr/cm3. The lithosphere is the outermost layer located above the intermediate layer with a thickness of 1200 km and an average density of 2.8 grams/cm3.

    Parts of the Lithospheric Layer This layer also consists of two parts namely the Sial layer and the Sima layer:

    • The Sial layer is the layer of the Earth’s skin that is composed of silicon and aluminum metals, the compounds in the form of SiO2 and Al2O3. In this sial (silicon and aluminum) layer, among others, there are sedimentary rocks, granite, andesite, types of metamorphic rocks, and other rocks found on continental land.
    • Sima layer The Sima layer (silicon magnesium) is the layer of the Earth’s skin that is composed of silicon and magnesium metals in the form of SiO2 and MgO compounds. This layer has a greater specific gravity than the sial layer because it contains iron and magnesium, which are ferro magnesium minerals and basalt rocks. The rocks that make up the Earth’s crust always undergo a cycle or cycle, that is, rocks undergo a change in form from magma, igneous rock, sedimentary rock, metamorphic rock, and return to magma again.

    Learn about the layers of the earth through story books with interesting science content that can be accessed through smartphones. Smart Science Book Series: Earth’s Layers and Fossils – Alpha & Mega Travel to Earth you can only get at Sinaumedia!

    Materials that make up the Lithosphere

    The lithosphere is composed of three main types of material with the basic material of its formation being Magma with various different processes. Here are the rock materials that make up the lithosphere,

    Igneous Rock

    Igneous rocks are rocks formed from incandescent magma that solidified, with about 80% of the rock material that makes up the earth’s crust being igneous. Based on where the frozen magma was formed. Igneous rocks are divided into three types:

    • Igneous Rocks – Igneous rocks occur from the slow freezing of magma while still deep in the earth’s crust. Examples of deep igneous rocks are granite, diotite, and gabbro.
    • Gang/Korok Igneous Rocks – Korok igneous rocks occur from magma that freezes in the passageway between the magma chamber and the earth’s surface. Magma that permeates between the layers of the lithosphere undergoes a freezing process that takes place faster, so that the mineral crystals that are formed are not all large. A mixture of mineral crystals of unequal size is characteristic of igneous rocks.
    • External Igneous Rock – External igneous rock occurs from the magma that comes out of the magma furnace and freezes on the surface of the earth (such as magma from a volcanic eruption). Examples of external igneous rocks are: basalt, diorite, andesite, obsidian, scoria, pumice.

    Sedimentary Rock

    Sedimentary rocks are mineral rocks that have formed on the surface of the earth that have weathered. The parts that come off from the results of weathering are detached and transported by water flow, wind, or by glaciers which are then deposited or sedimented and the process of diagenesis occurs which causes the sediment to harden and become a sediment aid. Sedimentary rocks based on their formation process consist of: Clastic Sedimentary Rocks Chemical Sedimentary Rocks.

    Organic Sedimentary Rocks

    Based on the energy that transports it, Sedimentary Rock consists of:

    • Aeris or Aeolis Sedimentary Rock
    • Glacial Sedimentary Rocks
    • Aquatic Sedimentary Rocks
    • Marine Sedimentary Rocks
    • Malihan Rock (Metamorph)
    • Malihan rocks are formed due to an increase in temperature or an increase in high pressure and occur simultaneously in sedimentary rocks.

    Malihan Rock (Metamorph)

    Malihan rocks are formed due to an increase in temperature or an increase in high pressure and occur simultaneously in sedimentary rocks. Malian rocks consist of three types namely:

    • Malihan Kontak rocks are metamorphic rocks that are formed sequentially due to the increase in temperature caused by the proximity of rocks to active magma. Because of that, usually the region of contact rock formation is not too wide. For example, marble rocks in Tulung Agung and bricks in Bukit BArisan.
    • Malihan Dynamo Rock is a metamorphic rock formed due to high pressure accompanied by heat and impact. This pressure can come from other layers that are on top of the rock. An example is slate.
    • Pneumatalitic contact metamorphic rocks (thermal-pneumatalitics) Pneumatalitic contact metamorphic rocks are a type of metamorphic rock that is formed due to the presence of other substances that enter the rock during the process of metamorphosis (change). In fact, the process is the same as contact rock or dynamo rock. It’s just that during that process there are other substances that enter the rocks. So that it produces different new rocks. An example of quartz that enters Borium gas will form a Topaz stone.
  • Understanding LAN: Purpose, Functions, Components, and How to Build

    Meaning of LAN – The era that continues to develop rapidly brings forth new things, namely modern technology that is increasingly sophisticated, especially technology in the field of communications. The rapid development of modern technology can be seen from the presence of various innovations in information and communication technology. One of the innovations in information and communication technology is the internet.

    The presence of the internet today makes it possible for a person to communicate with everyone in the world. In fact, the communication process can be done in real-time only by using the internet network. This internet network has several terms, among which are LAN, MAN, WAN.

    Before going into the discussion about internet networks. We are first on the computer network. What is meant by a computer network? So, a computer network is a group of computer devices that are interconnected with each other so that they can exchange data and communicate with each other. There are various types of computer networks. LAN is one of the types of computer networks that are surveyed based on their geographical reach. Besides LAN, there are other computer networks such as MAN and WAN.

    This article will discuss the meaning of LAN, how to build a LAN network, LAN characteristics, the purpose and function of LAN, LAN network components, and the advantages and disadvantages of LAN. Let’s listen, Reader!

    What is the meaning of LAN?

    LAN stands for Local Area Network (LAN) which is a computer network that covers only the local area. This means that this network can only be used by users in the LAN area. LAN connects devices to the internet network through a simple network device.

    This LAN network usually has cables such as UTP, Hub, Switch, or Router. An example of this network is the network of computers in schools, companies, or internet cafes (cafes). This network has a limited area that is usually a LAN network. So, the LAN network has a small (local) scale.

    LAN networks are usually used to share resources in a building. A LAN can stand alone, without being connected by an external network or the internet. But, if a LAN is connected to several other LANs, then a new network will be formed, which is called Metropolitan Area Network ( MAN ) .

    So it can be understood that LAN is a computer network where the coverage of the network area is very small and limited. A network is also defined as a computer communication system whose distance is limited to no more than a few kilometers. LAN networks use high-speed connections between 2 to 100 Mbps.

    How to Build a LAN Network?

    How to build a LAN network? LAN networks can be built using wired (cable), wireless (without cable) or both methods. For a wired LAN type built using Ethernet and to build a wireless LAN type using a Wifi signal. LAN is mostly used in homes that use a router to create a network and manage connected devices.

    The router here is useful as a connection center and allows devices such as mobile phones, computers, laptops, and tablets to connect to each other. The router is usually connected with a cable or modem that has internet access on the connected devices.

    The computer device can also be used as a LAN center. The computer device that will be used as the LAN center acts as a server as well as providing access to share files or programs on connected devices. This has often been applied to networks in offices and institutions.

    What are the characteristics of LAN?

    LAN as a network that covers the local area has several characteristics that are easy for us to identify. This characteristic will distinguish the LAN network from other networks such as MAN (Metropolitan Area Network) and WAN (Wide Area Network). Here are some of the characteristics of LAN, namely:

    1. The LAN network does not use telecommunication networks from additional operators.
    2. LAN networks are usually used for private purposes.
    3. LAN network administration is done through local administration.
    4. In a LAN network, there is generally one computer that functions as a server that is useful for organizing the system to run normally
    5. LAN networks are on a narrower geographical scope (office areas, campuses, schools, and homes).
    6. LAN has a higher data transfer speed due to its narrow scope
    7. A LAN can function well without a telecommunication line, meaning that a LAN does not require internet access.

    What is the Purpose of a LAN?

    There are several purposes of a LAN network, among which are:

    1. Aims to connect several computers in a region that has a small coverage.
    2. Aims to enable communication between computer devices and other devices in a network.
    3. Aiming to speed up the process of sharing data and programs between computers in a network.
    4. Aiming to help save operational costs caused by devices in a network that can be used together (for example: printers, servers, etc.).

    What is the Function of LAN?

    Basically, LAN has the main function of connecting several computers in a network that will make the work process faster and easier. A LAN network has several specific functions or uses. The following are the functions of a LAN network, among them:

    1. Connecting two or even more computers

    A LAN network is used to connect two or more computers. Either directly or by using an intermediary media. Two computers can be connected directly by using a UTP cable connected to both computers. Meanwhile, if we want to combine more computers, we need other devices such as Switch or Hub.

    2. Works to transfer files from one computer to another

    When we use a LAN network, we don’t have to go back and forth to insert a flash disk from one computer to another. By using the LAN network we can easily transfer data through the sharing method on our computers.

    3. There is Printer Sharing

    In addition to sharing data and transferring files easily, the LAN network we use can also allow users to share printers . This will make it easier for all users and save the cost of using it.

    What to do? We can start by sharing the printer driver in the Control Panel . Once shared (to all users), the printer can be used together without having to move the computer or printer . We may often see this LAN function in cafes, computer rentals, or printers . When the file is ready, we can print the file according to the choice of printer that is already available.

    4. Availability of LAN Chat

    Another function of the LAN network is that it can be used to send messages between computers in the LAN area. This activity can even be done without having to be connected to the internet, although later the LAN network will still be visible online . If we want to run LAN Chatting , we can use built-in Windows applications such as winchat.exe or use other LAN Chatting software .

    5. As a Computer Remote

    If we want to do remote activities on a computer we can use software like TeamViewer . However, the software can only work when the computer is connected to the internet.

    In a LAN network, we can do remote without first being connected to the internet network. We can take advantage of the Remote Desktop Manager/Connection feature provided by Microsoft . We can also control the computer in the LAN network.

    What are the Basic Components of a LAN Network?

    A LAN network consists of several basic components that are arranged in such a way that they can connect several computers. There are several basic components of a LAN, including the following:

    1. Workstation , is a node/host on a computer system
    2. Server , is a piece of hardware that functions to serve the network and workstations connected to a computer network
    3. Link , is part of the LAN network that physically connects equipment, for example workstations and servers .
    4. Network Interface Card (NIC), is a specially designed electronic network that is useful for dealing with network protocols .
    5. Network Software , is software that plays a role in running the LAN network in order to function as it should

    What Are the Advantages of LAN?

    LAN networks only have a small area coverage. With its small coverage, of course LAN has its own advantages and disadvantages. Here are the advantages of a LAN network, among others:

    1. Can Share Resources

    If we use a LAN network, we can easily share resources with other computers. This advantage will make us more efficient. In addition, by sharing resources , we can also save on production costs. Because we no longer need to buy devices such as scanners, printers, or other storage media for each computer. We just need to buy one, then divide it so that it can be accessed on other computers.

    In addition to sharing devices, we can also share software applications with other devices. This is a very effective advantage to simplify the productivity of our time. However, sharing software applications is also not always cheaper compared to installing software one by one on a computer. Because, the product license for each software is still needed during installation.

    2. Centralized Data

    By using a file server, data on all computers connected to the LAN network will be stored in one place called the server. This advantage will make it easier for users to mutually access files owned by other computers. In addition, the advantage of this centralized data also helps to back up user data if an error occurs, thus causing the deletion of data on the user’s computer.

    If a data is shared in a network, users who have access can see the data at the same time. However, they cannot edit the same recording at the same time.

    When a recording is edited by a user, the recording will be locked so that other users cannot edit it at the same time. If the user has finished editing and saving the results, then the recording will open again. That has the purpose of avoiding confusion that could happen when several people try to edit at the same time.

    The reach that only covers a small area results in the LAN not draining too much of its user fees. In addition, the cable used is not too long. Of course, this is one of the reasons why LAN saves more money.

    3. Data connection between nodes will take place quickly

    4. A LAN network does not require a telecommunications operator to be able to create a network

    What Are the Disadvantages of LAN Networks?

    Whenever there is an advantage, there must be a disadvantage. As for the shortcomings of the LAN network, namely:

    1. Vulnerable Peace

    In a computer network, security is a very vital thing that must be observed, as well as in a LAN network. Here, network administrators in particular play an important role in preventing unauthorized users from accessing data on the network.

    The other factor that affects the security of the LAN network is the user himself. This is because it does not cover the possibility that the user we have is unable to keep the password secret , or it may be that the password he has is too easy for other users to guess, so that this causes unauthorized users to easily break into the network through the previous user. .

    2. There is a problem on the central server

    The emergence of a problem on the central server can have fatal consequences on the LAN network. This can affect the entire computer network, even causing the computer to not be able to communicate with other computers properly.

    Virus infection is one example of a problem that can occur on the central server. This virus infection can occur on one computer and spread to all computers through the central server, this is because all the data on the centralized user is on the server.

    3. Installation is quite expensive

    Installation on a LAN network can be expensive depending on the needs and conditions in the field. The type of topology that we will use also affects the cost that will be incurred. For a wired LAN network (cable), we must first make a cable strip by drilling a hole in the wall or putting it under the floor, then connect the cable.

    On a wireless LAN network, we don’t need to use cables. However, the coverage area of ​​the wireless is limited. Thus, we need a device to amplify the signal, which of course will increase the cost of production.

    4. The connection area is limited

    Of course this shortcoming is because the LAN network only covers the local area.

    Book Recommendations About LAN

    There are several books or reading references that Reader can read about LAN, namely:

    1. Easy Steps to Build a Computer Network (2021) by Zaenal Arifin

    This book is suitable to read for Reader, this book discusses how easy steps to build a computer network. Presented in simple and easy-to-understand language, this book is suitable as an introduction and learning reference for beginners who want to start trying to build a computer network.

    2. Dictionary ++ Computer Network (2021) by Budi Sutedjo

    This book written by Budi Sutedjo can be read by Reader if you want to know the basics about computer networks. This book is a complete dictionary of computer networks, for Reader who are still confused by terms and methods in the world of computer networks, this book will be very helpful.

    3. Complete Guide to Building Your Own Computer Network System (2021) by Madcoms

    After reading this book written by Madcoms, the reader is expected to be able to recognize network hardware and perform configuration to build a computer network. This book published in 2021 is complete with many pictures about network hardware and illustrations of the configuration process to help readers understand the language in this book.

    Such is the article about the meaning of the internet and its complete discussion. Hope it’s useful, Reader!

     

  • The Meaning of Curriculum and Its Functions in the World of Education

    Meaning of Curriculum – In the world of education, curriculum is very important. Without the right curriculum, the students will not get the appropriate learning target. Along with the development of the Curriculum in the world of education, it continues to undergo changes. Everything is adapted to the needs of students in their respective eras.

    With these adaptations, it is hoped that each student will be able to adapt well in society in the future. For those of you who are struggling in the world of education, you must understand what the Curriculum is and its intricacies. The following will explain the meaning of Curriculum and other important things you need to know.

    Meaning of Curriculum According to Experts

    So, Curriculum can be interpreted as a distance that a runner must cover in order to get a medal or other awards. Later, the term Curriculum was adapted in the world of education. So the meaning of Curriculum in the world of education then becomes a group of subjects that must be completed and studied by students in order to obtain a degree or award.

    As for the meaning of this Curriculum is also conveyed in the Law and by education experts, the following is the meaning according to them:

    1. According to Prof. Dr. S. Nasution

    Prof. Dr. S. Nasution in his book titled Curriculum and Teaching states that curriculum is a series of plans to launch the teaching and learning process. As for the plan that was compiled, it is under the responsibility of the educational institution and especially the teachers there.

    2. Dr. Nana Sudjana

    In the book titled Construction and Development of Curriculum in Schools by Dr. Nana Sudjana mentioned, the meaning of curriculum is a set of intentions and hopes expressed in the form of educational programs which are then implemented and implemented by teachers in the school concerned.

    3. Harold B. Alberty

    Harold stated that the curriculum is all activities given to students under the responsibility of the school. This curriculum is not only limited to everything in the classroom, but also all activities outside of school.

    4. Saylor, Alexander, and Lewis

    According to the three figures, the curriculum is all the efforts made and carried out by the school to stimulate students to learn, both in the classroom, on the school grounds, and when outside the school.

    Meanwhile, in the Law on the National Education System No. 20 of 2003, article 1 item 19, it is mentioned that the curriculum is a set of arrangements and plans regarding the purpose, content, and subject matter as well as the methods used as guidelines for learning activities in order to achieve educational goals.

    Curriculum is very important for every school to have as a guideline for teachers. Especially for formal schools, where the curriculum will be a guide and provide direction in teaching. In accordance with the meaning of curriculum, which is something that is planned, then in the world of education all student activities can be arranged in such a way. So that the purpose of education can be achieved.

    In fact, it can be said that if there is no curriculum, then learning in school cannot go well. Because everything has been written in a curriculum. Of course with various variations and adaptations. So it is not surprising if an expert named Beauchamp (1998) states that the curriculum is the heart of education.

    Functions of the Curriculum

    1. Functions For Maintainers

    The function in the context of the curriculum as one part of the education management system in order to realize the purpose of education is as follows:

    a. Integration Functions

    This function means that the curriculum can be a tool that will shape the personalities of learners who are whole and have integrity in society through the world of education.

    b. Preparation function

    This function means that the curriculum is able to provide capital or preparation for students to prepare themselves to enter the next level, including being ready to live in society when they do not want to continue to a higher level of education.

    c. Customization Functions

    The third is the adaptation function, where the curriculum can adapt to the various changes that occur in the community and tend to be dynamic.

    d. Differentiation function

    Fourth, there is the function of the curriculum as differentiation, meaning that the curriculum becomes an educational tool that pays attention to every service to its students. Because every student has differences from each other.

    e. Diagnostic Functions

    The fifth is a diagnostic function, which states that the curriculum functions to understand and direct the potential possessed by each student so that they can continue to explore and hone that potential, including improving the weaknesses possessed.

    f. Selection Function

    Finally, there is the function of selection, which states that the curriculum provides facilities to students by giving them the opportunity to choose a learning program according to the interests and talents of each child.

    In addition to the functions above, the curriculum can also be seen from its function for each involved and related party.

    2. Functions for Involved/Related Parties

    a. For the Principal

    The curriculum has a function for the school principal as a manager and leader in the implementation of education in the school. School principals have the duty to manage education in their respective places, namely by coordinating and supervising each learning. Whether the curriculum is applied according to the provisions or not.

    b. For Subject Teachers

    For every mapel teacher, the curriculum has a function as a guideline in implementing learning inside and outside the classroom. Because each learning becomes the duty and responsibility of each subject teacher.

    c. For Students

    Then the third, for students, who become the target of the curriculum. In the education process, students are the center of attention of every learning. Therefore, the curriculum serves as a reference for students regarding what educational programs should be studied and understood, as well as what learning targets they should achieve at each level.

    d. For parents or the community

    Although not directly involved in learning, parents have an important role in the success of students. In this case they will receive the results of the learning process that has been done at school. So the student’s access to every learning that will be reported to parents is also inseparable from the existence of the curriculum.

    Curriculum development in Indonesia

    Indonesia first used a curriculum with the name Rentjana Pelajaran in 1947. Where the emphasis in learning is on the formation of the character of Indonesian society to become sovereign and independent human beings. Then in 1952, the curriculum was refined again with the title Rentjana Pelajaran Teruai 1952. In this period there was special attention on each teacher to teach only one subject to students.

    Furthermore, in 1964 the curriculum in Indonesia was refined again. This time there is an addition in the form of an emphasis on the Pancawardhana program (ie the development of morals, intelligence, emotions, skills, and the body).

    Curriculum changes in the following year occurred in 1968. Where emphasis was placed on the formation of true Pancasila human beings that should be maximized in every educational institution. The next change was made in 1975. At the time of this change, what was known as the lesson unit was the lesson plan for each unit of discussion.

    After those changes in the following years, the curriculum also experienced many changes. Of course, the scandal happened because of turmoil and various things in the middle of the community. Further curriculum reforms were carried out in 1984, 1994, 1999, 2004, 2006, and the last one was in 2013. The 2013 curriculum, better known as K13, focused on three aspects of change, namely knowledge, skills, and behavior.

    Basically, there were many changes that happened during that period. Not only in the evaluation process, but the content of the curriculum is also continuously updated. Even so, every change certainly has the hope that the world of education in Indonesia can become more advanced. The students who are the main focus of the curriculum can be someone who is much more valuable.

    Components in the Curriculum

    1. Purpose of the Curriculum

    First is the purpose of the curriculum. Everything that is done with a plan, of course must have a purpose, as well as the curriculum. Without a clear purpose, of course what has been formulated will have no meaning. Education in Indonesia certainly also has a purpose, so from that, the formation of the curriculum is aimed at making education accessible.

    Not only in Indonesia, in other countries the curriculum has a purpose. Although each country has different goals than the others. All of that is adapted to the country’s philosophy, human and natural resources, as well as the political and social conditions of the community. The purpose of education in Indonesia according to the level is:

    • The purpose of basic education is to pay attention to aspects of intelligence, knowledge, personality, noble character, and skills as the main foundation. With that foundation, it is hoped that students will be able to live more independently, as well as have the readiness to enter the next level of education.
    • The purpose of secondary education is to improve intelligence, knowledge, personality, noble character, and also skills in order to be a supply for the challenging life of teenagers.
    • The purpose of secondary vocational education, which aims to improve intelligence, knowledge, personality, noble character, and skills that are much better than before. That way, students are ready to live independently in the community and are able to continue their education to the next level.
    • Materials in the Curriculum

    The second component is matter. So, in the curriculum will be included materials in the form of teaching materials for learning activities inside and outside the classroom in order to achieve the learning objectives. As for the material in the curriculum, it should not be made indiscriminately. The material included should be appropriate to the development of each student and meaningful to them, then consist of scientific knowledge that can be tested for truth, be a reflection of national reality, and be able to support the achievement of educational goals.

    2. Learning Strategies

    Then there is curriculum component number three, namely learning strategies. To achieve an educational goal, strategy becomes very important. Learning strategies can be in the form of methods and equipment used to deliver lessons to students. The strategies applied by each country are certainly not the same as each other. All of that depends on several factors, especially natural and human resources. The richer the natural resources and the better the quality of human resources in a country, the strategies applied can be more maximal and varied.

    3. Curriculum Organization

    In this regard, each member has their own view of the curriculum that needs to be applied. Therefore, the diversity that exists makes provision for better organizing the curriculum.

    4. Evaluation

    The last curriculum component is evaluation. This evaluation is intended to check whether the curriculum that has been created and implemented runs smoothly, so that it is effective and able to achieve the goals of education.

    Curriculum concept

    1. Curriculum as a substance

    Curriculum becomes a learning plan for students in school. In addition, it also lists the goals to be achieved from learning both inside and outside the classroom. Therefore, the curriculum becomes a document that includes substance whose content is the formulation of objectives, teaching materials, teaching and learning activities and programs, timetables, and student learning evaluations.

    2. Curriculum as a system

    The second concept of the curriculum states the curriculum as part of the education system. In accordance with its content, the curriculum is intended to support the achievement of educational goals. Therefore, the system in the curriculum consists of the personnel structure and also the work procedures regarding the procedures for compiling the curriculum, implementing, evaluating and perfecting it. From the results of this system, it is hoped that a curriculum that matches the goals to be achieved can be achieved. The function of this system is to keep the existing curriculum dynamic.

    3. Curriculum as a field of study

    The last concept is the curriculum as a field of study. Where as a study, it means that the curriculum also aims to develop knowledge about the curriculum itself and its system.

    That is the meaning of curriculum and various other things about curriculum in the world of education. The importance of the curriculum makes every teacher have to understand its various aspects. So that making it will have a positive effect on students at school. If you want to understand more about the curriculum, 

  • Understanding of Receipts and Explanation of Features, Kinds, and Examples

    Understanding Receipts – Understanding Receipts is a familiar term to our ears. In general, a receipt is a document that shows proof of a payment or receipt of money that has been made.

    However, the term receipt is a non-standard term, but is often used by the community. According to the Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), the correct standard word is receipt. Definition Receipt itself is usually interpreted as proof of receipt of money.

    Definition of Receipts

    Definition Receipt is a document that has a function as proof of payment or receipt of funds. The recipient issues and signs the document, which is then handed over to the payer or lender.

    There are receipts to simplify the bookkeeping process for recording incoming and outgoing cash flows. Receipts generally include company name information, receipt number, name of money giver, nominal amount (numbers and letters), explanation of purpose of payment, location and date of payment or receipt of money, as well as signature and name of recipient.

    To ensure that the receipt has legal force in court in the event of a dispute or other problem, Reader can provide an attachment in the form of a seal with both parties signing the proof of acceptance.

    What Are the Features of Receipts?

    1. The evidence sheet has been divided into two parts, the right and left subsections. Both parties obtain part of this proof of payment, the right sub (smaller print) is allocated for the seller as proof of payment, and the left sub is for the buyer.
    2. Receipts are divided into two parts, with the top or original for the payer and the bottom or file for the party receiving the money.
    3. Both parties include complete information about the product, the amount of money to be paid, the address and date of purchase, and the name and signature of the seller as valid proof that both parties have completed the payment transaction.

    Types of Receipts Based on Usage

    Receipts have a variety of types to suit their use. This article discusses five types of receipts, among others:

    1. Receipt Proof of Payment

    In principle, receipts function as proof of payment. The use of this type of receipt is common during buying and selling activities. Proof of payment can be in the form of installments or installment payments. This receipt generally also explains the amount of money for payment and information from the payer.

    2. Product Transaction Receipt

    Product transaction receipts provide information about items purchased by customers. This sign includes various information such as the complete serial number of the item, the type of item, the customer’s address, and the price of the item.

    3. Money Transfer Receipt

    This type of receipt is generally used in the banking industry. On proof of money transfer payment, there is a feature where the recipient’s account number is clearly listed on the receipt from the receipt.

    4. Cash receipt

    This type of receipt explains which deposits and withdrawals will be sent as financial proof in the next review. Workplaces generally also use this type of receipt.

    5. Money handover receipt

    Money handover receipts are the most common and most commonly used types of receipts. If using the type of money handover receipt, Reader must be able to state the amount of money sent to a person, institution, or company.

    Receipt Format

    In the previous point I have mentioned several times about the problem of the receipt format. Yes, before writing or making a receipt, it is good for Reader to understand what the format of a good receipt is.

    There are several important elements that must be present in the format of creating a sample receipt, namely:

    1. Receipt Number/Receipt

    In general, the writing of alphabetic letters and numbers is adapted to the wishes of the seller as a differentiator between one receipt and another.

    2. Place and Date of Receipt Production

    The place and date of issuance of the receipt should be clearly stated because it can be used as proof of the transaction and the receipt will be useful for recording cash flow. If an inspection is needed at a later date, the information will be clearly readable. This can minimize the possibility of misunderstandings from both sides.

    3. Name

    A clear name is one of the signs to whom the proof of payment is allocated. Clearly list the name of the lender and the recipient.

    4. Products

    Information about the type of product, quantity, price, etc. is generally included in the receipt, especially with the type of payment receipt.

    5. Nominal Payment

    The nominal amount of money paid needs to be clearly written. Usually not only written in the form of numbers, but also letters. In other words, it is written in the form of the symbol of the number of rupiah or whatever currency is used, then it is written again in the form of a sentence.

    6. Purpose of Payment

    Purpose of payment means what the money is paid for. This should be clearly written. For example, the purchase of electronic goods at stores and other goods. So that if one day there is a complaint about the item sold, the buyer can more easily make a product warranty claim.

    7. Signature

    The party who signed the receipt can be referred to as the party responsible for the transaction. Therefore, don’t just sign a blank receipt. There have been many examples of cases that have occurred due to the misuse of these receipts by certain parties.

    If the receipt will later be stamped, make sure the signature of the recipient of the money on the stamp together with the receipt paper. So that the writing between the receipt and the seal are interconnected.

    8. Seal

    Seals that are often used have a value of Rp 10,000. However, not all receipts use a seal. Usually just for transactions that have a large value and have a correlation with the law. For example, the purchase of a motor vehicle or land.

    The use of seals must be in accordance with the provisions of the Indonesian Minister of Finance, namely:

    1. Transactions with a nominal value below IDR 250 thousand do not require a stamp
    2. Transactions with a nominal value of Rp 250 thousand to Rp 1 million must use a Rp 10 thousand stamp
    3. Transactions with a nominal value above Rp 1 million must wear a Rp 10 thousand stamp.

    9. Enterprise Stamp

    The stamp must be present in the proof of transaction including the receipt. The stamp can indicate whether the payment is in installments or installments. The stamp indicates that the transaction was carried out under the authority of the company. This is to ensure that the transaction is valid.

    How to Make a Receipt

    A receipt is a piece of paper that has as a receipt proof of payment. Receipts must be owned by all business people, both individuals and companies, so that they can be used as a record for themselves and others.

    The way to write a receipt also has Reader conditions , it cannot be done casually. Because receipts play a very crucial role in making transactions, especially if the amount of money is relatively large. If there is a writing error in the amount of payment or the name of the recipient, then the receipt can be declared invalid.

    So, what is the correct way to write a receipt? See the following explanation.

    1. Enter the Receipt Number

    In general, receipts have a number column at the top. Well, this receipt number has a function to make it easier for Reader to check receipts, so that it will be easier for Reader to organize receipts from the first number to the last.

    2. Write the Name of the Recipient and Depositor

    The name of the depositor and recipient must also be mentioned in the receipt. Ideally, the name should be written in full and not just a nickname.

    3. Enter the Date of the Transaction

    Do not forget to enter the date when the transaction was made. This is done so that the depositor and receiver both know about the time the transaction takes place.

    4. Enter Amount of Money

    The next step is to enter the amount of money made during the transaction into the receipt. This is so that the transaction becomes more transparent because the depositor and recipient can know the size of the transaction.

    As a reminder, writing the amount of money on the receipt is divided into two, namely writing with letters and numbers. Make sure when writing the amount of money there are no mistakes, especially in entering numbers.

    5. Write a Payment Description

    In the receipt there is generally a column “For payment”, in that column Reader must write a clear and detailed description of the payment. So the recipient of the receipt can understand what the purpose of this transaction is.

    6. Add a Signature

    So that the receipt can be said to be valid, the signature of both the depositor and the recipient is also included in the receipt. If necessary, also include the company’s stamp used as an official proof of payment receipt.

    How to Use Receipts

    After understanding the definition, how to make, to examples of receipts, it is necessary to know how to use them because these receipts are very commonly used by the community. In addition, how to use it also needs to be understood so that the receipt is not misused.

    Prepare the receipt blank and carbon paper as a copy when Reader writes the contents of the receipt.

    Fill in using an appropriate writing instrument, such as a pen. Do not use pencils or markers. Writing is also done so that it is neither too big nor too small. It is important to write the receipt in legible writing.

    Understand the Difference between Receipts and Receipts, Invoices, and Notes

    So that it is easier to distinguish between receipts, invoices , and notes, it would be better for Reader to briefly understand the meaning of each.

    1. Receipt

    As previously commented, that a receipt is a document that has a function as proof of receipt or payment of funds.

    The parties involved, that is between the recipient and the payment of funds, include complete information about the product, amount of money, address and date of purchase, along with the seller’s name and signature as valid proof that both parties have completed the payment transaction.

    2. Invoices and notes

    An invoice is one type of transaction document that can be used to track sales transactions. Generally, the seller makes this invoice consisting of three copies. On the first sheet sent to the buyer, the seller keeps the second sheet for the purpose of billing, and the third sheet to be kept in the invoice book. Reader can monitor the sales process by using automatic software .

    While a note is conceptually similar to an invoice, both are created by the seller. Just enough consisting of two copies. Where the buyer will receive the first sheet. The use of invoices and notes is also only used as proof of purchase that does not require a stamp.

    Example of Daily Receipt Usage

    There are many activities that occur using receipts. The most important thing is to buy and sell goods. The most absolute conditions are the number, name of both parties, denomination, purpose of payment, transaction date and signature.

    The following is an example of the correct use of receipts based on the purpose of the transaction, among others:

    1. Individual purchase and sale receipts of land and property

    There is no letterhead, just numbers, names and signatures. Equipped with a Rp 10,000 stamp which will later be used as a condition for the certificate making process.

    2. Receipts from large-scale shops such as motor or car dealers

    Wearing a cap showing the logo from the company. The number has been automatically registered from the system, filled with the name of the payer, nominal, recipient, and company stamp.

    3. Receipt for the payment of fees in installments

    For example, school tuition, there is already a column for the number of installments. Using a letterhead from the school, confirmation by using the signature of an authorized official, as well as a stamp from the school.

     

     

  • Understanding Chromosomes: Structure, Facts and Differences

    Chromosome is a structure found in cells that stores genetic information. Chromosomes consist of DNA that functions as “instructions” to produce the proteins needed by the cell. Each organism has a specific number of chromosomes found in each cell.

    For example, humans have 46 chromosomes in each cell, consisting of 23 pairs. Genetic information contained in chromosomes can provide instructions for determining individual characteristics, such as hair color, height, and susceptibility to certain diseases.

    Chromosomes have a quite unique structure that makes DNA wrap around proteins to form a coil. The structure is also called histone. Without the twist, the DNA molecule would be too long to enter the cell. There are some other facts about chromosomes and the structure of chromosomes. Read more about the meaning of chromosomes in the following article.

    Meaning of Chromosomes

    Chromosome comes from two Greek words, namely chroma which means color and soma which means body. The scientists gave this name because this molecule is a cell or body structure that appears to have certain colors when viewed under a microscope.

    Chromosomal molecules were first observed in the late 1800s, but the nature and function of the cellular structure of chromosomes at that time was still unclear. Then, in the early 1900s, Thomas Hunt Morgan re-examined parts of chromosomes and found the relationship between chromosomes and the inherent characteristics of living beings.

    So, in general it can be concluded that chromosomes are groups of DNA that are tightly bound together and are located in the nucleus (cell nucleus) of almost every cell in the body. This group of DNA is a molecule that has a shape similar to a thread that carries hereditary information (descendants) such as body height, skin color, to eye color.

    Chromosome molecules are made of proteins and a DNA molecule that contains the genetic instructions of an organism passed down from parent to child. In humans, animals, and plants, most chromosome molecules are arranged in pairs in the cell nucleus.

    Chromosome can also be interpreted as a structure in a cell that contains long DNA that contains part or all of the genetic information of an organism. Most chromosomes in eukaryotes have packaging proteins called histones that, along with chaperone proteins, bind and compact DNA molecules to maintain their integrity.

    This chromosome has a quite complex three-dimensional structure and has an important role in the regulation of transcription. Chromosomes are usually only visible under a light microscope during metaphase of cell division (when all the chromosomes are lined up in the middle of the cell in a condensed or condensed form).

    Before that happens, each chromosome is duplicated (S phase) and the two copies are joined by the centromere to form an X-shaped structure (if the centromere is located at the equator) or a two-armed structure (if the centromere is located at the edge). These joined copies are now called sister chromatids. During metaphase, X-shaped structures called metaphase chromosomes are very compact, so they are easy to distinguish and study. In animal cells, chromosomes reach their highest level of compaction during anaphase during the process of chromosome separation.

    Chromosomal recombination that occurs during meiosis and sexual reproduction plays an important role in increasing genetic diversity. If there is an incorrect manipulation of chromosomes, through a process known as chromosome instability and translocation, cells can experience problems in the mitosis process.

    Normally, this will trigger the cell to initiate apoptosis which causes its own death, but sometimes mutations in the cell can inhibit this process and cause the development of cancer. There are some who use the term chromosome in a broader sense, that is to refer to the individual parts of chromatin in a cell, both visible and invisible under a light microscope.

    There are also people who use the concept of chromosome in a narrower sense, that is to refer to the individual parts of the chromatin during cell division, which are visible under the light microscope due to the high degree of condensation.

    Chromosomal Structure

    Chromosomes consist of 44 or 22 pairs of body chromosomes (autosomes) and a pair of sex chromosomes (gonosomes), namely XX in women and XY in men. In haploid cells such as egg cells or sperm cells, there are 23 chromosomes consisting of 22 autosomes and one gonosome.

    Egg cells have approximately 22 autosomes and 1 X, while sperm cells have 22 autosomes and 1 X or 1 Y. The function of chromosomes is to store genetic information that will be passed down from parent to child and form traits and characteristics. special individual.

    Chromosomes also play an important role in the process of cell division and determine the sex of an individual. The structure of the chromosomes among them are:

    1. Centromere

    The centromere is the structural part of the chromosome located in the middle, which connects sister chromatids. Centromeres help divide sister chromatids correctly during cell division.

    The centromere consists of two parts, namely the near centromere and the far centromere. Proximal centromeres are located closer to the ends of sister chromatids, while distant centromeres are located farther from the ends of sister chromatids.

    The two parts of the centromere are connected by a structure called a kinetochore. During cell division, the kinetochores will elongate and help pull sister chromatids in opposite directions so that correct division occurs. If there is a problem with the centromere, for example the centromere is too long or too short, then cell division will not occur correctly and can cause problems for the cell.

    2. Chromatids 

    The next part of the chromosome structure is the chromatid which consists of DNA molecules bound to proteins. Chromatids are formed during a process of cell division called DNA synthesis or DNA replication. During this process, the DNA molecule will be divided into two exactly the same parts, which will then form two chromatids.

    Chromatids are located side by side with other identical chromatids called sister chromatids. Sister chromatids are bound to each other in the middle by structures called centromeres. At the time of cell division, the chromatid will be divided into two exactly the same parts and form two new cells that have exactly the same chromosomes as the original cell.

    If there is a problem in the chromatid division process, for example there is an error in the division of sister chromatids or an error in DNA division, then it can cause problems in the cell.

    3. Telomeres

    The structural part of the chromosome that is at the end of the chromosome is called a telomere. Telomeres consist of a group of nucleotides that are repeated many times, that is about 6-20 times.

    These repeating nucleotides usually consist of guanine and thiamin. Telomeres are responsible for protecting the ends of chromosomes from damage that may occur during the DNA replication process.

    In addition, telomeres also play an important role in the aging process of cells and can indicate an individual’s health condition. Telomeres that are too short or too long can cause problems in cells, such as genetic mutations or abnormal cell aging.

    4. Chromomer 

    Chromomeres are structures from chromosomes that have a bead-like shape. Chromomeres are accumulations of chromatin material that are sometimes visible during interphase.

    This part of the structure of one chromosome will be seen very clearly on polytenous chromosomes or chromosomes with DNA that has been replicated repeatedly without separation and is side by side until a chromosome cell is formed that resembles a wire.

    5. Satellite 

    A satellite is a structural part of a chromosome that consists of DNA molecules bound to proteins. Satellites are located near the centromere of the chromosome and form a structure called a kinetochore.

    Satellites usually consist of several hundred to thousands of nucleotides repeated many times, consisting of guanine and thiamin. Satellites usually do not carry genetic information that is useful for organisms, but play an important role in the process of cell division.

    Satellites help pull sister chromatids in opposite directions during cell division, so that correct division occurs. If there is a problem with the satellite, such as the satellite being too long or too short, it can cause problems in the cell division process.

    Facts About Chromosomes

    As explained earlier, chromosomes are groups of DNA cells that have a circular and close shape and are located in the nucleus or core of the cell and are present in almost every cell in the body of living beings, both human and animal.

    Chromosomes have some unique facts such as their function, and their mode of inheritance. See the following explanation:

    1. Chromosome Function

    The unique structure of chromosomes keeps DNA wrapped around coil-like proteins called histones. Without the coil, the DNA molecule would be too long to enter the cell.

    As an illustration, if the entire DNA molecule in a human cell was stripped of its histones, it would have a length of about 6 feet or the equivalent of 1.8 meters.

    In order for an organism or living being to grow and function properly, cells must continue to divide. The purpose is to be able to replace old damaged cells with new cells. During the process of cell division, it is important that the DNA remains intact and evenly distributed among the other cells.

    Chromosomes play an important role in the process of cell division. This molecule is responsible for ensuring that DNA is copied and distributed accurately in most cell divisions.

    However, there is still a possibility that this group of DNA can make mistakes in the process of cell division. Changes in the amount or structure of DNA groups in new cells can cause serious problems, such as certain types of leukemia and some types of cancer.

    In addition, it is also important that the egg and sperm cells contain the correct number of chromosomes with the correct structure. If not, then the offspring produced may not be able to develop well.

    2. The chromosomes of every living being are not the same

    In number and shape, this group of DNA varies greatly in every living being. Most bacteria have one or even two circular chromosomes. Meanwhile, humans, animals, and plants have linear chromosomes that are arranged in pairs in the cell nucleus or nucleus.

    The only human cell that does not contain a pair of chromosomes is the reproductive cell or gamete. This reproductive cell can only carry one copy of each chromosome.

    When two reproductive cells unite, the cells will become a single cell containing two copies of each chromosome. This cell then divides again to produce a complete adult individual with a complete set of paired chromosomes in almost every cell.

    Groups of DNA with a circular shape can also be found in mitochondria. Mitochondria is where cells breathe. This part will later have the task of being able to burn glucose and produce the energy needed by the body.

    In mitochondria, DNA groups have a smaller size. The group of circular DNA or chromosomes is outside the nucleus of the cell in the mitochondria and has a function as the cell’s energy generator.

    3. Mode of Chromosome Inheritance

    Chromosomes in humans and most other living things, one copy of each group of DNA is inherited by the female and male parents.

    Because of that, every child that is born will definitely inherit part of the nature of the mother and father. However, the pattern of chromosomal inheritance is different for the small group of DNA found in the mitochondria. Mitochondrial DNA is always inherited from the female parent or egg cell and not from the male.

    4. Men and Women Have Different Chromosomes

    In addition to having physical differences, men and women also have different sets of DNA called sex chromosomes. Females have two X chromosome cells (XX) while males have one X chromosome and one Y chromosome (XY).

    If a person has an unbalanced number of sex chromosomes, this can cause serious health problems. Women who have three X chromosomes (XXX) can experience mental retardation. Men who have two X chromosomes (XXY) will experience Klinefelter syndrome characterized by small testicles, enlarged breasts (gynecomastia), low muscle mass, and larger hips like women.

    Another syndrome caused by an imbalance in the number of sex chromosomes is Turner syndrome. Girls who suffer from Turner syndrome have only one X chromosome and usually have a short body, flat chest, and kidney or heart problems.

    Chromosomal abnormalities

    Abnormalities that occur in chromosomes can usually be grouped into two large groups, among which are numerical abnormalities and structural abnormalities.

    1. Numerical Differences

    Numerical abnormalities will occur if the number of chromosomes is less or even more than it should be, namely two. If a person loses one of them, then the condition is called monosomy.

    Whereas if a person has more than two chromosomes, then the condition is called trisomy. One of the problems caused by chromosomal numerical abnormalities is Down syndrome.

    Down syndrome is characterized by mental retardation in the sufferer, a different and distinctive facial shape and weak or poor muscle strength.

    2. Structural Abnormalities

    Structural abnormalities generally occur due to several things, namely deletions, duplications, translocations, inversions and rings. In general, most of the structural abnormalities occur due to problems in the egg and sperm cells.

    That is the explanation of the meaning of chromosomes. Hope all the discussion above is useful for you, Reader.

     

  • Understanding Fine Art Criticism: Types, Stages

    Criticism of Fine Art – If we talk about fine art, surely Reader knows that it will not be far away from the exhibition and appreciation of art? Yes, it is true, through this exhibition, we will later be shown how the result of a work of art is at the same time an event for self-existence. Indeed, basically, a work of art is something created so that a beautiful feeling arises when people see or hear it, but is it just beautiful?

    Moreover, the definition of “beautiful” according to people is different, especially when observing a work of art. Well, that’s what caused the emergence of a criticism of fine art. So, what is the criticism of the artwork? Will the criticism of this work of art be concerned with those art critics? Who are the art critics in our country? Well, for Reader to understand those things, let’s read the following review!

    Definition of Art Criticism

    Criticism is not only given to literary works, you know , but also to fine art works. Indeed, in theory, to give criticism to a work of art requires insight or understanding of the intricacies of the work of art, both verbal and written. So, the criticism of the artwork is not just given  Not many people know that the existence of this criticism also contributes to the development of a work of art. In fact, it is not uncommon to be able to influence and change someone’s style in creating a work of art.

    The term “criticism” comes from the Greek language, namely ‘kriticos’ which means ‘to observe, compare, separate, and weigh’. Meanwhile, in the Encyclopedia of World Art, literary criticism is a process that leads to a qualitative ‘judgement’ on the existence of a work of art. Another definition of literary criticism is also mentioned by Sem. C. Bangun who states that art criticism is a serious study activity on the existence of a work of art. Well, from some of these definitions, it can be concluded that,

    “Art criticism is the activity of responding to a work of art to show the advantages and disadvantages of a work of art.”

    These disadvantages and advantages can be related to various aspects. When it comes to fine art, it usually concerns the material aspect that shows the quality of a work of art. Along with the development of the times and society’s understanding of works of art, the activities of art criticism can also fulfill various other social functions. Not infrequently, the existence of criticism of this artwork can improve the quality of understanding and appreciation of a fine art, so that it can later be used as a standard to improve the quality of the process and results of a fine art.

    Another thing that is not realized is that if the criticism of this work of art is delivered by a renowned critic, it can influence the existing perception of the quality of a work of art, so that it will also affect its economic value.

    Must Have Skills

    1. Absorptive ability, namely the ability to observe.
    2. Retentive ability, which is the ability to remember and reproduce.
    3. Reasoning ability, namely the ability to analyze and consider.
    4. Creative ability, ie the ability to imagine, interpret, and present ideas.

    Form of Presentation of Fine Arts Criticism

    Basically, a critique of this work of art can be delivered to the community in the form of:

    1. Verbally, that is in the form of criticism delivered orally. For example with discussion activities or art seminars.
    2. In writing, that is in the form of criticism delivered in written form. For example through mass media, magazines, social media, and others.

    Types of Fine Art Criticism

    Based on its function

    In the book Art As Image and Idea (1967) written by the American critic Feldman, a criticism of a work of art can be divided into 4 types based on function. Well, here is the description.

    1. Journalistic Criticism

    The first type of art criticism is Journalistic Criticism, which is art criticism where the results of the evaluation are presented openly to the public. Usually through mass media, especially newspapers. The things that are criticized are not only works of art, but also the exhibition activities.

    This type of art criticism is almost the same as popular criticism, but the assessment is more detailed and sharp. Regarding its delivery through the mass media, it will affect the public’s perception of the quality of a work of art that is being discussed. Characteristics of journalistic criticism:

    • Written for newspaper readers.
    • Not much confiscate the news column in the newspaper.
    • Limited writing time.
    • Only as news.

    2. Popular Criticism

    Almost the same as the criticism of journalists which are equally intended for public consumption. However, in popular criticism this is general so it focuses more on the introduction or publication of a work of art. The style of language used is easier to understand by the general public because it uses simple terms.

    Not infrequently, the writing of this popular criticism is made by writers who do not have critical expertise in the world of art. Here are the characteristics of popular criticism:

    • Can be written by a general writer.
    • Seeing the reality that is developing in society.
    • The language is easy to digest and simpler.

    3. Criticism of Education (Pedagogy)

    Educational criticism alias pedagogy is a critical activity that aims to increase artistic sensitivity and aesthetics as a process of learning art. It is usually used in art education institutions, so that it can directly improve the quality of artwork from its students. If applied in public school education institutions, then it is held in art subjects.

    Characteristics of educational (pedagogical) criticism:

    • Responsive nature.
    • There is a standard form of value.
    • Done in an educational institution environment.
    • There is freedom of discussion.

    4. Scientific Criticism (Scientific)

    The next type of criticism of fine art is scientific criticism alias scientific, which is a type of criticism that is academic in nature so that it requires insight, knowledge, ability, and high sensitivity to evaluate a work of art. It is usually delivered by a critic who is already an expert in the field of art and should follow the methodology of academic criticism.

    Later, the results of this scientific criticism will be used as a reference for collectors or curators of art institutions, such as those in galleries, museums, and auction houses. Characteristics of scientific criticism:

    • Apply certain methodologies or rules in criticizing.
    • The results are not absolute.
    • Scientific in nature.
    • Developed by researchers in a neutral and fair manner.

    Based on the starting point

    Still similar to what Feldman delivered, criticism of fine art also has types based on its point of departure.

    1. Expressivist Criticism

    Through the expressionistic approach applied in the criticism of this fine art work, the critic tends to evaluate and respond to the quality of the ideas and feelings that the artist wants to communicate through his artwork. The activity can be in the form of responding to the relationship between the title, theme, content, and visualization of objects featured in a work of art.

    2. Formalistic Criticism

    Through this formalistic approach, the study of art criticism will be aimed at artworks as a configuration of formal aspects. In short, related to the elements of its formation. For example, in a work of art painting, the target of criticism will be more likely to focus on visual elements, namely color, line, texture, and others.

    In this type of criticism will also discuss the quality of techniques and materials used in fine art works.

    3. Instrumentalistic Criticism

    Through an instrumentalistic approach, later a work of art will be criticized based on its ability to achieve goals, moral, religious, political, and psychological. In this type of criticism, it is not too questioning the formal quality of the art work, but rather looking at the aspect of the context, both now and in the past.

    For example, in the painting “The Capture of Prince Diponegoro” by Raden Saleh, it is not criticized based on its technical quality, but also the connection between the object, content, theme, purpose, and moral message that the painter wants to convey.

    Stages in Fine Art Criticism

    As has been written before, in making a critique of the art work it cannot be arbitrary. Must go through several stages first. Well, the following are the general stages that must be done before compiling a critique of a work of art.

    1. Description

    The first stage is description in the form of finding, recording, and describing everything that is seen as it is. Well, in order for this stage to go well, the critic must understand and know the general terms that are often used in the art world. Without that understanding, critics have difficulty describing what they see.

    2. Formal Analysis

    The second stage is formal analysis in the form of tracing a work of art based on its formal structure or constituent elements. At this level, the critic must understand the elements as well as the principles of arrangement in fine arts.

    3. Interpretation

    The third level is interpretation in the form of interpreting the meaning of a work of art. Covers themes highlighted, symbols presented, other issues. This stage is open and influenced by the point of view and insight of the critic. The wider his vision, the richer the interpretation of the meaning he criticizes.

    4. Evaluation or Assessment

    The last stage is the evaluation alias evaluation which is in the form of determining the quality of a work of art when compared to other works of art of the same type. Comparisons will be made with various aspects, both formal aspects and context aspects. Well, in this stage usually use steps in the form of:

    1. Relating as many works of art to be evaluated as possible with similar works of art.
    2. Determine the purpose or function of the artwork to be examined.
    3. Determining the extent to which the artwork “deviates” from what has been there before.
    4. Examining works of art in terms of specific needs and the point of view behind them.

    Function and Purpose

    The compilation of criticism of fine art works is not done solely to “show off” the critic’s vision of the art world to the public. Many functions and purposes can be accepted through the criticism of this work of art.

    The Function and Purpose of Fine Art Criticism

    1. Bridging artistic perception and appreciation as well as aesthetics in works of art. Usually, between art creators and art connoisseurs.
    2. For art creators, this criticism can be feedback to reflect on their expressive communication.
    3. Creating a point of view on the interpretation of works of art.
    4. Make it easier for the general public to understand what the content of the artwork is.
    5. As a form of appreciation for works of art.
    6. As an evaluation activity on the statement of good and bad values ​​with the context of fine art.
    7. Gaining satisfaction in discussing works of art.

    Understanding What an Art Critic Is

    Previously, Reader had encountered the word “critic” several times. However, does Reader know what a critic is in the art world?

    An art critic is someone who criticizes a work of art belonging to others or his own (self-critic). Ideally, an art critic should have sharp senses, thoughts and feelings in a work of art. Well, the sharpness of the senses goes into the ability of reasoning and creativity…

    Just a little trivia, an art critic must also understand various theories, starting from the theory of art science, philosophy of art, elements of art, anthropology of art, sociology of art, to the review of modern and contemporary art. Later, those theories are used to strengthen the construction of the criticism so that it is more objective.

    Not only theory, an art critic must also have experience and association in terms of observing, researching, and comparing a work of art. The experience will also later be very helpful in enriching critical insight. Another thing that an art critic should pay attention to is how to understand the artist’s thoughts and feelings. Even the biography and life of the artist of the work of art will not escape the observation of an art critic.

    When an art critic delivers his criticism in written form, then the medium of criticism is language. The language used is of course effective and communicative, both when delivered orally and in writing. The meaning of effective language refers to aspects of grammar that are good and correct, appropriately used, and in accordance with the public target. Meanwhile, the meaning of communicative language is that the language is easily understood by readers or listeners, according to their intellectual level.

     

  • The Meaning of Criticism: Types and How to Express It

    Definition of Criticism – Every human being has the freedom to think. This is what makes us have the right to give criticism or evaluation. Where criticism is meant here is criticism that can build to make someone or something better than before.

    In addition, criticism can also be interpreted as providing an assessment of something. For example, when you are watching something like a movie. Well, not infrequently we will comment on what we have watched.

    The act of giving comments or evaluations can fall into the category of criticism. Actually, the assessment is not only criticism, but there are also essays. So that you also understand more about criticism, here is a complete explanation.

    Definition of Criticism

    Common criticism is said to be a deeper type of analysis about a work that uses theoretical studies to provide an evaluation, interpretation or observation about the work.

    Because criticism is an evaluation, then the text of criticism also has a purpose in explaining the advantages and disadvantages of something like a work. In addition, criticism can also provide input or solutions to the creators of a work. Usually, some things that often experience criticism are film, literature, music, painting, dance and drama.

    The word criticism itself comes from the Greek language, Clitikos , which has the meaning of distinguishing. Whereas according to the Big Indonesian Dictionary or KBBI, criticism is criticism or feedback or satisfaction that is sometimes also accompanied by a description and consideration of the good and bad of a work, opinion and so on.

    In addition, criticism can also be interpreted as an expression or response related to the good or bad of an action that will be or has already been made. The existence of criticism can also make the work more tested for quality.

    In other words, criticism can also be interpreted as an opinion against another opinion which is based on an observation and analysis in advance which will then be interpreted against a position that supports or does not support, contradicts or does not contradict the object being criticized.

    Criticism based on its function

    After we learn together about the meaning of criticism in general, we will then learn about the type of criticism seen in terms of its function. Where criticism based on its function is still divided into several more categories.

    Well, so that you can better understand the type of criticism based on its function, here is a complete explanation.

    1. Journalistic Criticism

    Journalistic criticism is criticism about the results of research that will be presented openly to the public. Usually, journalistic criticism will be expressed in mass media such as newspapers. Journalistic criticism is not only on works of art, but also on exhibition activities.

    The existence of journalistic criticism is almost the same as popular criticism, but more detailed and sharper in terms of its evaluation. Because journalistic criticism uses the mass media, its existence can influence the public’s perception of the quality of what is being typed.

    There are several characteristics possessed by journalistic criticism, among them are as follows.

    1. Written for newspaper readers.
    2. Not much confiscate the news column in the newspaper.
    3. Limited writing time.
    4. Only as news

    2. Popular Criticism

    Next, there is popular criticism, where this popular criticism is almost the same as journalistic criticism because it is intended specifically for public consumption. Even so, popular criticism is general, up to the introduction or publication of a work of art.

    The style of language used in popular works will be easier for the general public to understand. This is due to the use of simple terms. In addition, writing popular criticism can also be done by writers who do not have specific skills in the art world. Some of the characteristics of popular criticism are as follows.

    1. Can be written by a general writer.
    2. Seeing the reality that is developing in society.
    3. The language is easy to digest and simpler.

    3. Criticism of Education

    There is also educational criticism or commonly referred to as pedagogic. Where this pedagogic is an activity of giving criticism with the aim of increasing sensitivity to artistic and aesthetic aspects as a process of learning art.

    Usually, this educational criticism is applied to art education institutions. Therefore, the existence of educational criticism will be able to improve the quality of artwork from students. If it is applied to educational institutions such as public schools, then the existence of this educational or pedagogic criticism will be present in art subjects.

    Just like other types of criticism, educational criticism also has several characteristics as follows.

    1. Responsive nature.
    2. There is a standard form of value.
    3. Done in an educational institution environment.
    4. There is freedom of discussion.

    4. Scientific or Scientific Criticism

    Further, there is a type of scientific or scholarly criticism. Where this type of criticism has an academic nature that also requires knowledge, ability and high sensitivity in evaluating a work of art.

    Usually, this scientific criticism will be delivered by a critic who is already an expert in a certain field such as art and must follow academic methodology.

    In the field of art, the existence of this scientific criticism will be used as a reference for collectors and curators of art intuition, for example those in galleries, museums and auction houses. The characteristics of scientific criticism are as follows.

    1. Apply certain methodologies or rules in criticizing.
    2. The results are not absolute.
    3. Scientific in nature.
    4. Developed by researchers in a neutral and fair manner.

    Types of Criticism Based on the Point of Refusal

    In addition to the type of criticism based on its function, criticism is also divided into types based on its starting point. In this type it is still divided into several categories in it. Well, for you to understand better, here are some categories that are in the criticism based on the point of departure.

    1. Expressivist Criticism

    Furthermore, there is expressionistic criticism, which is one of the types of criticism that is often used in works of art. In that field, critics are more inclined to give evaluations and respond to quality evaluations of ideas and feelings that artists want to consume through the artwork they create.

    In expressionistic criticism, it will be more related to the title, theme, content and visualization of objects featured in a work of art.

    2. Formalistic Criticism

    Formalistic criticism is also often used in the field of art. Where the purpose of formalistic criticism on artworks is to configure its formal aspects. Simply put, related to the manufacturing element.

    For example, in the art of painting, it will be more inclined to visual elements such as lines, colors, textures and so on. In addition, this critique also discusses related to the techniques and materials used in fine art works.

    3. Instrumentalistic Criticism

    Instrumentalistic criticism of a work of art will be more directed towards the achievement of goals, moral, religious, political and also psychological. In instrumentalistic criticism will not question too much the formal reality that is in the artwork. But instrumentalistic criticism will focus more on aspects of the context in the present and in the past.

    Tips for Giving Constructive Criticism

    The existence of criticism on something will make it have the best quality. Therefore, criticism is needed that can build what is criticized. However, it cannot be denied that not everyone is able to give constructive criticism.

    Therefore, it is important for us to know more about how to give constructive criticism. Because, the assessment we give will have an impact on something that is being criticized.

    There are several ways that can be done when giving criticism so that the evaluation we give can be constructive instead of bringing down. Well, to be more clear, here are some tips in giving constructive criticism.

    1. Start On A Positive Way

    You will be able to find something positive to say in the process of giving constructive feedback. Even like a statement of appreciation that is spoken sincerely and honestly can be one form of constructive criticism. Where the positive appreciation you say will make others feel appreciated. Of course you can add positive criticism behind the appreciation given before.

    2. Avoid Emotions

    When you give criticism in an emotional state, then it is most likely that the presentation done looks emotional, angry as well as body language and tone of voice will make other people more defensive and less consider the existence of the criticism you give. Therefore, in giving criticism try not to be in an emotional state.

    3. Smile and Use Warm Body Language

    Let others know if you are someone who can give them empathy. This will make him feel more comfortable and don’t forget to show if you also feel the same way as them.

    4. Pay attention to the tone of voice

    In order not to create an emotional impact, you should also keep the tone of your voice so that it can appear stable and friendly. Where the tone of voice is also able to communicate many things and sometimes even more than a word that has been chosen.

    Try not to raise your voice or allow tension to arise. Use a tone of voice that can really provide comfort when you listen to the recipient of the criticism if the situation is the opposite.

    5. Avoid Negative Body Language

    Avoid negative body language, blaming or attacking personally. This needs to be done in order to further reduce the possibility of the assumption that you are speaking in an angry state. Also avoid using judgmental and abusive language.

    6. State Your Opinion Specifically

    The more specific the criticism you give, the easier it will be to carry out the criticism. Focus on the main objective, not even on your opinion. Give a more detailed explanation for each criticism given.

    For example, by giving key aspects such as more specific examples so that people receiving criticism can better know what they should do.

    7. Give Encouragement to Criticize Yourself

    In some cases showing that letting the person concerned find the solution independently before you give an opinion on what to do is one of the right actions. Therefore, you can also give encouragement so that the concerned party can try to criticize themselves.

    8. Focusing more on the behavior than on the person

    In giving criticism it will be better if you focus on the behavior and not on the person. Therefore, in giving an assessment of personal characteristics, one should be more careful. This is because such actions can sometimes make someone hurt.

    9. Provide Helpful Feedback

    When you want to help others to be able to change in a positive way. Of course in this condition you need to convey things that can make the related parties do something rather than you conveying things beyond their control.

    Giving criticism related to the things they can do will make you look like you are building and empowering them. On the other hand, giving criticism by conveying things he can’t do will make them feel uncomfortable.

    This is because they cannot do anything about the situation that is happening, even though they basically want to do a certain action to be better.

    10. Avoid Talking Too Much

    If you really don’t want to make others feel overwhelmed about the criticism given, then avoid using too many words. Criticizing with too many words, even in a positive form, will still create the effect of presenting a list of problems to the relevant parties. This will make the nature of the conversation carried out negatively.

    11. Know When to Stop Criticizing

    Knowing when to stop talking is also one method of constructive criticism. Where you can try to criticize one or two of you and end the conversation. Repeating the same problem will not be productive or will even trigger negative feelings in the person who is criticized. Find the signs when your criticism feels enough delivered.

    12. Follow Up

    When you finish giving criticism, then you can try to give observations. In this case you can observe the person after talking to you. Try to give an assessment of the progress he has made.

    If possible, discuss more concrete steps in order to achieve the goals of the evaluation you gave earlier. Give praise for every progress he has made.

    Accepting and praising the success of others is also able to provide an incentive for that person to continue their good efforts and make them feel valued and appreciated.

    The Impact of Constructive Criticism

    It cannot be denied that giving positive criticism is really difficult. Because some things that are considered painless are actually the opposite. Therefore, applying some of the tips above can help you to give constructive criticism.

    Interestingly, there are several positive impacts that will be obtained by the relevant parties when receiving positive criticism that you have presented. Where they will start to continue learning, wanting to grow to a better side.

    In addition, the existence of criticism will also make them more aware of any shortcomings they have. In fact, it is not rare that the presence of constructive criticism can trigger a person to control his emotions.

    Well, that’s a complete description related to the meaning of criticism to its impact. By knowing the explanation above, you will find it easier to give constructive criticism without having to be afraid to express an assessment.